Está en la página 1de 431

Audit Checklist for Store Department

Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

16

17
18
19
20

Check points
Is the control copy of store
department SOPs available?
Is the personnel having knowledge
of current GMP requirements?
Is the incoming raw materials entry
register available?
Is the housekeeping maintained?
Is the sampling booth area
cleaned?
Is the weighting balance having
proper tag of calibration status?
Is the balance calibration record
available?
Are the calibrated standard weights
available?
Is
the
calibration
certificate
available?
Is the standard weights are
properly stored?
Is the quarantine, approved and
rejected area designated?
Are the UNDER TEST label pasted
on all the incoming raw materials?
Are the SAMPLE label pasted on
all the sampled raw materials?
Are the APPROVED labels pasted
on all the approved raw materials?
Are the raw materials stored at
their respective place?

Check
the
cleaning
and
housekeeping condition record of
quarantine, approved and rejected
area.
Are the packing materials stored
separately?
Is the cleaning and housekeeping
maintained at packing material
store area?
Is the temperature and relative
humidity record maintained for all
respective area?
Is the approved vendor list

Observation

Recommendatio
n

Action
taken by

available?
Is the FIFO system follow?
Check the production requisition
slip record?
23
Check the issuance record.
24
Check the dispatch record.
25
Check the general cleaning and
housekeeping of store.
26
Check the personnel hygiene.
27
Check the safety equipments.
28
Check the drum storage yard for
cleaning, housekeeping and status.
29
Check the proper segregation at
drum storage yard?
30
Check the other records.
31
Is
line
clearance
activity
performed?
You might also like:

Self Audit Checklist for Maintenance Department

Self Audit Checklist for Quality Control Department

Self Audit Checklist for Production Department

Internal Audit Plan as per GMP


21
22

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 12:56 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reactions:

Self Audit Checklist for Quality Control Department


Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Check points
Is the control copy of QC department SOPs
available?
Are the personnel having knowledge of
current GMP requirements?
Is the housekeeping maintained?
Is the weighting balance having proper tag of
calibration status?
Is the balance calibration record available?
Are the calibrated standard weights
available?
Is the calibration certificates available?

Observation

Recommendation

Action
taken by

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Is the standard weights are properly stored?


Are the status labels available on each
instrument?
Is the instrument calibration record
available?
Check the temperature and humidity record.
Check the cleaning record.
Check the cleaning of sampling devices.
Are all the sampling devices properly stored?
Check
the
general
cleaning
and
housekeeping of QC.
Are the specifications available for raw
material, packing material, in-process
samples,
intermediates
and
finished
products?
Check the in-process testing record.
Check the raw material testing record.
Check the final product testing record.
Check the stability record.
Check the stability chamber record.
Check the solution preparation and
standardize record.
Check the control sample record.
Check all instrument log book.
Check the primary standards and its storage.
Check the mobile phase status of GC and
HPLC.
Check the HPLC column record.
Check the test request slip record.
Check the personnel hygiene.
Check the safety equipments.
Check the other records.

35

Check the environment where control


sample store?.
Is log book of destruction of control sample is
maintained?
Is the out of calibrated instrument well
labeled?
Is QC Chemist validated?

36
37
38

Is the sample in QC lab well labeled?


Are the personnel following GLP?
Are training given to new personnel?

33
34

39

Are all QC personnel in proper dress code?

40
41
42
43

Is glassware breakage log book maintained?


Check DM water analysis record.
Check reference standard records?
Is proper sampling plan available?

Internal Audit Plan as per GMP

:This document describes the conduct of the Management review of the quality system for G
Conformance Certification, including the conduct of an internal audit to assure the system meets
requirements of ISO Guidelines and is effectively implemented..

2.0 Objective: To Provide Documented Procedure for review of the quality system for GMP Conformance Certificat
including the conduct of an internal audit to assure the system meets the requirements.
Scope : To define role/responsibility of various functions responsible for Internal audit
4.0 Responsibility
o

Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee: Arranges for the internal audit
gathers all information for the Management Review.

QA Management Committee: Provides all information as required by the Board of Internal Audit

Management Review Committee and is responsible for follow-up corrective and preventive actions
o
5.0

QA Internal Auditor(s): Conduct the internal audit according to GMP.


Procedure :

The QA Management Committee, by consensus, selects three qualified individuals for the Board
Internal Audit and Management Review Committee. Members to the Committee serve until they
replaced.

The Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee arranges for the half yearly inte
audit to be conducted.

The date for the audit is established by mutual agreement between the Board of Internal Audit a

Management Review Committee and the General Manager Production and Asst. Manager Produc
(AMP).
The audit is conducted by any member of the board or Internal auditor qualified to participate on

Certification Board so long as the auditor is not a member of the QA Management Committee
qualified and knowledgeable in certification, auditing.

The audit must be conducted at least every 06 months.

During the audit, personnel responsible for the area audited are immediately notified of the outco
of the audit of their area.

During an audit, it is possible that a difference of opinion can arise as to the severity of
observation. It is important not to spend too much time debating the merits of the observation.

does not appear that the difference of opinion can be resolved, then the auditee should be inform

that the audit report is subject to review by the Board of Internal Audit and Management Rev
Committee and the QA Management

The draft report is issued to the Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee wi

14 calendar days. The Committee members review and comment on the report and a final repo
issued.
The final internal audit report is submitted to the QA Management Committee.

The QA Management committee drafts a response to the audit report that is finalized after review:

Findings, nonconformities, trends, and other opportunities for improvement are identif

investigated to determine the causes; and corrective/preventive actions are developed. These acti
are implemented as soon as possible and recorded.

The response to the internal audit report is submitted to the Board of Internal Audit and Managem
Review Committee for their concurrence.

Upon agreement on the response to the internal audit, the Board of Internal Audit and Managem
Review Committee prepares a complete Certification Program Management Review Report
includes, as appropriate,:
Results of internal and external audits
Feedback from clients and interested parties related to the fulfillment of the Certification Process
Feedback concerning impartiality
Follow-up actions from previous Certification Program Management Review Reports
The status of corrective or preventive actions
The fulfillment of objectives
Changes that could effect the management system
Appeals and complaints

The Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee submit their Certification Progr
Management Review Report to the QA Management Committee.

The Certification Program Management Review Report with the response to the internal aud

discussed at the next meeting of the full Board. The expected outputs of the review includes decisi
and actions related to:
Improvement of the effectiveness of the management system and its processes.
Resource needs.

Decisions and actions of the Board are documented in the Board Minutes and all o

Corrective/Preventive Actions are reviewed and their status documented at all subsequent quart
Board Meetings.
Effectiveness of completed actions is reviewed at the next Program Management Review.
6.0

Abbreviations :

GMP: Good Manufacturing Practice

QA : Quality Assurance

Self Audit Checklist for Production Department


Sr.
No
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Check points
Is the control copy of production department SOPs
available?
Are the personnel having knowledge of current GMP
requirements?
Are the lots of raw material properly stored?
Are the lots of raw material having proper labels of
status?
Is the housekeeping maintained?
Is the weighting balance having proper tag of calibration
status?
Is the balance calibration record available?
Are the calibrated standard weights available?
Is the calibration certificate available?
Is the standard weights are properly stored?
Is the reactor area cleaned?
Is the status label of reactor available?
Is the BMR requisition slip record available?
Check the calibration status of temperature gauges.
Check the calibration status of pressure gauges.
Check the status of centrifuge.

Observation

Recommendation

Acti
tak
by

17.
18.
19.

Check the cleaning of centrifuge and centrifuging area.


Check the condition of centrifuge bags.
Check the status of dryer.

20.
21.
22.
23.

Check the cleaning of dryer and drying area.


Check the calibration status of temp, Gauge of dryer.
Check the trays and trolley condition.
Check the status of sifter.

24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.

Check the cleaning of sifting area.


Check the status of multi mill.
Check the cleaning of milling area.
Check the finished product packing area.
Check the availability and stock of packing materials.
Check the temperature and humidity record.
Check the cleaning of sampling devices.
Are all the sampling devices properly stored?
Check the general cleaning and housekeeping of plant.
Check the test request slip record.
Check the personnel hygiene.
Check the safety equipments.
Check the other records.

37.

Is ECR available?

38.

Check the ECR.

39.
40.
41.
42.

Check the condition of fluid bed dryer.


Check the condition of reactors.
Are there work instruction labeled on all equipments.
Are records maintained for Solvent Receipt, Usage &
Recovery In Plant?
Check the records of Solvent Receipt, Usage &
Recovery In Plant.
Is there any training record for new employee?
Check the training record and training schedule.
Is the pipeline properly marked with directional arrows?
Is logbook of all Equipment properly maintained?

43.
44.
45.
46.
47.

Vendor Audit for Validation

1.

2.

GENERAL:
1.1

Building Maintenance

1.2

Reception

1.3

Administrative Block/O

1.4

Utility Block

1.5

Maintenance

1.6

Surroundings

PERSONNEL:
2.1

Or

2.2

Qu

2.3

Pro

Me

Fo

Fo
2.4

Pe

Fo

Fo
2.5

Fa

Fo

Fo

Wa
2.6

Pe
Sh

WC
Lo

Ca

3
.

2.7

Jo
Re

2.8

Tra

2.9

En

2.10
2.11

:
:

Dr
Sy

2.12

Pe

PLANT & BUILDING :


3.1

: Well equipped and sufficient area for Storages

a)

: Raw Material

____________

b)

: Packing Material

____________

c)

: Intermediate

____________

d)

: Finished Goods

____________

e)

: Cleaning / Schedule

____________

f)

: Cleaning of used equipment


and accessories
: Separate area for storage of incoming material
Quarantine area
Approved materials Storage
Rejected material Storage
Sampling area
Dispensing area
Adequate cleaning , washing and toilet area

g)

3.2
3.3

Separate canteen area

____________

3.4

Utilities like compressed air, steam, nitrogen gas


area qualified and lines are identified with arrow
mark for flow direction.

3.5

HVAC are providing for critical operation.

3.6

Drain is properly sanitized for critical area.

3.7
3.8

Water purification system


Water distribution system and quality of water
used
Men and materials movement system

3.9
3.10
3.11

Area is product dedicated or group of products


are manufactured then se the list of the product.
Cross contamination possibilities

3.12

Area cleaning procedure

3.13

Procedure of handling of rejected material.

3.14

Lighting level

3.15

Handling of sewage and waste

3.16

Sanitization of process equipments

3.17

Pest control system

3.18 : EQUIPMENT
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
k)
l)
m)

Design MOC of contact parts


Qualification of equipment
Cleaning operation and preventive maintenance
procedures
Cleaning frequency
Measuring device calibration procedure
Cleaning validation approach
Computerized system are qualified as per CCF
part 11
Access to the computerized system is limited
Identification
Cleaning requirement for same product
for Product Change Over
Housekeeping & Sanitation

n)
4
.

5.

Special Procedure / Precaution

MANUFACTURING CONTROL:
4.1

: Identification level for material under processing

4.2

Written Manufacturing Procedure

4.3

Deviation Control Procedure

4.4

Means of Communication

4.5

Status label for rejected / released material

4.6

: Used container control

TSE QUESTIONNAIRE:
5.1
5.2
5.3

: Have you obtained the COS Certificate from EDQM for the
Material you are supplying to us? If yes please attach the copy.
: Is any of the starting material used in the manufacturing from
Animal Origin. If yes, Please ensure to obtain the TSE free Certificate
from your supplier.
: Is the Production Line dedicated?

5.4 : If NO Please Specify:a) Are the equipments shared with any other product, which uses
original starting material?
b) Do you have sufficient Cleaning Procedure?
b) Is cleaning procedure validated?
5.5

: Is your batch COA contains the TSE / BSE free Declaration. If no submit an
undertaking to send the batch wise TSE / BSE free Declaration for all
supplies to us?

6. RECORD KEEPING :

7.

the animal

6.1

: Material issue control

6.2

: Equipment Log

________________

6.3

: Process Record

________________

6.4

: In-Process Results

________________

RAW MATERIAL CONTROL:

________________

7.1

Raw Material Receipt Control

__________________

7.2

Approved Material Segregation

__________________

7.3

Rejected Material Control

__________________

8.

QUALITY CONROL:
8.1: Raw Material Specification / Test Procedure & its control_______
8.2: Calibration Record

______

8.3: Finished Product Analysis & Release control


8.4: Testing facilities
9.

_______

INFORMATION RELATED TO OTHER PRODUCT MANUFACTURED:

9.1: List of product manufactured (Attach Sheet)


9.2: Product change over control (Cleaning Validation) _______
10.

FILING SYSTEM:
10.1

11.

_______

Retrievable

______________

NON CONFORMANCES IF ANY:


CRITICAL
MAJOR
OTHER

12.

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

13.

PREVENTIVE ACTIONS:

14.

CLOSURE OF AUDIT:

CONCLUSION

SIGN
DATE
This Blog
Linked From Here
The Web
This Blog

Linked From Here

The Web

Monday, December 6, 2010


Self Audit Checklist for Maintenance Department
Sr.
No.

Check points

01

Is the control copy of Maintenance


department SOPs available?

02

Is the personnel having knowledge of


current GMP requirements?

03

Is the preventive maintenance schedule


available?

Observatio
n

Recommendatio
n

Action
taken by

04

Check the
records.

preventive

05

Are equipments labeled with last


maintenance date and next due
maintenance date?

06

Are the
available?

07

Check the
record.

08

Is the temperature gauges calibration


record available.

09

Check
the
temperature
calibration record.

10

Are the pressure / vacuum gauge


calibration record available?

11

Check the calibration record.

12

Check the break down maintenance


record.

13

Check the DM water generation record.

14

Check the AHU maintenance record.

15

Check the AHUs filter cleaning record.

16

Check the AHUs differential pressure


record.

17

Is there any training schedule for new


entrant in maintenance department?

18

Are new entrant trained after join


maintenance department?

19

Are
there
any
postponement
of
maintenance?

20

Is
the
department
follow
the
postponement
of
the
schedule

equipment
equipment

maintenance

qualifications
qualification

gauges

documents
for
the
schedule

maintenance and send it to review by


QA department?
21

Is there check list for each equipment


for preventive maintenance?

22

Check the equipment check list.

23

Are all electrical motor labeled and well


maintained?

24

Check the status of the electrical motor.

25

Check the maintenance status of DG


Set.

26

Is the maintenance store area clean?

27

Check
the
housekeeping
maintenance store area.

28

Are all storage tanks properly labeled?

of

You might also like:


Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiological Analysis
1.0

OBJECTIVE: To lay down a procedure for handling of out of specification (OOS) result in
Microbiological analysis and monitoring.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Control Executive/ Microbiologist

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
In all the reports the identified reason shall be written on a continuation sheet to the annexure
provided. A copy of the above investigation report shall be maintained with the batch
manufacturing records concerned to increase awareness and for any future reference
4.1

STERILITY TEST

4.1.1

If evidence of microbial growth is found, the product to be examined does not comply with
thetest for sterility, unless it can be clearly demonstrated that the test was invalid for causes
unrelated to the product to be examined .The test may be considered invalid only when one or
more of the following conditions are fulfilled:

4.1.1.1The data of the microbiological monitoring of the sterility testing facility shows fault;
4.1.1.2 A review of the testing procedure used during the test in question reveals a fault;
4.1.1.3 Microbial growth is found in the negative controls;
4.1.1.4 After determination of the identity of the microorganisms isolated from the test, the
growth of this species or these species may be ascribed unequivocally to faults with respect to
the material and / or the technique used in conducting the sterility test procedure.
4.1.2 If the test is declared to be invalid it is repeated with the same number of units as in the original
test.
4.1.3 If no evidence of microbial growth is found in the repeat test the product examined complies with
the test for sterility. If microbial growth is found in the repeat test the product examined does not
comply with the test for sterility.
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
4.2.1 If the microbial counts are found to be more than or equal to the alert limit then
open a deviation report (annexure I) through Q.C. Head to the concerned Production head.
Production personnel shall check the working discipline, supply of air, safety measures etc.
4.2.2

If the count exceeds or reaches the action limit then the urgent notification to the Production
head and Engineering Head through Q.C. Head shall be followed by an investigation for the
same.
- Supply of air
- Working discipline
-

Review of data from the same place and others from the incubated plates
If any of the plates does not indicate the same then no action is necessary.

If any of the plates indicates more count then perform additional cleaning, disinfection or
fumigation and retraining to the operator shall be given.

All activities shall be recorded as per the annexure attached with this SOP.

More number of samplings (i.e. double the original) shall be preformed at the same location
where the counts observed were beyond or equivalent to the action limit but an additional
relevant parameter of monitoring shall also be performed which shall be incorporated with the
same annexure.

All the batches manufactured during the said period shall be subjected to the microbial
analysis for MLT / Sterility &BET in order to ensure that the batches manufactured are in
accordance with the relevant finished product specifications. The investigation report shall be
submitted to the Q.C. - Head

4.2.3

If the bio-burden is found out of specified limit in the core areas the identification of the
organism shall be performed.

4.2.4

Stop the production immediately and check all the possible parameters, which can affect bioburden of the area.

4.2.5

Check the pressure differential of the area, which must be within the specified limit.

4.2.6

Check the air velocity of LAF /HEPA filters, which must be within the specified limit.

4.3

If the investigation / review of manufacturing activities (e.g. sterilization process, aseptic


filtration, environmental conditions, personnel practices) indicates failure of manufacturing
activities, then the batch shall be considered as failed to comply sterility.

4.4

MICROBIOLOGICAL AND BET EXAMINATION OF WATER


If only the alert is exceeded without finding an undesirable microorganism the release of the
preparation for which this water has been used, has to be taken under hold till the result comes.
In case of the counts touching the action limit then all the batches manufactured shall be re
analyzed by taking 25 grams and making the allowance for the larger size specimen for the
analysis.
In the case of counts crossing or touching the alert limit or action limit in any type of water the
same will be intimated to the production department and maintenance department. If the result

cannot be attributed to the analytical error, sampling error, contamination in the container
sampled then the microorganism detected must be identified / differentiated by taking sample
from all other points.
4.4.1

Adequate sanitization of the system shall be ensured to eliminate the source of contamination
with a rigorous check for the same.

4.4.2

All the investigations made shall be recorded in the annexure III provided with this SOP.

4.5

MICROBIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION OF RAW MATERIAL / FINISHED PRODUCT

4.5.1

The first action is to intimate the Q.C. Head.

4.5.2

Retest the same material/product but with a sample size of 25 grams by making allowance for
the larger size specimen.

4.5.3

Results for the same shall be intimated to the Q.A. Head for final decision.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURE I
FORMAT FORDEVIATION REPORT TO PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT

(Deviation Report About the environmental monitoring)


Revision No.

REF. SOP NO.:

: 00

Page No.: 1 of 1

Effective Date:

Sampling point where deviation occurred:


Name of the Product

Date:

Batch no.:

Deviation :

Parameter:

Requirement :
Results :

Signature :

Corrective action in Production Department:


Cleaning, Disinfection, Change of disinfectant, Checking of LAF unit parameters
Checking of HVAC system, Education to Operators, Repair/Maintenance Work (Cross
whichever is not applicable and specify actions taken).
Maintenance

Repair

Comments

..
Name

Signature
Date:

Repeated Sampling :

Parameter:
Result:
Comments

by

Q.C.

Head

for

Approval

of

Production

Signature :

ANNEXURE - II
Format for Corrective Report After Sampling of Environmental Parameters in Production

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.

: 00

Effective Date:

Page No.: 1 of 1

Date :

Deviation :

Date of repeated deviation :


Corrective Measures in Microbiological Lab
Checking of condition s of LAF unit during working , Checking of equipment
Growth promotion test for the media used.
Done By :

Checked

By :

Results of Microbiological Impurity of Finished Product :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

Comments of Quality of Quality of Control - Head :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

Comments of Quality Assurance - Head :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

ANNEXURE III
INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR FAILURE IN TEST FOR BACTERIAL ENDOTOXIN & M.L.T

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.

: 00

Page No.: 1 of 1

Effective Date:

Sample
Analyzed on

Analysed By

Checked By

Preparation parameters for


Sampling container

Procedure of sampling

GP test of media

Any testing error


BET
Micro tips

Test tubes

Pipette

LAL reagent
Batch No.

Mfg.

Expiry

Reconstituted

on

.LAL Reagent water


Batch No.

Expiry

Parameters of depyrogenation/sterilization apparatus:

Blank

Validation Status

Calibration Status

Results of other samples with same conditions tested on the same day.
Details of Raw material used in finished product
Result
Test repeated
Date

Result

Microbiologist
ACTION TAKEN :
Production Head

Engineering Head

Quality

Control Head
CONCLUSION
(Results of MLT for Other Samples to be enclosed)

Microbiologist

QC

Manager
Date:

Date:

Remarks from Q.C. Head


Name:

Sign

You might also like:

Disposing of microbiological culture media


Out of Specification Procedure
Reprocessing of Out of Specification Batch
OUT OF SPECIFICATION INVESTIGATION FORM

Contract Laboratory Approval Questionnaire


S. No.
Questions
1.0
GENERAL INFORMATION

Date :

1.1

Name and Address of Laboratory:

1.2

Contact Person:
Name:

2.0

Phone No.:
FACILITIES:

3.0
3.1

Mobile No.:

E-mail ID:

Please specify what type of analysis you are performing?

PERSONNEL:
Number of Staff:

Director(s)/ responsible person of the organization:

Head/ Responsible person for Analysis:

Q A:

Q C:

R & D Lab:

Microbiology:

Others:

No.

3.2

S.
No.
3.3
3.4

3.5

3.6
4.0
4.1

No. of Approved persons:

Questions
Do you have a written training program for analyst?
Does your training program include the following:

GLP

GMP

Job training

Safety and Environmental issues

ISO principals

Is efficiency of training regularly checked?

By examination

By any other relevant process

Are there written job descriptions for all


employees?
INSTRUMENTS AND CALIBRATION:
Is there an approved preventive maintenance
program for all equipment used in laboratory?
(Attach a list of Instruments)

Yes

No

Comment
s

4.2

Is SOP of all instruments present?

4.3

Is SOP of calibration of all instruments present?

4.4

Are all instruments properly calibrated and labeled?

4.5

Is there a calibration calendar maintained?

5.0

QUALITY MANAGEMENT:

5.1

What is your QA System based on?

5.2

S.
No.
5.3

GMP

cGMP

USFDA

ISO 9001:2000

Are you regularly inspected?

By clients

By National authority

By Foreign authority

By FDA

Questions
Does your Laboratory have GMP/ USFDA
/cGMP/ ISO approval? If Yes specify
Name of authority

1.

Date of Certificate

Yes

No

Comment
s

2.
3.
(Attach copy of certificate)

6.0
6.1
6.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Is there system for rejection of sample?
Do you have specification approved by QA for
working/reference standards of the product?
For Physical, Chemical requirements
For Microbiological requirements

6.3

6.4

6.5

Is there procedure for sample handling and its


inspection regarding:

Name of customer

Sample quantity

Batch No.

Date

Product related to Pharmacopoeia

Do you use statistical method for evaluation?

Total sample received

No. of sample passed

No. of sample failed

Do you have all documented procedures for each


and every step?

6.6

Are there validated:

Analytical procedure?

Cleaning procedure?

7.0

ENVIROMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:

7.1

Do you have any environmental policy?

S.
No.
7.2
7.3

Questions

Yes

Do you have ISO 140001 certificate?


(Attach copy)
Do you check the environmental conditions of
laboratory regarding:

Temperature

Relative Humidity

8.0

WATER:

8.1

Which type of water used for analysis?

8.2

How will you check the quality of water and it is


free of contamination?

Questionnaire filled by:


Name
Signature and stamp of company
Designation
Date:
You might also like:

Vendor Approval Questionnaire

Sending sample to contract lab

CLEANING OF QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY

No

Comment
s

APPROVAL AND REJECTION OF PACKAGING MATERIALS


LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 11:58 AM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reactions:
Newer Posts Older Posts Home
Subscribe to: Posts (Atom)

First Aid
Purpose: To provide a documented guideline for the first aid treatment n case of any accident.
2.0 Objective: To provide a first aid treatment.
3.0 Scope:

Employees / Visitors / workmen.

4.0 Responsibility :

Follow up

: Officer Personnel & Administration

Over all responsibility

: General Manager (Adm).

5.0 Procedure :
Training
First aid training shall be given to selected employees of each department.
Detail training of the first aid shall be given to some employees of the company.
The list is as follows and shall be available in each department for easy reach out
during emergency.
Serial No.

List of trained employees


Department
Name of Trained employees

The first aid box shall be numbered and located at identified and marked
positions as following

Serial No.

Locations of first aid box


First aid box number
Location of First aid Box

Each first aid box shall contain following -

Serial No.

Contents of first aid box


First Aid box Contents
Quantity

Every Monday from Personnel department personnel or General Manager (Adm) shall
Review the contents of first aid box and shall replenish the required item. The
Record of review shall be kept.

Date/day

Contents

Review of first aid box


Replenishment
Reason for

Reviewed

Discarded

checked

details

by

Items

replenishment

OK/not OK

submitted
to QA.

Accident Prevention Guidelines

urpose : To provide a documented procedure for preventing accident & Recording accident.
2.0 Objective : To maintain safety aspects
3.0 Scope

Preventing accident & Recording accident

4.0 Responsibility :
Follow up

: Concern department head

Over all responsibility: Personnel & Administration Manager.


5.0 Procedure :
Accident Prevention

Workman shall engage themselves in the duties which have been assigned to them.
The execution of their duties must be in the safe manner laid down in S.O.P. for the
operation, of the machine or duty concerned.

Removal of guards or safety devices, cleaning of machines which they are


Running, etc., are expressly forbidden.

Workmen working beyond the height of 10 feet shall wear the safety belt.

If any employee / work man working beyond the height of 10 feet on ladder shall work
with one additional work man / employee to hold ladder.

Safety instructions given or posted on Notice Boards are to be followed.

Workman shall not keep sharp edge tools into their pocket.

Any employee / workman working with electricity shall wear safety shoes &
Sock proof gloves.

Any workman working with hazardous chemicals / acid shall wear the safety
Wears like goggles, gloves etc.

Speed of vehicle inside the factory premises shall not exceed 20 km / hr.

When welding work is to be carried out in closed area, extra fire extinguisher
Shall be provided.

After working with oil, floor shall be cleaned thoroughly to wipe out the oil.
Solvents shall be stored in tight closed container.

Used drums of solvent / chemicals shall be discarded by skilled workman.

Sufficient emergency light shall be provided.

Entry into transformer yard / explosive storage yard shall be restricted to selected
Personnel.

Machine which is under maintenance shall be labeled as Under Maintenance.

Workman shall enter into water tank, drainage, septic tank only after permission Of
Personal & Administration department.

Workman shall carry out repairing work of high pressure line / high temperature Line /
or any explosive line only after permission of Engineering In charge.

Wear earplugs near high noise area.

ecording of Accident

Accident shall be recorded into Accident Register.

The accidents are categorized as critical major and minor depending on the

Seriousness of the incident.

Action taken upon Accidents:

The First aid, if required, after the accident shall be provided at the earlier marked
Locations and trained persons are available.

The telephone no. of fire station, doctor, ambulance shall be displayed in all the
Departments to call upon in an emergency.

The affected employee shall be immediately rushed to the hospital, if needed and is
provided the required medical help.
partner-pub-1809 ISO-8859-1

Search

qualityassurance

Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH


"Quality Assurance is a planned and systematic approach to generate enough confidence in the
quality of the product and processes in the long run as per the specifications." In this biog you
will find post related to ICH, GMP and Quality related matters.

Pages

Home

About Me

GPAT

Earn upto Rs. 9,000 pm with PaisaLive.com

This Blog
Linked From Here

The Web
This Blog

Linked From Here

The Web

Tuesday, December 14, 2010


Guidelines for production activities as per safety & cGMP requirement

Purpose

: To provide guideline to ensure that different production activities are carried out in compliance with
safety & cGMP requirement, at pre-determined frequency.

Objective : To provide a documented guideline to ensure that different production activities are carried out in
compliance with safety & cGMP requirement, at pre-determined frequency.

Scope

: Scope of this SOP covers all the production disciplines.


4.0 Responsibility :

Primary

: Officer Production

Secondary

5.0

Executive Production

Procedure :
ORGANISATION & FUNCTION:

The department must have a team that would perform all the function meeting cGMP
requirements. It must also address to documentation, audits and training aspects pertaining to
production jobs.

The production department organization must be structured to ensure that production


functions are carried out safely, in accordance with cGMP requirements, efficiently and promptly
to support other service areas. It must be resourced with adequate numbers of appropriately
qualified and trained staff.

PREVENTION OF CONTAMINATION AND CROSS CONTAMINATION:

Before starting any process in equipment make sure equipment should be cleaned and line
clearance has been given by QA.

The production area should be clean and free from dust and dirt so the intermediate and final
product could not be contaminated.

The cleaning of production area should be looked after by PA department.

TRAINING:

All the staff shall be covered for cGMP, Safety and Job-related training as per the training
procedure.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES:

SOP must be prepared for all activities that are quality critical or safety critical or relate to key
business areas. These SOPs must be prepared, reviewed & authorized and controlled in
accordance with Site SOP.

The SOPs must include specific maintenance instructions, lubrication details, Spares
requirements, frequency of maintenance, responsibilities for carrying out the job &
documentation, etc. as appropriate. The department activities must be reviewed to identify
operations which need preparation of SOP and the current SOPs must be updated / reviewed
as scheduled.

AUDITS:

Department audits must be carried out to monitor the production aspects of departmental
activities in regard to its impact on SHE, Energy Conservation and Quality matters.

VALIDATION:

According to cGMP requirement process validation should be done.

CHANGE CONTROL:

All changes must be fully documented, assessed and authorized prior to the work being carried
out.

In line with good documentation practice, change in process must be controlled as per the
good manufacturing practices. If any Change occurs it should be reported to QA department
with reason.

n documents.

The documents will include following:

Batch Manufacturing Record : Documentation pertaining BMR is to give information about


progress in production of intermediate as well as final finished product include every information
regarding to the product like analytical report, condition of reaction given for reactor etc.

Equipment Cleaning Record: Before conducting next step in process cleaning of equipment
should be required. To follow cGMP ECR should be filled by production department before
starting every process. By checking ECR, QA department give line clearance to production
department.

Validation Documents: Documentation pertaining to validation would include protocol and


reports for DQ, IQ and OQ activities and would be in line with the guidelines given. Protocols
and reports must also include suppliers documentation (e.g. pressure test, calibration
certificate, etc.) besides the reports generated at site.
You might also like:

ICH Guidelines for Pharmaceuticals


GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN

SAFETY MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES


Instructions for Engineering department as per safety and cGMP
requirements
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:29 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Monday, November 29, 2010


GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN

ON-SITE EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT


Emergency Leader / Main Controller (Senior Plant Manager).

Co-ordinate all activities from Emergency Control Center.

Duties:

Assess extent and nature of emergency.

Sequential stoppage of operation as per requirement.

In case of fire, necessary arrangement and provision of fire squad and systems to the
emergency spot and its neighbouring sections.

Organise necessary ambulance and medical treatment for affected persons if required.

Arrangement of necessary hospitalization of victims.

Evacuation of site (partially or full) if required.

Preserve evidence.

Organise investigation.

Before allowing re-entry to the site check if the conditions are safe (Toxicity, fire hazard,
structural stability etc.).

Re-starting of plant operations only after ensuring steps for prevention of re-occurrence.

Arranging for evacuation of neighbouring population if need be

Deal with media.

ADVISORY TEAM
Responsibility of Advisory Team.

On hearing the emergency alarm will proceed emergency control center.

Remain with Emergency Leader at the emergency control center and advice him as needed.

In case Emergency Leader has to leave his post for some reasons any of the member of the
Advisory Team will take over as the Emergency Leader.

If needed Factory Manager can deputy Emergency Leader to the site to be of help to the
incident controller.

Deal with media.

ACTION TEAM A

Shift in-charge of affected plant.

Dy Manager / Asst. Manager of affected plant.

P.E. of affected plant.

Inform emergency control center / security about location and nature of emergency.

Inform his department head.

Minimise the consequence by

Eliminating source of ignition.

Shutting down the operation as per requirement and other areas as guided by the incident
controller.

Arranging to activate fire hydrant system.

Ensuring the appropriate use of fire fighting material by fire fighting squad.

Stopping loading / charging operations.

Evacuating the plant if required in consultation with incident controller.

Department Head
Take over the responsibilities of the shift in-charge upon arrival and proceed as
listed above.

Security and Fire Fighting squad

Proceed the scene of emergency

Consult the shift in-charge and decide the line of action.

Ensure the stock of fire fighting material.

ACTION TEAM A

DUTIES OF SENIOR CHEMISTS:

1. As shift in charge will be involved in fire fighting operations senior chemist will ensure
that
Operations of affected area will be stopped and reactions will be stopped in safer mode
with consulting shift-in-charge.

Evacuation of affected area.

Shifting of raw material intermediates from affected area.

Duties of chemists and junior chemists.

2. Chemists and junior chemists will form fire fighting team with guidance of incident
controller start fire fighting with fire extinguishers and then with fire hydrant system if
required.

ACTION TEAM B

Shift-in-charge of neighbouring plant / departments.

Dy. Managers, Ams, neighbouring plant / departments.

Manager Maintenance

Manager Electricals.

On hearing Alarm
When instructed by the Emergency Leader

Ensure that Fire hydrant pumps are in operation.

Inform people about the emergency.

Prepare for the evacuation with short notice.

Arrange head count, repeat this at Assembly point.

AMs, Dy. Ams of other Department.

Proceed to own areas.

Take over responsibilities from shift-in-charges and ready to shut down plant if needed.

Manager Maintenance

Provide Engineering assistance to Emergency Leader.

By ready with rescue equipments to extricate trapped personnel.

Manager Electricals.

Ensure that adequate power supply is made available for sensitive plant operation and
emergency lighting.

Make available an electrician near incident controller.

ACTION TEAM C
Security Officer / Safety Officer

On hearing Alarm

Security Officer

Proceed towards emergency.

Control traffic.

Arrange guard at gate to inform essential personnel.

Prevent unauthorized entry at gate.

Get additional help if needed.

Communicate with city Fire Brigade.

Arrange Fire Fighting squad to fight fire.

Safety Officer

Proceed to scene of Emergency

Ensure adequate supply of safety appliances.

Inform with consultation with advisory team to Factory Inspector and other Authorities.

Offer any help expected, advice with First Aid render First Aid to injured person.

Keep in touch with doctors and medical team.

Ensure availability of vehicle for moving injured to hospital.

ACTION TEAM D

Doctors.

First Aiders

Stores-incharge

For Doctors / Nurse

Keep Ambulance ready to proceed to scene of Emergency at short notice.

Priorities causalities for treatment call First Aiders.

Consider sending causalities for specialist treatment.

Arrange hospitalization, additional ambulances.

For First Aiders

Proceed to the site and hospital as per decided by Emergency Leader to render assistance.

Stores-in-charge.

Arrange additional supplies of Fire Fighting or Safety equipments as required.

ACTION TEAM E
All staff members not listed in emergency action team.

Contact workmen and supervisors.

On hearing Alarm

Get back to work places (if safe) and await instructions from supervisors.

Avoid panic

Do not go to the scene of Emergency unless specifically instructed by Emergency Leader.

Contract persons should stop work and assemble at security gate.

WORKS TO BE DONE FOR MOCKDRILL

1. Location of emergency control center


2. Location of assembly polls.
3. Emergency alarm system.
4. Formation of observers team.
5. Formation of fire fighting team from each shift.

6. First aid training (specially to QC chemists as availability is round the clock).


7. Facilities in First Aid / Ambulance room.
8. Prior training of fire fighting to all teams.
9. Training programs for all teams as per their functions.
You might also like:

ICH Guidelines for Pharmaceuticals

Guidelines for production activities as per safety & cGMP requirement

Guidelines for Engineering & Maintenance

Internal Audit Plan as per GMP


LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:09 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Saturday, November 27, 2010


ICH Guidelines for Pharmaceuticals

What is the purpose of ICH ?

The objective of ICH is to increase international harmonisation of technical requirements


to ensure that, safe, effective and high quality medicines are developed and registered in
the most efficient and cost effective manner.

Goal of ICH
The goal of ICH is to promote international harmonisation by bringing together
representatives from

the three ICH regions (Europe, Japan & USA) to discuss and establish common
guidelines

Stability

Q1A(R2) Stability Testing of New Drug Substances and Products

Q1B Stability Testing : Photostability Testing of New Drug Substances and


Products

Q1C Stability Testing for New Dosage Forms

Q1D Bracketing and Matrixing Designs for Stability Testing of New Drug
Substances and Products

Q1E Evaluation of Stability Data

Q1F Stability Data Package for Registration Applications in Climatic Zones


III and IV

Analytical Validation
Q2(R1) Validation of Analytical Procedures: Text and Methodology

Q2A Validation of Analytical Procedures: Methodology (in Q2(R1)

Impurities

Q3A(R2) Impurities in New Drug Substances

Q3B(R2) Impurities in New Drug Products

Q3C(R4) Impurities: Guideline for Residual Solvents

Pharmacopoeias

Q4 Pharmacopoeias

Q4A Pharmacopoeial Harmonisation

Q4B Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for Use in


the ICH Regions

Q4B Annex 1Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Residue on Ignition/Sulphated Ash General
Chapter

Q4B Annex 2 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Test for Extractable Volume of Parenteral
Preparations General Chapter

Q4B Annex 3 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Test for Particulate Contamination: Sub-Visible
Particles General Chapter

Q4B Annex 4A Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts


for Use in the ICH Regions on Microbiological Examination of Non-Sterile
Products: Microbial Enumeration Tests General Chapter

Q4B Annex 4B Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts


for Use in the ICH Regions on Microbiological Examination of Non-Sterile
Products: Tests for Specified Micro-organisms General Chapter

Q4B Annex 4CEvaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts


for Use in the ICH Regions on Microbiological Examination of Non-Sterile
Products: Acceptance Criteria for Pharmaceutical Preparations and
Substances for Pharmaceutical Use General Chapter

Q4B Annex 5 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Disintegration Test General Chapter

Q4B Annex 6 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Uniformity of Dosage Units General Chapter

Q4B Annex 7 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Dissolution Test General Chapter

Q4B Annex 8 Evaluation and Recommendation of Pharmacopoeial Texts for


Use in the ICH Regions on Test for Sterility General Chapter

Quality of Biotechnological Products


Q5A(R1) Viral Safety Evaluation of Biotechnology Products Derived from
Cell Lines of Human or Animal Origin

Q5B Quality of Biotechnological Products : Analysis of the Expression


Construct in Cells Used for Production of r-DNA Derived Protein Products

Q5C Quality of Biotechnological Products : Stability Testing of


Biotechnological/Biological Products

Q5D Derivation and Characterisation of Cell Substrates Used for


Production of Biotechnological/Biological Products

Q5E Comparability of Biotechnological/Biological Products Subject to


Changes in their Manufacturing Process

Specifications
Q6A Specifications : Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for New Drug
Substances and New Drug Products: Chemical Substances (including
Decision Trees)

Q6B Specifications : Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for


Biotechnological/Biological Products

Good Manufacturing Practice


Q7 Good Manufacturing Practice Guide for Active Pharmaceutical
Ingredients

Pharmaceutical Development
Q8(R1) Pharmaceutical Development

Quality Risk Management


Q9 Quality Risk Management

Pharmaceutical Quality System

Q10 Pharmaceutical Quality System

Q8/9/10 Q&As Questions & Answers


document

You might also like:

GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN


Guidelines for production activities as per safety & cGMP requirement
SAFETY MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES
Quality Manual as per ICH Guidelines
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:30 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Newer Posts Home
Subscribe to: Posts (Atom)

Search This Blog


Search

powered by

Subscribe via email


Enter your email address:

QualityAssurance en_US

Subscribe

Delivered by FeedBurner

Subscribe Now: standard


Subscribe in a reader

Ad Space
Subscribe Now: google

Labels

Audit (4)

Calibration (36)

Guidelines (3)

Manual (4)

Microbiology (7)

Questionnaire (2)

Standard Operating Procedures-Maintenance (15)

Standard Operating Procedures-Personel (13)

Standard Operating Procedures-Production (14)

Standard Operating Procedures-QA (38)

Standard Operating Procedures-QC (59)

Standard Operating Procedures-Warehouse (16)

Validation (11)

Worksheeet (3)

Recent Comments
Blog Archive

2011 (2)
o

01/09 - 01/16 (2)

Available Guidance and Best Practices for Conducti...

Procedure Of Corrective And Preventive Action

2010 (224)
o

12/26 - 01/02 (19)

Procedure for conducting Stability Studies

Out of Calibration of instruments

Analytical report numbering

Validation of QC Chemist

Record maintained by Quality control department

Labeling by Quality control department

Functions of Quality control department

Cleaning of HPLC columns

Re-testing of raw materials and intermediates

Acceptance of raw materials on supplier certificat...

Sending sample to contract lab

Sampling, testing and release of raw materials

Calculation in QC department

Opening and closing of QC department

Cleaning of sampling tools

Standardization and storage of Reference and Worki...

Preparation, Standardization and Shelf-life of Vol...

Sampling of Raw Material

Internal Audit Plan as per GMP

12/19 - 12/26 (1)

Quality Control of Capsules

12/12 - 12/19 (59)

Calibration of Disintegration test apparatus

Calibration of Friability test apparatus

Calibration of serological water bath

Bar Coding System for packaging materials

Code numbering system of packaging material

Cleaning & Sanitisation of Sampling room

Operating Leak test Apparatus

Sampling and Testing of packing materials

Operation of colony counter

Operation of compound microscope

Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiologic...

Media Fill operation in the sterile dry powder fil...

Disposing of microbiological culture media

Preparation of Microbial Plates

Operation and Cleaning of Laminar bench

Maintaining of Bacterial Cultures

Limulas Amoebocyte lysate test (LAL)

Monitoring Personnel of sterile area in Aseptic ar...

Operation and Calibration of Heating-Blocks

Environmental monitoring of the microbiology labor...

Fumigation and de-fumigation of Aseptic area

Swab sampling and testing for clean rooms

Monitoring of Aseptic area by Passive air sampling...

Air sampling in Sterile area

Cleaning and disinfections of Aseptic area

Validating Corporate Computer Systems: Good IT Pra...

Guidelines for production activities as per safety...

Requisition and issuance of Raw materials

Solvent Recovery

Environmental Monitoring

Line Clearance prior to Batch

Operation, and cleaning of Sparkler Filter.

Operation, cleaning of Rotary Dryer

Operation and cleaning of Milled Steel Reactor

Operation, cleaning of Tray Dryer

Operation, cleaning of Sifter

Operation, cleaning of Multimill

Operation, cleaning of Fluidized Bed Dryer(FBD)

Operation and cleaning of Nutche filter

Operation and cleaning 48 Stainless Steel Centri...

Operation and cleaning of Glass Lined Reactor.

Operation for Gas Chromatograph with Head Space-Sh...

Calibration for Gas Chromatograph with Head Space-...

High Performance Liquid Chromatography-HPLC (Shima...

Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrophotometer (FTIR...

Hot Over oven

Karl Fischer Apparatus

Magnetic Stirrer

Analytical balance-Polar E-200 DX

Melting Point Apparatus

Muffle Furnace

pH Meter

Analytical balance-Libror

Potentiometric Titrator

Analytical balance- Mettler Toledo

U V cabinet

Humidity Chamber

Digital Photoelectric Colorimeter

Bulk Density Apparatus

12/05 - 12/12 (89)

11/28 - 12/05 (43)

11/21 - 11/28 (13)

FeedBurner FeedCount

Feedjit
Feedjit Live Blog Stats

Total Pageviews
4,819

Get Answers to Quality related Matters


Share it
Followers
Amazon Deals

Facebook Badge
Anis Mustafa

Create Your Badge

Powered by Blogger.

SAFETY MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES


Chemical industries are more prone to safety hazards, in terms of fire, explosion
etc., resulting in huge loses of resources and precious lives.

Hence, it is of utmost importance that each one, irrespective of his position in the
organization should exhibit a high sense of responsibility to safeguard the safety of
his area of operation, in his own as well as in the interest of the organization.

The hazards could be of various types, arising from chemical, mechanical, electrical
or civil in nature.

1. Chemical Hazards:

Most of the accidents occurring in chemical industries are of this nature. The
causes for the hazards can be attributed to:

i)

Process deficiencies.

ii)

Faulty equipment design

iii)

Equipment failures.

iv)

Lack of training for the operating personnel.

v)

Improper storage and handling of incompatible chemicals.

vi)

Poor taste for GMP.

vii)

Human error, etc, etc.

i)

Chemical processes :

The processes involving many of the chemicals with different chemical


characteristics should be well established and validated in lab/ pilot plant scale
before being implemented for commercial production. HAZOP study should be
conducted for each stage of the process and possible hazards in the process should
be eliminated.

ii)

Equipment design:

Adequate attention should be paid while designing of an equipment for a process,


taking into consideration of moc of the equipment, process parameters like
temperature, pressure, safe operational capacity, safety gadgets like flame-arrester,
vent line valve, control valves etc.

iii)

Process equipments:

All process equipments which have bearing on the process control, such as
temperature indicators, pressure / vacuum gauges, safety / control valves etc.
should be of reliable quality and tested for performance before being installed.
There should also be a system for periodic inspection and maintenance of these
equipments.

iv)

Training:

Training plays an important role in the skill development process. All the
operational persons should be adequately trained for the job.

v)

I. Storage and Handling of chemicals:

1.

All chemicals based on their chemical properties and incompatible nature with
other chemicals must be stored as stipulated in their MSDS.

2.

Chemically incompatible materials should not be allowed to come into direct


contact with each other under any circumstances.

3.

Proper personnel safety equipments, such as apron, goggles, face shield, nose
mask, safety shoes should be worn while handling corrosive and hazardous
chemicals.

4.

Adequate fire-fighting equipments such as fire-extinguishers, sand filled buckets,


access to fire hydrant system should be provided near the storage place.

5.

No loose electrical cables or cables with broken joints should be permitted in the
storage premises. Proper earthing has to be done wherever flammable solvents are
loaded or unloaded.

6.

Right type of material handling equipments such as fork-lifter, drum trolley,


cylinder trolley, etc should be available.

7.

All electrical fittings, such as lighting, switches etc. in the storage area should be of
flame proof category.

8.

it must be ensured that MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) for all the hazardous
chemicals being stored must be made available to the stores incharge and it is the
responsibility of the stores incharge to make sure that the storage and handling is
done in compliance to the procedures stipulated in the MSDS.

9.

Persons operating in the material handling functions should be adequately trained


to handle safety and fire-fighting equipments.

10. As a safety need, every storage room should be provided with an exit door, which
is to be properly identified and kept un-locked.

11. Good house keeping is an important requirement in storage godowns. There must
be clear passage area for free material movements.

v.2. In compatible chemicals:

1.

There are chemicals, which remain harmless if stored in isolation, but upon
allowing coming into direct contact, could pose severe fire, explosion hazards.

Some of this type of chemicals are

i)
ii)
iii)

Con H2SO4

vs

Glycerol

KMnO4
vs

KMnO4

Acetone
Methanol

vs

CrO3

Glycerine
iv)

Co. HNO3

vs

v)

Sodium metal

vi)

Sodium hydride

vii)

Hydrogen peroxide

vs

alcohols, ketones, ethers etc.


H 2O

vs
vs

H2O
flammable organic solvents

In all the above cases instant fire will take place, due to the high amount of heat
produced as a result of the vigorous reaction between these compounds.

2.

Certain type of chemicals is sensitive towards stress, shock and adverse


thermal/pressure conditions. Subjected to any of such environmental conditions,
they decompose at such a fast rate that it would lead to Explosions e.g.

1.

Nitrates (ammonium nitrate)

2.

Persulphates (ammonium persulphate)

3.

Peroxides (hydrogen peroxide)

4.

Permanganates (potassium permanganate)

5.

Perchlorates (ammonium / sodium / potassium)

6.

Dichromates (ammonium)

7.

Hydroxylamines and their salts.

8.

Azides (sodium azide) etc, etc.

3.

There are many chemicals which are highly reactive with water / moisture. Upon
contact with water, they react violently resulting in Fire / Chemical splash. These
are to be stored in leak proof water tight containers in a dry place, e.g.

1. Acetyl chloride

4.

2.

Aluminium chloride

3. Acetic anhydride

4.

Thionyl chloride

5. Calcium hydride

6.

Sodium metal

7. Sodium hydride

8.

Con. Sulphuric acid etc, etc.

Few of the chemicals are very corrosive in nature and can cause severe blisters /
deformity / loss of vision etc, if they come into contact with human body. All
personal protective equipments such as hand gloves, apron, goggles, nose mask,
safety shoes should be worn by those handling these chemicals e.g.

1.

All mineral acids (HF, HCl, HNO3, H2SO4)

2.

Certain organic acids (formic and acetic acids)

3.

Alkalies (ammonium, sodium and potassium hydroxides)

4.

Chloro compounds (acetyl chloride, Thionyl chloride, mono and tri-chloro acetic
acid, aluminium chloride etc.)

v.3.

Storage of flammable solvents:

Based upon the degree of flammability (Flash points), flammable solvents are
classified under the following 3 categories:

i)

Class A-solvents having flash point 0 to 23oC.

ii)

Class B-solvents having flash point >23 to 65 oC

iii)

Class C-solvents having flash point >65 to 93 oC

v.3.1

Precautions to be observed in storage:

1.

All solvents of category A and B should be stored only in metallic containers, well
closed, in a cool place at the designated area.

2.

No hot jobs such as welding, cutting or bracing is permitted inside the storage
place or in the vicinity.

3.

All electrical fittings and fixtures should be of flameproof in nature.

4.

Adequate safety and fire-fighting equipments should be available for emergency.

5.

Permission for entry should be through authorization only.

6.

All relevant MSDS should be available with the incharge of stores.

7.

No electric / battery operated equipment for material movement should be


permitted in solvent storage areas.

8.

Basic training for fire-fighting systems should be imparted to all the operating
staff.

9.

No fire generating materials, such as match box, cigarette lighter is permitted in


the premises.

10. No solvent dozing operations is permitted in the storage area.

11. Flammable solvent storage warehouse should meet the statutory requirements of
Indian Explosive Act.

vi. Static Electric Discharge and Fire Hazards:

One of the most hidden hazard, causing fire and explosion in chemical industry is
associated with the unique property of several solvents and organic compounds to
acquire electric charges termed as static electricity, which subsequently get
discharged in the form of electric spark, causing the disaster.

Most of flammable solvents, particularly non-polar solvents, finely divided metallic


and organic particulates, acquire static electric charges on their surface by virtue of
constant motion, separation, abrasion or on prolonged stagnation.

vi)

I. Causes for Static Electric Discharges:

1.

By virtue of the chemical configuration of the material.

2.

High velocity flow of a solvent through any non-metallic pipe.

3.

Flow of a solvent down from a height in the form of a spray.

4.

5.

Storage in non-conductive containers like plastic / poly propylene / PVC or HDPE


containers.

Inadequate earthing system.

6.

7.

Prolonged storage.

Spinning of a powdered material in a high speed centrifuge without being earthed


properly. (The hazard will be more severe if the particulate contain even traces of
flammable solvents).

8.

Accumulation of too much dust particles in a confined area.

9.

Low level of Rh in the vicinity.

10. Operations involving mixing, blending or spinning.

2. Preventive Measures

11. Allow flammable solvents to flow through metallic pipes only. These pipes should
be earthed to the ground with proper conduits.

12. While charging a solvent into a reactor/container, ensure that the liquid is not
dropped from the top to fall to the bottom. Always ensure that the liquid reaches
the bottom of the vessel, through metal pipes.

13. Avoid storage in non-conductive containers, such as those with moc PVC/PP/HDPE.
Always store only in metal containers.

14. Loading and unloading of bulk flammable solvents should be permitted only in
authorized premises (refer Petroleum Act of India). Proper earthing connections
should be provided to both the storage container and the receiver.

15. Before operating any centrifuge, ensure that it is being properly earthed to the
ground. Also, before scooping out any material from the centrifuge, ensure that the
metallic scoop is also earthed (plastic or nonconductive equipments are not
advisable for scooping material from centrifuges).

16. To avoid dust explosion, which is likely in large powder handling units, provide
adeauzte ventilation so as to prevent dust accumulation which is the cause for this
kind of hfazards.

17. Wherever possible spray water in the surroundings of large solvent storages, as
higher humidity helps to dissipate static charges (water particles are good electric
conductors).

Caution:

Never ever let any live electric cable come in contact with earthing cables, as the
consequences could be disastrous.

vii)

Handling and Storage of Gas Cylinders

Handling of compressed and liquefied gases, contained in cylinders calls for special
attention, as these are of potentially high hazards, in case of any leakage or
bursting up of the container.

There are about 101 permanent, as well as liquefied gases, which are being
conveyed in specially designed cylinders and these gases are contained under high
pressures (18 kg/cm2 to 250 kg/cm2) and are identified with unique colour codes.

Some of the commonly used gases and the corresponding colour codes of the
cylinders are:

vii.1. Precautions to be observed in storage and handling.

1.

Always store filled gas cylinders in a cool and ventilated and sheltered area, away
from heat and direct sunlight.

2.

No hot jobs, such as welding, bracing, cutting or grinding, is permitted in the gas
storage area.

3.

Always keep the cylinder properly capped. The cylinder valve is the most delicate
and vulnerable part of the cylinder. Never allow the Needle valve of the cylinder to
get damaged, while loading/unloading and shifting operations.

4.

Store the cylinders in vertical position, near a solid support, properly fastened with
a metal chain to avoid their falling.

5.

In case of any leakage of the cylinder, never attempt to repair the valve. Isolate
the cylinder from the main stream and keep it in an open and cool area and seek
help from the cylinder supplier.

6.

The cylinder storage area should be located always, away from the main/process
building and under no circumstances should any gas cylinder be used inside the
processing areas. Gas cylinders should be kept away from corrosive acid fumes,
which could corrode the cylinder body and damage the cylinder valve.

7.

Never try to apply grease on the cylinder valve/nozzle, as certain highly reactive
gases like hydrogen can ignite the organic mass, causing fire.

8.

For shifting gas filled cylinders, always use cylinder trolleys and never let them roll
on their body.

9.

Never try to open any cylinder without having the appropriate type of regulators.

10. As a safe practice, always store the cylinders outside the building in the proper
designated area, and draw the gases into the operational area through metal pipes
with suitable safety valve.

11. Adequate training is to be imparted to those handling gaseous chemicals regarding


safety equipments, first-aid measures and the antidotes to be applied in case of
emergency.

12. It is always preferable to keep minimum possible inventory for better handling,
especially for toxic and flammable gases.

13. Do not store incompatible gases together, as this could lead to explosion in case of
simultaneous leakage from both the cylinders.

e.g.

Hydrogen
Ammonia

viii)

vs

Chlorine

vs

Chlorine

Mechanical type of Hazards

Though hazards associated with mechanical type occur mostly in engineering


industries, foundries, automobile sector, etc., they are also not uncommon in
chemical industries.

Some of the safety precautions recommended are:

1.

All the process equipments such as reaction kettles, pressure vessel etc. should be
properly maintained and periodically pressure tested to ascertain their capability to
withstand the optimum pressure for which they are designed.

ix)

2.

Never ever subject the equipment to more pressure than the designed capacity.
All equipments where pressure reactions are carried out, should be provided with
safety pressure releasing valves.

3.

The vent line of process reactors (except pressure reactors, designed for specific
services) should be vented outside the process block, preferably through a
scrubber, depending upon the nature of the effluent gases generated in the
chemical processes.

4.

All temperature indicators, pressure gauges, control valves, pressure releasing


valves attached to the process equipments must be periodically tested and their
proper functioning should be ensured (most of the accidents are attributed to
equipment malfunctioning and breakdowns).

5.

Ensure that all the moving parts of an equipment, such as the shaft of a drying
oven, blades of a fan, coupling of a mechanical pump, the belt of a motor fan are
provided with proper metal guards so that they do not come into contact with
human body.

6.

High speed hydro extractors should be periodically inspected through regular


maintenance system to ensure that al moving portions such as the central shaft,
mechanical pulleys, etc., do perform to the desired level.

7.

All utility lines, conveying steam, chilled water, brine, vacuum, nitrogen etc,
should bear clear identification tags and preferably they are to be identified with
distinct colour code system.

8.

As a safety measure it is highly advisable to purge nitrogen gas into the reaction
vessels before start of the process, thereby reducing the oxygen concentration
inside the reactor and thus reducing the fire risk.

Electrical Hazards:

Safety precautions to be observed:

1.

All electric fixtures such as cables, wires, switches, electronics fittings should be of
standard quality and free from any manufacturing deficiency.

2.

Overloading of any supply point by drawing more power than the recommended
norm should be totally avoided:

3.

It must be ensured that all the electric fittings, fixtures, lightings, induction
motors etc, should be of flame proof quality.

4.

All electric equipments and fittings should be safe guarded against moisture,
chemical fumes etc, and periodically inspected by regular maintenance systems.

5.

Electric panel boxes, main control switches etc. should be properly housed in a
proper ventilated block, away from the plant and must be tagged for easy
identification.

6.

All equipments, receivers, storage tanks, barrels etc., should be adequately


earthed to the ground through metal conduits and should be periodically inspected
for their continuity of electricity.

7.

Cables and electric wires used should be of single piece and should not have any
joint.

8.

Never let the electric and earthing cables come in touch with each other at any
point.

9.

Portable inspection lamps/lights should be strictly prohibited in the process blocks.

10.

Keep the electrical panel box surroundings dry and provide rubber mats in front of
the panel door to avoid any electric shock to the operating personnel.

11.

Whenever any equipment is under maintenance / repairs, ensure that the power to
the equipment is switched off from the main panel and proper tagging is done at
the panel switch, as well as on to the equipment.

12.

Only qualified and authorized personnel should be permitted to perform electrical


jobs.

INDUSTRIAL FIRE AND PREVENTIVE METHODS

1. DEFINITION FOR FIRE:

Fire, combustion or burning of any substance needs basically 4 things to occur.

a)

A fuel [this can be: any organic matter; such as a solvent, oil, wood, paper, etc.].

b)

Oxygen [usually air].

c)

A certain amount of energy in the form of heat.

d) Free radical reaction. The chemistry of combustion indicates that the union of
Oxygen and the fuel is not direct, but through a series of steps wherein the actual
reaction taken place between Oxygen and the free radicals liberated by the heated
fuel at the point of ignition.

2. CLASSIFICATION OF FIRES:

Basically all the type of fires can be classified into the following major categories.

a)

Class A Fires:

These are fires on ordinary combustible materials, such as paper wood, rags etc.
which can be put off by the quenching and cooling effect of water. For
extinguishments of such type of fires, use of water, form or dry chemical fire
extinguishers would be effective.

b)

Class B Fires:

These are fires occurring in flammable liquids such as oils, organic solvents, petro
chemicals etc., where a blanketing or smothering effect is essential to put the fire
out. Fire extinguishers like Foam, CO2, and Dry chemical are recommended for this
type of fires, which provide a blanketing effect around the fire, thus, preventing air
from coming into contact with the burning substance.

Water is effective for oil fires, only when it is used in the form of a spray or mist, but
as such is not advisable to use in fires involving solvents and oils, which are
immiscible with water.

c) Class C Fires :

These fires are associated with Electrical fittings, fixtures, such as electrical panel
boxes, electric cables, electric ad electronic equipments etc. Non conductive
extinguishing agent such as CO2 gas is the most ideal and recommended fire
extinguisher for Electric Fires.

d) Class D Fires:

These are fires in metals, such as Li, Na, K, Zn, Mg etc. and mishandling of this type
of fires can cause explosion and spread to other areas. Special attention and
training is needed to handle metal fires.

Normal fire fighting agents used for extinguishing are dry sand, dry powder,
graphite etc.

It is important to understand the meaning of some of the fire control terms and
definitions of certain critical physical characteristics of solvents which will help to
understand the degree of flammability of a particular Product.

1. Flash point (flash p):

This is the lowest temperature at which the liquid will give off enough flammable
vapours at or near its surface, such that in an intimate mixture with air and a spark
or flame, it ignites.

The flash point of a flammable liquid is usually determined by the standard method
of test for flash point with the Tag Closed Cup Tester (TCC) or with the Tag Open Cup
Tester (TOC). The results recorded with Tag Open Cup Tester (TOC) is always found
to be 5-10oF higher (less flammable) than that being recorded with Closed Cup
Tester.

The closed cup flash point value is usually several degree lower (more flammable)
than the open cup, as the test in the former case is made on a saturated vapour-air
mixture, whereas in the letter case, the vapour has free access to air and thus is
slightly this reason open cup values more nearly simulate actual condition.

2. Fire point (fire p):

This is the lowest temperature at which a mixture of air and vapour continues to
burn in an open container when ignited. It is usually above the flash point.
Wherever the flash point data is not available, fire point figures can be considered
as significant as flash point to understand the degree of flammability of the
material.

3. Auto ignition temperature:

This is the temperature at which a material (solid, liquid or gas) will self-ignite and
sustain combustion in the absence of a spark or flame. This value is influenced by
factors such as the size, shape, the material of the hot surface, rate of heating etc.
etc.

4. Vapour Density:

This value expresses the ratio of the density of the vapours to the density of air.
The vapours of most of the flammable solvents are heavier tan air, with the result
that they tend to travel at ground level making them more dangerous, as the risk
will be more in case of a fire, since the vapours do not get diluted with air. Hence,
in operational areas, where such higher V.D. solvents are used, the ventilating
outlets should be at the lower level. Similarly, wherever, the liquids of low V.D. is
handled, the ventilator should be at the higher level.

5. Melting point (mp):

This is the temperature at which the solid and liquid forms of a substance exist in
equilibrium. This value also gives the indication at what minimum temperature a
flammable solid substance can become flammable solvent.

6. Boiling point (bp):

This is the temperature at which the vapour pressure on the liquid surface becomes
equivalent to the atmospheric pressure and at this temperature a continuous flow of
vapour bubbles occur from throughout the liquid body and it is an indication as to
how much volatile the liquid could be.

As the boiling point is proportionate to the pressure to which it is subjected to, it is


apparent that lower the pressure (higher vacuum), lower would be the boiling point
and lesser will be the vapour pressure and vis--vis.

This physical characteristic of liquids can be made use of, in preventing many
hazards like Fire, Thermal decomposition of the product etc by subjecting the
distillation process to take place under reduced pressure.

7. Chemical Formula:

In the event of lack of data regarding the flammable nature of a product, the
chemical formulation of the product can give a clue regarding its flammable nature
to a certain extent. For instance, if a product consists only of Carbon and Hydrogen
(Hydro carbon), it can be assumed to be flammable and if it is in liquid form and
having a low boiling point, it can be considered to be more flammable.

8. Flammable liquids:

Based on the degree of flammability, liquids of flammable nature are classified


broadly into 3 categories as per the Petroleum Act of India.

v.

Class-A solvents having the flash point 0 to 23 oC

vi.

Class-B solvents having the flash point >23 to 65oC

vii.

Class-A solvents having the flash point >65 to 93 oC

FIRE PROTECTION

The two major aspects of Fire Protection are 1.


minimization.

Prevention and 2.

Loss

1. Prevention:

The most undisputed aspect of Fire protection is its prevention. Since, for a fire to
occur, all the 3 basic requirements, Fuel, Oxygen and source of Heat are needed to
combine, by avoiding any of the 3 basic requirements, Fire can be prevented. For
instance let us take an example of an industry which uses large volumes of Acetone
in an open atmosphere. Now, for a fire to happen, among the 3 requirements, two
of them i.e. Fuel and Oxygen (from air) are already available in the vicinity. The
third requirement for Fire is heat.

From the flash point data, Acetone has a Flash point of 0oF, which means that at all
temperatures above 0oF Acetone would give out enough vapours which on
combining with Oxygen of air, can form a flammable mixture in case if it comes into
contact with a spark, flame or a hot surface or any other source of ignition. Thus, in
an installation using Acetone, following avenues are available from Fire Protection
point of view:

1. The working temperature (ambient) should be kept less than the Flash point,
0oF of Acetone, so that the vapour pressure of acetone at that temperature is
lowered to considerable extent and consequently it does to give out enough
vapours for the Fire to take place.

2. The supply of atmospheric oxygen must be cut off. This is possible in two
ways.

i)

By applying vacuum in the processes which taken away the air from the liquid
surface.

ii)

By providing a continuous stream of Nitrogen gas flow over the surface of the
liquid (also termed Nitrogen blanketing).

3. Eliminating all source of ignition in the operational as well as in the


surroundings and enforcing following steps:

i)

smoking and carrying of materials of ignition, such as match box, unprotected


electric lamps etc should be strictly prohibited.

ii)

Hot operations, such as welding, gas cutting, bracing should not be carried out in
and around the operational area.

iii)

All the electrical fittings and fixtures and electric motors used in the process area
should be Flame proof in nature.

4. The area must be ventilated so that even though acetone gives off enough
vapour to form a flammable mixture with air, the vapour will be drawn out of
the area by means of the fume exhaust as rapidly as it is formed, thus
preventing the accumulation of vapour concentration.

Below is a brief account of the 3 essential supporters of fire and the means to
reduce their influence for Fire Protection.

A)

OXYGEN:

Although under certain specific conditions, chemicals can initiate fire even in the
absence of oxygen for short duration (e.g. Fires associated with sulphur /
phosphorous chlorine, hydrogen etc.), for sustained propagation of Fire, oxygen is
very essential. Also the higher the concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere,
more would be the intensity of fire. In industrial atmosphere it is difficult to
manipulate the oxygen concentration in the working area, particularly since a
concentration of oxygen, far below normal to keep fires from starting, would also be
too low to support human life.

When it becomes necessary to work with such products, which by mere contact with
air of atmosphere, can initiate a Fire, following steps are recommended for their
safe handling.

i)

Isolate such products, such as sodium azide, sodium hydride etc. which are
highly reactive with atmospheric oxygen from the main stream of materials and
store them in containers under vacuum, or follow the guidelines for storage as
mentioned in their respective MSDS.

ii)

Keep such products under a blanket of inert gas such as nitrogen, helium or
argon.

B)

HEAT:

In industrial fires the most easily overlooked fact is that all the major Fires that had
occurred, had a modest beginning in the initial stages, which might have gone
unnoticed and hence uncontrolled. Then, since fires are by definition exothermic,
the very small fire started by a tiny heat source, supplies to its surroundings more
heat than it absorbs, thus enabling it to ignite more fuel and oxygen mixture, and so
on until very quickly there is more heat available than is needed to propagate a
large Fire.

The heat for the initial Fire to start might have been provided by various sources of
ignition such as high environmental (ambient) temperatures, hot surfaces,
mechanical friction, spark from a switch, static electric discharge, an open flame or
from a jot job, like welding, gas cutting etc.

It is worthwhile here to look into the various aspects of the ignition source and
find ways to effectively curtail them.

a) Open flames:

It is of utmost importance that near the operating areas, wherein flammable


solvents are being handled, strict vigilance be exercised to check heat sources like
burners, lamps, matches, welding torches, lighting etc. If there are both type of
operations, viz. operations involving flammable solvents and hot type of jobs, in the
same premises, they should be isolated properly by thick wall of cement and bricks.
Never should any flammable material such as wood / plywood / thermacoal be used
for the construction of the partition.

b)

Electrical sources:

Some of the common source of electric heating are from non certified lightings,
cables, switches, starters, electric motors, digital electronic indicators, overloading
of supply point, poor earthing systems etc. As a matter of safety, it is advisable to
have all electrical switches and electric panel board properly housed in a separate
block, away from the main plant / operating premises.

c)

Over heating:

Processes which need high pressure steam and involve high temperature reactions,
runaway reactions, special processes, etc. should be identified and these are to be
segregated from the relatively safer processes. HAZOP study should be undertaken
before the implementation of such processes and special attention has to be paid in
training the persons operating such plants.

i.

Hot surfaces:

The most common hot surfaces in a chemical industry are equipment like, drying
oven, boiler, steam line, hot oil system etc. These equipments must be housed in a
quarantined location preferably away from the operating area (boiler / thermo pack
and electrically) heated drying oven in any case should be way from the process
block). All the supply lines conveying steam, hot oil, hot water, hot air etc. should
be properly insulated and maintained. It must be remembered that Flammable
solvents, having the auto ignition temperature, lower than any of these hot
surfaces, can get ignited themselves in case of their contact.

ii.

Spontaneous ignition:

Many fires are caused by the heat of reaction produced when chemicals,
incompatible in their chemical characteristics come into contact with each other,
which are further accelerated by external source of heat and air. Few of such
commonly used chemicals, having incompatibility with each other are:

i)

ii)

Chromic acid with flammable solvents, such as acetone, alcohols, hydrocarbons


etc.

Potassium permanganate with con. Sulphuric acid.

iii)

Con. Nitric acid with organic solvents and any organic mass.

iv)

Con. Hydrogen peroxide solution with flammable solvents.

v)

Sodium hydride, elements like sodium, potassium lithium etc. with water.

Many of fire investigations have proved beyond doubt that the cause of fire in most
of the cases was due to neglect, poor house keeping practices, accumulation of
flammable wastes such as cotton rags, residual oil and grease etc.

iii)

Sparks:

Sparks may be produced from various sources, such as from electric motors,
switches, loose electric connections or by static electric discharges. Sparks are also
generated from friction between mechanical parts, by hammering and chiseling
etc. to avoid electric sparking, some of the recommended precautions are:

i)

ii)

iii)

iv)

v)

All the electrical fittings, such as switches, lighting, induction motors etc. should
be flameproof in nature.

Electric panels, main control switches etc must be away from the process block.

Electric cables/wires connected to equipments should be of the right quality and


should be in one piece (there should not be any joints on the cable).

Proper earthing should be provided to all equipments, storage vessels etc.

No flammable solvents must be stored or collected in non-conducting containers


(such as plastic buckets, PVC/HDPE containers etc.).

Similarly, sparks produced by mechanical operations can be contained to a great


extent by adopting following precautions:

i)

All moving parts of the mechanical equipment, such as the shaft of the gear box,
shaft of the fan in a drying oven, clutches of a centrifuge etc must be greased and
maintained in good condition.

ii)

Hammering and chiseling should be avoided as far as


process plant.

possible inside the

If at all they have to be done, use hammers / chisles made of brass or gun metal,
which does not produce sparks on hammering.

a)

Static Electric Discharge:

This is a phenomena in which certain products, mostly of organic liquids and nonpolar solvents get electrically charged on their surface, by virtue of factors, such as
high speed discharge, fall from heights, separation at a higher speed, prolonged
storage etc. Causes for fire in many industries especially chemical and paper, are
attributed to this unique phenomena. Most of these occur during the months when
the atmospheric humidity is low and artificial heating is don(droplets of water in a
humid atmosphere acts as a suitable conduit to carry away the acquired electric
charges from the liquid surfaces, thus preventing a spark to generate by static
discharge). Maintaining a humidity of 40 to 50% in rooms where flammable
solvents are being handled, will greatly help to reduce the risk of a spark due to
static discharge. Electrical grounding of storage tanks, process equipments,
discharge pipings etc. are mandatory as per Indian Petroleum Act and it must be
strictly enforced.

In all the equipments as far as possible the use of belts should be avoided and the
use of metallic chains or direct shaft driven systems should be encouraged.

Storage of flammable solvents in non-conducting containers allowing a solvent to


fall from a height in the form of a spray, pumping of a flammable solvents through a
non-conducting pipe etc. are potential causes for static sparks and must be totally
avoided.

i.

Friction:

One of the major causes for industrial Fire can be attributed to the heat / spark
generated by friction from the moving parts of mechanical equipments, e.g. fan
blades rubbing the sides of outer casting, poorly lubricated bearings of a rotating
body like hydro extractor, uncooled mechanical seal of a reactor etc.

ii.

Fuel

Combustion takes place most easily between oxygen of air and a fuel in its vapour
or finely divided particle state. As solid chemicals need preheating for their
transformation from solid stage to liquid stage they are relatively safe, particularly if
their melting points are high. But in case of liquids, most of them give out sufficient
amount of vapours even at lower temperatures which can form a flammable mixture
with air and ignite themselves.

This particular temperature which is an indicator to measure the hazard potential of


a solvent is termed as the Flash point, as already discussed. As it is evident from
above explanations, lower the flash point, higher would be fire risk. Indian
Petroleum Act of 1934 and 1976, has classified all the petroleum and flammable
liquids into three categories on the basis of their flash points; and also has
stipulated conditions for their receipt, storage and movement.

As a matter of safety and fire prevention, all solvent storage tanks above ground
level should have dikes constructed out of bricks and cement so that in the event of
any leakage or fire, it can be contained within a limited area, thus preventing it from
spreading.

An important factor to be considered for safety with respect to flammable liquids, is


to prevent accumulations of high vapour concentration of flammable liquids in a
closed environment. Adequate ventilation should be provided in the solvet handling
area. While designing the ventilation / exhaust systems it should be ensured that
for vapours of high vapour density, the exhaust system should be on the lower side
of the building and for light density solvents it should be on the upper side and also
it must be ensured that the motor and the switch of the system should be of flame
proof.

It is of utmost importance that a totally comprehensive standard operating


procedure (SOP) should be framed and implemented, with respect to receipt,
storage and handling of Flammable solvents and all the operating persons should
be adequately trained to handle these solvents safely. There is no substitute to
Educating and Training the people.

It is also worth probing when a new process is developed that, whether or not it is
possible to substitute Flammable and Hazardous chemicals with non-flammable/less
flammable and non-hazardous chemicals. If cost is the prime factor in favour of a

flammable solvent other indirect benefits, such as savings in installation of high cost
safety devices, training cost, high insurance premium etc. should be assessed by
substituting with a non-flammable solvent. However in any event, usage of
flammable solvents in a chemical process cannot be avoided irrespective of the
quantum.

Besides flammable solvents, other possible disasters in industry, which can be


prevented well and only by preventive means are:

Dust Explosion:

Like static electric discharge, another lurking industrial hazard is dust explosion.
Practically any flammable material in the form of the particles or dust, mixed with
air at the right proportion, when comes into contact with a spark (mostly generated
by static discharges), flame or heat will burn so rapidly as to cause a severe
explosion which is termed as Dust Explosion. This kind of hazard commonly occurs
in industries handling, plastic, grain, flour, coal dust, metal powders, fertilizers,
wood dust, powdered milk, detergent powder, paper dust and industries handling
sulphur and phosphorous powders. Some of recommended precautions to minimize
dust explosion are:

b)

Housekeeping: Good house keeping practices like proper storage, stacking,


handling, maintaining of proper temperature conditions in the warehousing and
manufacturing blocks, usage of proper equipments for material handling etc. are
very important.

c)

Do not allow the dust to accumulate to alarming proportions. This can be achieved
by providing effective exhaust system.

d)

All the dust particles generated in the process, should be taken out through metal
ducts, and the vent of such ducts must be outside the block, preferably, taken to a
distant location.

e)

Proper earthing should be provided to the pulverizing / dust generating


equipments / ductings etc.

f)

Use of belt driven equipments, conveyors etc. should be minimized as far as


possible. Instead metallic chain driven / shaft driven equipments must be
encouraged.

g)

Cleaning of floors, equipments etc should be done by vacuum methods and


cleaning by sweeping, dusting with brooms, dust rags etc should be totally avoided.

h)

The use of compressed air to blow the dust off the equipments/floors etc, thus
helping the formation of dangerous dust clouds is totally FORBIDDEN.

i)

Exposed piping / beams etc. in a powder processing area should be cleaned


frequently to prevent the dust from accumulating on them.

j)

It is a wrong notion that by providing a false ceiling in a powder processing unit,


accumulation of dust on the piping and other projections can be eliminated. But
incidents have proved the other way. Unless the ceiling is extremely well designed
and installed, there is a great possibility for the dust particles to escape through the
crevices and joints of the ceiling and get settled on the upper side of the ceiling. As
this will not be visible to human eyes operating on the ground level, there is a great
risk of dust accumulation over a period of time, depending on the nature and
volume of operations, and it could lead to a serious dust explosion, when a spark is
generated in that area.

k)

As in the case of Flammable solvents, any kind of source of ignition, such as open
flame, smoking, welding/cutting, grinding, electric sparks from loose contacts or
from static discharges, should be avoided.

l)

Use of inert gas like nitrogen, in closed vessel operations has been found very
effective and rewarding in preventing Fire and Explosions.

LOSS (CONTROL)

One of the equally important aspects of Fire protection is also to devise various
alternates/methods to minimize the loss, in case of a major fire. There have been
major Fires all around, and loss of precious human lives and properties. Although
investigations help to identify to some extent the cause of Fire, in most events they
are inconclusive or doubtful, as most the live evidences of fire gets destroyed or
distorted in the fire itself and the findings of the investigations normally are based
on assumptions and hypothesizes.

What is more important is how to prevent a Fire totally from happening and how
best maximum salvage could be done in case of any such unfortunate incident.

Some of the safety steps recommended include the following:

1. Before any new chemical process is to be introduced on commercial scale in


the plant, the process, equipments and their basic designs the polluting
discharges, by-products, toxicity of the chemical ingredients, the hazardous
properties of both the process and chemicals used etc should be critically
evaluated (Hazop study) and appropriate hazard preventive methods should
be evolved.

2. Segregate processes involving large usage of flammable solvents and


hazardous chemicals from relatively safer processes and safer chemicals and
as far as possible make separate modules for both the types. Wherever it is
not viable or feasible to have separated by constructing approved fire proof
walls (with bricks and concrete):

Caution:

It must be ensured that there should not be any holes or cracks on the fire wall.
Every hole made on the wall to permit utility pipes / electric cable trays etc. to pass
through must be properly sealed with cement, so that no flammable vapour could
pass through such holes.

3. In many Fire incidents, it has been observed that the Fire Exit Doors provided
in the process blocks, to enable the persons trapped to escape safely, in the
event of fire, had caused more damage than any use, because of the reason
that either they were not maintained regularly for proper functioning, or the
path to the Exit Door were blocked with materials, storage drums etc. as a
result of which access to the door became difficult and the very purpose of
the door was defeated.

It is of utmost importance that the Fire Doors should be greased regularly and must
be tried for smooth functioning atleast once in a day and a record should be
maintained. No materials whatsoever should be stored on the pathway to the Exit
Door, and the approach way should be clearly highlighted with painting.

There should also be proper indicators to locate the Exit Doors and the most
importance caution to be observed is that these doors should never ever be bolted
tightly or locked.

4. Ensure that in the process blocks, the inventory of flammable solvents is kept
to the minimum possible level and the bunks, lids etc of all the storage drums
/ tanks are tightly closed. There should be clear space for movement
between the storage drums and in the event of Fire, these are to be moved
out of the building depending upon the situation. In case if it is not
accessible to reach the drums, they should be kept cool, by spraying a jet of
water from the Fire Hydrant system.

5. In each process module, there must be a smoke detector, connected


electronically to the Fire alarm system so that in the event of a fire, the alarm
system gets activated and Fire siren is blown automatically.

In case there are more than one plant/module, it is suggested that the Fire alarm
system from each of the module may be connected to one main Fire Alarm Display
board located at a central location preferably at the Time Office / Security Office.
Similarly, the fire display board should be provided with suitable indicator system to
identify the exact location of fire.

6. Needless to mention, there must be adequate Fire fighting equipments, easily


accessible in the case of emergency. Location of the Fire fighting equipments
is also equally important, so that they must be easily accessible.

7. In some of the safety conscious organizations, a separate group of persons,


from various functional areas, such as production, engineering, electrical etc
form a core group who are imparted special training on safety and Fire
fighting operations and are available round the clock to ensure that all safety
norms are being complied., This group also conducts safety audits of each
operational area on regular basis and recommends corrective and preventive
measures.

8. One of the most important aspects in Fire Protection is to prevent the Fire
from spreading from floor to floor in a multistoreyed building. Mostly the fire
spreads through open staircases, elevators, cutouts for future installations
etc. not only that the fire spreads through these `ventilators, these also get
choked with fumes, hot air, noxious gases etc. and the stair cases often
become real death traps. One way to prevent this kind of hazard, is to
provide proper enclosures to stair cases and elevators at each floor with self
closing doors. It is important to remember that these doors should have self
closing arrangement, as there is always a tendency among people to keep
the door open. Similarly, all open cut-out on the floors, must be closed with
brick and cement.

9. It is also worth considering that in a process block, utilizing highly explosive


chemicals such as peroxides, nitrates, persulphates, azides etc. part of the
building on the less important side, may be constructed with less strong
materials like hollow ceramic tiles, gypsum boards etc, so that in the event of
an explosion these may act as a vent to the expanded gases and thus save
the main building from collapse.

10.However, the most effective way to prevent fire damages can be achieved
only through educating and training the operating staff n regular basis and to
inculcate a sense of ownership and alertness.

FIRE FIGHTING

As already discussed earlier, to extinguish a fire it is essential that at least one of


the three components of fire viz., Fuel, Air (oxygen) or Heat is cut off from the
system or its concentration is drastically reduced.

Although cutting the fuel supply is the best option to contain the Fire, in many cases
either it is difficult or not practicable, but in case the Fire is on a large storage tank
or a big reactor, and it has a pumping system connected to a far off storage vessel,
then the solvent can be pumped out from these containers to the safe storage
vessel as the Fire blazes only on the surface of the liquid. It is also important to
keep the burning tank cool with a jet of high pressure water so that the temperature
is brought down below the ignition temperature of the liquid.

Simultaneously, the oxygen supply to the Fire also should be restricted as


effectively as possible by using appropriate fire extinguishers like Foam,
carbondioxide, dry powder, sand etc. selection of the right type of the fire
extinguisher is very very important. Incidentally, dry sand is an universal fire
extinguisher and can be used in all type of fires.

Some of the common type of fire extinguishing agents are:

1. Water:

The most commonly used fire extinguishing agent is water. It is the cheapest and
most effective media, especially when applied in the form of a fine spray. It has a
blanketing effect on the fire if sprayed, as the fine droplets of water act as a barrier
to prevent the air ingression to the fire point. More importantly it cools down the
fire surroundings below the autoignition temperature of the liquid, which results in
the extinguishing of the fire.

However, water has certain limitations too. It is good, as describedc earlier, for fires
with materials like wood, paper, cellulose, liquids miscribe with it, etc. but not
suitable for items like Oil, Petrol, Organic solvents having lower density than water,
Liquids immiscible with it, fires in metals etc. etc.

Water is not recommended for oil fires, and fires involving immiscible organic
solvents etc as these being lighter than water will float on the water surface and
also due to the impact of the water jet, will scatter all around carrying the fire along
with it. In such cases blanketing will also be difficult as the fire will be floating
around with water. The consequence could be disastrous, if this floating fire goes
down to the Gutter and Sewerage, as this could result in more spread of the fire,
affecting other plants as well.

Explosions have also been reported inside open gutters resulting in massive loss to
property and human lives.

2. Soda-acid Fire Extinguisher:

This kind of extinguishers are operated by inverting them and directing the nozzle
of the hose towards the base of the flame. Int his type, a small bottle of con. H 2SO4
is kept around a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate inside a metal cylinder,
having an outlet connected to a small rubber-hose. When it is overturned, the acid
comes into direct contact with sodium bicarbonate present in the water, generating
CO2 gas, which in turn pressurizes the water to come out of the extinguishers under
pressure. Such extinguishers need to be recharged once in a year, irrespective of
the fact whether they have been used or not. This type of extinguishers are useful
for ordinary type of fires on paper, wood, cotton, waste rags etc.

3. Dry chemical powder (DCP) Fire Extinguishers:

In this type, there will be a small high pressure CO2 cylinder inside the body of the
extinguisher, surrounded with fine sodium carbonate powder. When the
extinguisher is put into operation, the CO2 cylinder gets punctured and due to the
high gas pressure generated, the soda powder is driven out through the nozzle of
the cylinder. These are equally effective as the soda-acid extinguishers has a good
blanketing effect on the Dire. These also need annual replacement of the sodium
carbonate powder, as it has a great tendency for cake formation on prolonged
storage.

4. Foam Type Fire Extinguishers:

Another important type of Fire Extinguishing agent is Foam, which is very effective
controlling Fires on oil, paints, organic solvents, liquids immiscible with water etc.
Chemically this Form is produced by bubbling CO 2 or an inert gas through a form
forming liquid. While an operation the entrapped CO 2 gas inside the bubbles formed
by emulsification, gets coated on the burning surface, thus creating an effective
barrier between fire and oxygen of the air.

5. Fire hydrant and fire hoses:

Despite the limitations, for fighting uncontrollable fire, water is the most effective
fire extinguishing agent and in fact there is no substitute for water. One of the most
effective ways of fire protection is to install a suitable fire hydrant system, having
access for high pressure water at all the crucial locations. In this system sufficient
quantity of water is stored in an underground tank exclusively built for Fire fighting
purpose and from this tank water is circulated through 4 to 6 dia metal pipes laid
underground by a powerful mechanical pump. At all the crucial locations tapping is
provided from the main line and these are connected to the Fire hoses. It is
important to ensure that the pump is maintained regularly by a systematic
maintenance schedule and the hose reel is free from defects. As a good safety
practice, it is suggested that the fire hydrant system should be activated at least
once in a week and checked for the performance.

Other Type of Fires:

Some other type of Fires which though not common, are equally disastrous and all
preventive steps must be taken to avert their occurrence.

a)

Gas Fires:

This type of fires can be put out with the use of fire extinguishers of CO 2 dry
chemicals and in certain cases with water also, but the most important step should
be to turn off the gas valve from the source. If source of supply is far away, ad
likely to take time to reach there, the best way to fire fight is to keep the
surrounding area cool by spraying water continuously, till the gas valve is closed
and in the meantime utilizing the Fire extinguishers at the fire.

Caution: On some occasions though the fire is extinguished successfully, people


forget to close the supply valve for long periods, with the result the gas
concentration can increase to explosive limit leading to explosion.

b)

Metal:

Fires on metals is very dangerous and often difficult to extinguish. Ordinary Fire
fighting agents may not be suitable, depending upon the type of the metal and the
volume. Normal metal Fires are associated with metals, such as sodium, potassium,
Lithium, Magensium, Zinc etc. Fire fighting agents such as sodium chloride, sodium
bicarbonate, graphite, magnesium carbonate, magnesium oxide are found effective
for controlling the Fire.

Caution: Water should never be used to extinguish metal fires, as this can result in
explosion which would further spatter burning metal particles to great distances,
thus helping the fire spread.

STORAGE AND HANDLING


OF
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.

As a large number of materials of different nature are to be stored in process


industries, warehouses, laboratories etc. it is highly essential that these are stored
safely and properly and a high sense of good house keeping practice is to be
maintained. For the purpose of safe storage, these chemicals can be classified into
different groups, based on their chemical characteristics.

a) Explosive chemicals:

These are chemicals which under certain conditions of heat, pressure, shock etc.
undergo rapid decomposition, evolving large volumes of gas and heat, which in
turn further heats up the surrounding air to expand so rapidly that the entire
process ends up in what is called explosion.

The magnitude of such explosions is always proportional to the nature of the


explosive and the quantum involved. It also depends upon the chemicals and other
objects in the near surroundings.

Storage and handling of this type of materials should be done with extreme caution.

Some of the recommendations for their storage are:

1.

all type of chemicals falling under this category, such as nitrates, chlorates, per
sulphates, per iodates, azides, perioxides etc should be stored in a separate block,
away from the main buildings and human habitation.

2.

before storing these materials, it should be ensured that the manufacturers


guidelines for storage, handling and disposal is strictly followed. No material should

be accepted for storage, if the relevant material safety data sheet (MSDS), is not
available. Remember the old and deteriorated explosives may prove more
dangerous than fresh materials.

(Instances have been reported of massive explosion, resulting in extensive disaster


and loss of human lives, when an attempt was made to shift an old stock of
Ammonium nitrate packed in gunny bags from a warehouse).

3.

Ensure that the environment conditions, such as temperature, RH etc. is


compatible to the stability of the product.

4.

Avoid storage for prolonged periods. FIFO system should be followed in the
warehouse.

5.

Proper material handling equipments should be used during transportation from


one location to another.

6.

Rough handling, dragging of the containers, stacking at higher levels thus creating
more strain on the bottom containers, etc should be totally avoided.

7.

No attempt should be made to scrap out the material with any metal object nor
should it be pulverized or powdered.

8.

Disposal of explosive chemicals should be done only as per the procedure laid
down in the MSDS or as per the maufacturers instructions.

a)

Flammable chemicals:

Combustible materials can be of all the 3 types viz; solids, liquids, or gases,
although the rate of Fire propagation is different for each type. The propagation is

least in the case of solids, as the vapour pressure being very low at ambient
temperatures, it takes much longer time for the solids to get heated up to produce
sufficient vapours to get ignited. However, the rate of propagation is much faster in
the case of liquids and still faster in case of gases. As a matter of fact in case of
vapour Fires, the rate of propagation is so fast that they normally end up in
explosions aggravating the situations.

Some of the recommendations for storage are:

1.

All flammable solvents must be stored in a cool place, under shelter with proper
ventilations. The storage store should be away from the main building.

2.

The containers should be properly closed and should not be in leaking/damaged


condition.

3.

No hot jobs, such as welding, gas cutting, grinding or any other source of ignition
such as naked flame, smoking etc should be allowed in and around the storage
area.

4.

As far as possible electrical equipments and fixtures, such as lighting fans, water
coolers, air conditioners etc must be avoided in the storage block and if at all they
are to be installed, it must be ensured that they should be flameproof in nature.

5.

No electrically operated equipments or automobiles is permitted inside the solvent


storage area for any type of operation such as material movement etc.

6.

7.

Proper earthing should be provided to all the storage vessels.

It must be ensured that no operation such as transfer of a solvent from one


container to another, dozing from a bulk container etc is undertaken inside the
storage block.

8.

Adequate fire fighting equipments should be available at strategic locations to


handle emergency.

9.

Movement in solvent farm area and in flammable solvent storage blocks, should
be restricted and only authorised personnel should be allowed to operate in these
areas.

10.

Proper colour coding should be implemented for correct identification of the


solvents and also all the pipe lines conveying these solvents shold have proper
identification tags.

11. Regular training should be imparted to the staff by competent personnel on fire
fighting and salvage techniques.

a)

Oxidising agents:

Since oxidizing agents are capable of generating oxygen, by way of heat, chemical
decomposition or by interaction with other incompatible materials, they help fire to
ravage, even in the absence of atmospheric air or oxygen. Following categories of
chemicals are considered to be most powerful oxidizers and these are to be handled
very cautiously.

e.g. Peroxides, Persulphates, Perchlorates, Periodates, Permanganates, Bromates,


Nitrates, Chromates, Dichromates, perborates, ozone etc.

As a general rule, all flammable solvents must be stored away from oxidising
chemicals and these should never be allowed to come into contact with each other.

e.g. Instant Fire will take place if Chromic acid comes into contact with organic
solvents such as acetone, alcohols, hydrocarbons etc. Equally dangerous is the
interaction between potassium permanganate and con. Sulphuric acid which would
also result instantaneous fire.

Similarly potassium permanganate or chromic acid can set ablaze poly hydric
alcohols such as glycerol, if they come into contact with each other.

Also it is advisable to store the oxidizing chemicals in a separate store, away from
the operational areas, having adequate ventilation and cooling arrangement, since
most of these chemicals are susceptible to thermal decomposition.

b)

Water sensitive chemicals:

There are many chemicals which undergo decomposition upon contact with water
and the rate of some of the decomposition processes is so fast that it results in
explosion and Fire.

i)

metallic elements, such as sodium, potassium, rubidium, magnesium, lithium


etc.

ii)

metal salts such as hydrides, nitrides, sulphides, carbides, borides, acid


anhydrides, concentrated mineral acids.

iii)

Organic chloro compounds such as acetyl chloride, Thionyl chloride etc.

These compounds are to be stored in water proof storage rooms, in air tight
containers preferably on dry sand beds, which normally acts as good adsorbant, in
case of any leakage.

As these are very reactive with water, steam etc., a caution board in bold letters
should be displayed outside the storage room, strictly prohibiting the use of water in
that area, in case of any fire.

Only recommended fire fighting agents, such as Drypowder, CO2 should be used in
the affected area.

c)

Toxic chemicals:

These chemicals can be both Organic or Inorganic, as well as in all the 3 forms viz.
solids, liquids or gases.

1.

Store these chemicals, especially if they are in the liquid form, in well closed
containers in a cool place with adequate ventilation. This is more relevant, if the
material is low in its boiling point.

2.

Ensure that as far as possible they are not allowed to come into contact with
atmospheric oxygen, moisture etc. as many of the otherwise harmless chemicals
become toxic due to chemical degradation, with air and moisture. (Chemicals such
as chloroform, carbon tetrachloride etc., can produce the highly toxic gas phosgene,
by their interaction with atmospheric oxygen and moisture, particularly when stored
in mild steel containers).

3.

Ensure that toxic chemicals are not stored along with other chemicals, particularly
with those meant for human consumption such as IP/BP grade products.

4.

There must be proper identification tags on toxic chemicals, clearly indicating the
route through which they enter human body and severity of toxicity.

5.

All safety aids, such as hand gloves, nose masks, fresh air masks, goggles etc
should be available handy and use of these equipments should be strictly enforced,
through proper education and training.

6.

Appropriate antidotes against each of the toxic chemicals should be made


available at the site and people handling the toxic substances must be trained to
handle them in case of emergency.

7.

d)

Material safety data sheet should be consulted before going to handle toxic
products.

Corrosive chemicals:

Some of the common corrosive chemicals, being used in chemical industries are:

1. concentrated mineral acids

2. anhydrides of organic acids.

3. some of the organic chloro compounds (acetyl and Thionyl chlorides).

4. liquid bromine, iodine, chlorine and some of their compounds

5. alkalis, such as hydroxidces of ammonia, sodium potassium, calcium, barium

6. oxides and pentoxides of certain non metals, such as phosphorous (P 2O5),


sulphur (SO2, SO3), some of metal halides (AlCl3) etc. etc.

As corrosive chemicals can cause severe injuries to human body, including loss of
vision or damage to limbs, causing permanent deformity, it is very important that of
safety aids, such as goggles, face shields, nose and fresh air masks, aprons, hand
gloves, safety shoes etc. should be utilized while handling such hazardous products.

e.g. strong alkalis like sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, liquor ammonia
solution can damage the eye permanently, if there is a splash and they come into

contact with eye. No alkaline material should be handled without goggles and
handgloves.

Contact any part of the body by concentrated mineral acids such as Sulphuric and
nitric acids, can cause severe burns and blisters. Always wear protective aids such
as gloves, goggles, aprons and safety shoes while handling these chemicals.

Hydrofluoric acid:

It is extremely irritating and corrosive to skin, eyes and mucous membrane.


Inhalation of vapours may cause ulcers of upper respiratory tract. Prolonged
contact with skin can lead to destruction of the blood vessels and tissues and
gangrene may follow on the affected areas. Never allow the liquid or its vapours to
come into contact with the skin and eyes. Also safety equipments like gloves,
goggles, aprons, fresh air masks and safety shoes should be worn before handling
it.

Dimethyl sulphate:

It is colourless and odourless liquid and contact of this chemical on the skin will not
cause any feeling of discomfort or irritation for hours together, but later on there
would be intense pain and irritation on the affected part of the body causing painful
blisters. Make sure that safety aids like goggles, gloves, aprons and safety shoes
are used while handling this product.

e)

Compressed gases:

There are several liquefied and natural gases used in chemical industry for
manufacturing purposes. These are conveyed in specially designed cylinders with
unique colour codes for easy identification.

Some of the most commonly used gases in chemical industries are:

1. ammonia
2. carbon dioxide
3. air compressed
4. chlorine
5. Fluorine
6. Helium
7. Hydrogen
8. Mono methylamine
9. Nitrous oxide
10.Nitrogen
11.Oxygen
12.Sulphur dioxide etc.

These gases can be flammable, toxic or corrosive in nature and extreme care should
be taken in their storage and handling.

Some of the precautions to be observed are:

a)

keep the full cylinders always in a vertical position, near a solid support like the
wall of the building, duly fastened to the wall with metal chains, to prevent them
from falling down.

b)

The storage place should be located away from the main building and should be
provided with suitable cover, so as to avoid direct sun rays falling on to these
cylinders.

c)

The storage block should be adequately ventilated so that the vapour


accumulation is minimum in case of leakage.

d)

Keep the cylinders capped and take all precaution to ensure that the needle valve
of the cylinder is not damaged during transportation from one place to another.

e)

Avoid storage of incompatible gases together and also it is advisable to keep


minimum possible inventory at any time.

f)

Use the recommended gas regulators while using the cylinder and never try to
repair the valve of a leaking cylinder. In case of leakage remove the leaking
cylinder to an isolated area in a cool place and let the gas bleed off slowly and in
case it is toxic or corrosive, inform the authorized dealer immediately,

g)

Always use cylinder trolleys for shifting the cylinders from one place to another
and never drag or roll the cylinders on hard surface.

h)

Do not apply any grease or lubricants on the cylinder nozzles, as gases like
hydrogen oxygen etc. can ignite the organic matter.

HEALTH & SAFETY INFORMATION

Risk Phrases

R1

Explosive when dry.

R2

Risk of explosion by shock, friction, fire or other sources of ignition.

R3

Extreme risk of explosion by shock, friction, fire or other sources of ignition.

R4

Forms very sensitive explosive metallic compounds.

R5

Heating may cause an explosion.

R6

Explosive with or without contact with air.

R7

May cause fire.

R8

Contact with combustible material may cause fire.

R9

Explosive when mixed with combustible material

R10

Flammable

R11

Highly flammable.

R12

Extremely flammable

R14

Reacts violently with water

R15

Contact with water liberates extremely flammable gases.

R16

Explosive when mixed with oxidizing substances.

R17

Spontaneously flammable in air.

R18

In use, may form flammable / explosive vapour-air mixture.

R19

May form explosive peroxides.

R20

Harmful by inhalation

R21

Harmful in contact with skin.

R22

Harmful if swallowed

R23

Toxic by inhalation

R24

Toxic in contact with skin.

R25

Toxic if swallowed.

R26

Very toxic by inhalation.

R27

Very toxic in contact with skin.

R28

Very toxic if swallowed.

R29

Contact with water liberates toxic gas.

R30

Can become highly flammable in use.

R31

Contact with acids liberates toxic gas.

R32

Contact with acids liberates very toxic gas.

R33

Danger of cumulative effects.

R34

Causes burns

R35

Causes severe burns.

R36

Irritating to eyes.

R37

Irritating to respiratory system.

R38

Irritating to skin.

R39

Danger of very serious irreversible effects.

R40

Possible risks of irreversible effects.

R41

Risk of serious damage to eyes.

R42

May cause sensitization by inhalation.

R43

May cause sensitization by skin contact.

R44

Risk of explosion if heated under confinement.

R45

May cause cancer

R46

May cause heritable genetic damage.

R48

Danger of serious damage to health by prolonged explosure.

R49

May cause cancer by inhalation.

R50

Very toxic to aquatic organisms.

R51

Toxic to aquatic organisms.

R52

Harmful to aquatic organisms.

R53

May cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.

R54

Toxic to flora

R55

Toxic to fauna

R56

Toxic to soil organisms

R57

Toxic to bees

R58

May cause long-term adverse effects in the environment

R59

Dangerous for the ozone layer.

R60

May impair fertility

R61

May cause harm to the unborn child.

R62

Possible risk of impaired fertility.

R63

Possible risk of harm to the unborn child.

R64

May cause harm to breastfed babies

R65

Harmful may cause lung damage if swallowed.

Combination of R-phrases

R14/15 Reacts violently with water liberating extremely flammable gases.

R15/29 Contact with water liberates toxic, extremely flammable gas.

R20/21 Harmful by inhalation and in contact with skin.

R20/22 Harmful by inhalation and if swallowed

R20/21/22

Harmful by inhalation and in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R21/22 Harmful in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R23/24 Toxic by inhalation and in contact with skin

R23/25 Toxic by inhalation and if swallowed.

R23/24/25

Toxic by inhalation, in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R24/25 Toxic in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R26/27 Very toxic by inhalation and in contact with skin.

R26/28 Very toxic by inhalation and if swallowed.

R26/27/28

Very toxic by inhalation, in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R27/28 Very toxic in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R36/37 Irritating to eyes and respiratory system.

R36/38 Irritating to eyes and skin

R36/37/38

Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin.

R37/38 Irritating to respiratory system and skin.

R39/23 Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through inhalation.

R39/25 Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects if swallowed.

R39/23/24

Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through inhalation

and in contact with skin.

R39/23/25

Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through inhalation

and if swallowed.

R39/24/25

Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects in contact with

skin and if swallowed.

R39/23/24/25 Toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through


inhalation, in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R39/26 Very toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through


inhalation.

R39/27 Very toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects in contact


with skin.

R39/28 Very toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects if swallowed.

R39/27/28

Very toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects in contact

with skin and if swallowed.

R39/26/27/28 Very toxic: danger of very serious irreversible effects through


Inhalation, in contact with skin and if swallowed.

R40/20 Harmful: possible risk of irreversible effects through inhalation.

R40/21 Harmful: possible risk of irreversible effects in contact with skin.

R40/22 Harmful: possible risk of irreversible effects if swallowed.

LIST OF INCOMPATIBLE CHEMICALS

CHEMICAL

TO BE KEPT OUT OF CONTACT WITH

Acetic acid

Chromic acid, Nitric acid, Hydroxyl compounds, ethylene,


Glycol, Perchloric acid, Peroxides, Permanganates.

Acetylene

Chlorine, Bromine, Copper, Fluorine, Silver, Mercury

Metals (powdered Carbon Tetrachloride or other chlorinated


aluminium,
Hydrocarbons, carbon dioxide and Halogens.
Magnesium,
Sodium
or
Potassium)
Ammonia

Mercury (in Manometers for instance) Chlorine, Iodine,


Bromine, Hydrofluoric acid (G)

Ammonium
Nitrate

Acids, Metal Powders, Flammable Liquids, Chlorates,


Nitrates, Finely divided organic or combustible materials.

Aniline

Nitric acid, hydrogen peroxide

Bromine

Ammonia, Acetylene, Benzene, Finely divided metals

Chromic Acid

Acetic acid, Glycerine, Alcohol, Methanol, Flammable


Liquids in general.

Hydrogen
peroxide

Copper, Chromium, Iron, Most metals and their Salts,


Alcohols,
Acetone,
Organic
materials,
Aniline,
Flammable liquids, Combustile materials.

Iodine

Acetylene, Ammonia (Aqueous and Gas) Hydrogen

Mercury

Acetylene, Ammonia

Cons. Nitric acid

Acetic acid, Aniline, Chromic acid, flammable liquids and


gases

Oxalic acid

Mercury

Perchloric acid

Acetic anhydride, alcohol, paper, wood.

Potassium
permanganate

Glycerine, Ethylene Glycol, Benzaldehyde, Sulphuric acid

Sodium

Water, carbon tetrachloride, carbon dioxide

Sulphuric acid

Potassium permanganate and compounds of similar light


metals such as sodium

Oxidising

Substances which give rise to highly exothermic reactions in contact with other
substances, particularly flammable substances.

Flammable

Extremely flammable liquids have a flash point less than 0C and a boiling point less
than or equal to 35C.

Harmful and irritant

Substances which present moderate risks to health by inhalation, ingestion or skin


absorption, inhalation, ingestion or skin absorption. Substances which are noncorrosive but are liable to cause inflammation through immediate prolonged or
repeated contact with the skin or mucous membranes.

Explosive

Substances which may explode under the effect of flame or heat or which are more
sensitive to shock of friction than dinitrobenzene.

Toxic

Substances which present a serious risk of acute or chronic poisoning by inhalation


ingestion or skin absorption.

Corrosive

Substances which destroy living tissue

Dangerous to the environment

Substance which, were they to enter into a environment, would present or might
present an immediate or delayed danger for one or more components of the
environment.
You might also like:

Quality Manual as per ICH Guidelines


TRAINING MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES
EMS PROCEDURE MANUAL
Guidelines for production activities as per safety & cGMP requirement
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:18 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment
Links to this post

Create a Link
Newer Post Older Post Home
Subscribe to: Post Comments (Atom)

Search This Blog


Search

powered by

Subscribe via email


Enter your email address:

QualityAssurance en_US

Subscribe

Delivered by FeedBurner

Subscribe Now: standard


Subscribe in a reader

Ad Space
Subscribe Now: google

Labels

Audit (4)

Calibration (36)

Guidelines (3)

Manual (4)

Microbiology (7)

Questionnaire (2)

Standard Operating Procedures-Maintenance (15)

Standard Operating Procedures-Personel (13)

Standard Operating Procedures-Production (14)

Standard Operating Procedures-QA (38)

Standard Operating Procedures-QC (59)

Standard Operating Procedures-Warehouse (16)

Validation (11)

Worksheeet (3)

Recent Comments
Blog Archive

2011 (2)
o

01/09 - 01/16 (2)

Available Guidance and Best Practices for Conducti...

Procedure Of Corrective And Preventive Action

2010 (224)
o

12/26 - 01/02 (19)

Procedure for conducting Stability Studies

Out of Calibration of instruments

Analytical report numbering

Validation of QC Chemist

Record maintained by Quality control department

Labeling by Quality control department

Functions of Quality control department

Cleaning of HPLC columns

Re-testing of raw materials and intermediates

Acceptance of raw materials on supplier certificat...

Sending sample to contract lab

Sampling, testing and release of raw materials

Calculation in QC department

Opening and closing of QC department

Cleaning of sampling tools

Standardization and storage of Reference and Worki...

Preparation, Standardization and Shelf-life of Vol...

Sampling of Raw Material

Internal Audit Plan as per GMP

12/19 - 12/26 (1)

Quality Control of Capsules

12/12 - 12/19 (59)

Calibration of Disintegration test apparatus

Calibration of Friability test apparatus

Calibration of serological water bath

Bar Coding System for packaging materials

Code numbering system of packaging material

Cleaning & Sanitisation of Sampling room

Operating Leak test Apparatus

Sampling and Testing of packing materials

Operation of colony counter

Operation of compound microscope

Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiologic...

Media Fill operation in the sterile dry powder fil...

Disposing of microbiological culture media

Preparation of Microbial Plates

Operation and Cleaning of Laminar bench

Maintaining of Bacterial Cultures

Limulas Amoebocyte lysate test (LAL)

Monitoring Personnel of sterile area in Aseptic ar...

Operation and Calibration of Heating-Blocks

Environmental monitoring of the microbiology labor...

Fumigation and de-fumigation of Aseptic area

Swab sampling and testing for clean rooms

Monitoring of Aseptic area by Passive air sampling...

Air sampling in Sterile area

Cleaning and disinfections of Aseptic area

Validating Corporate Computer Systems: Good IT Pra...

Guidelines for production activities as per safety...

Requisition and issuance of Raw materials

12/05 - 12/12 (89)

11/28 - 12/05 (43)

EMS PROCEDURE MANUAL

STERILITY TESTING

VALIDATION OF INCUBATORS

OPERATION AND CLEANING OF MOIST HEAT STERILIZER

FERTILITY ( GROWTH PROMOTION ) TEST FOR MEDIA.

DEPYROGENATION OF LAB APPARATUS

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF MICROPIPETTE

CULTURE MEDIA PREPARATION FOR MICROBIAL TEST

MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OFCONTROL S...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF HPLC SYSTEM (SIMADZU...

DESTRUCTION OF ANALYTICAL SAMPLES AFTER TESTING

OPERATION OF CENTRIFUGE

PROCEDURE FOR OPERATING OF SONICATOR

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF REFRACTOMETR

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF KARL FISCHER APPAR...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF POLARIMETER

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF BULK DENSITY APPARATU...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF pH METER

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF SHORE HARDNESS TESTER...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF BURSTING STRENGTH TES...

Monitor the Quality of Water for Injection

MONITORING OF WATER FOR INJECTION QUALITY

MONITORING OF PURIFIED De-Minerlised WATER

MONITORING OF RAW, POTABLE AND REVERSE OMOSIS WA...

CLEANING OF QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY

WORKSHEET FOR STABILITY STUDY

STABILITY STUDY PROTOCOL FOR ANALYTICAL METHOD VAL...

TRAINING MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES

SAFETY MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES

GUIDELINES FOR EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN

Quality Manual as per ICH Guidelines

PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF ...

SWAB SAMPLING FOR CLEANING VALIDATION

OPERATION, CLEANING, STORAGE, CALIBRATION AND REGE...

STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS & DESTRUCTION AFTE...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF DISSOLUTION TEST ...

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF ULTRAVIOLET SPECTROPH...

RETESTING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS

RETESTING AND RE SAMPLING OF RAW MATERIALS

HANDLING OF REFERENCE STANDARDS, PREPARATION AND ...

LABORATORY DISCIPLINE IN QC LAB

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALYTICAL BALANCE

REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ANALYTICAL RAW DATA

11/21 - 11/28 (13)

FeedBurner FeedCount

Feedjit
Feedjit Live Blog Stats

Total Pageviews
4,820

Get Answers to Quality related Matters


Share it
Followers
Amazon Deals
Facebook Badge
Anis Mustafa

Create Your Badge

EMS PROCEDURE MANUAL

INDEX
Sr .
no

Ref

Procedure

Issue

EP1

Identification of environmental aspects & impacts

01

EP2

Evaluation of significant environmental aspects & impacts

01

EP3

Regulatory and legal requirements

01

EP4

Setting and reviewing objectives and targets

01

EP5

Communication

01

EP6

Waste management

01

EP7

Effluent monitoring

01

EP8

Storage, handling and disposal of cloths waste & prevention of


pollutions.

01

PROCEDURE FOR IDENTIFICATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS

PURPOSE

THIS PROCEDURE DEALS WITH IDENTIFICATION, EVALUATION, AND REVIEW


OF ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS AND THEIR IMPACTS.

SCOPE

THIS PROCEDURE COVERS ALL ACTIVITIES, SERVICES AND PRODUCTS OF THE MPPL.

PROCEDURE

THE MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE (MR) FORMS A CROSS FUNCTIONAL TEAM AND


IN COORDINATION WITH EXTERNAL CONSULTANT WILL CONDUCT AN ENVIRONMENTAL
REVIEW ONCE IN 12 MONTHS ( YEARLY ) AND PROVIDE THE RESULTS FOR
ASSESSMENT TO THE MANAGING DIRECTOR.

THE RESULTS OF FINDING ARE DOCUMENTED IN THE INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL


REVIEW REPORT. IF THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW TEAM DETERMINES THAT
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS NEEDED TO EVALUATE PRODUCT OR ACTIVITY. MR WILL
ASSIGN THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR COLLECTING THE INFORMATIONS TO
APPROPRIATE TEAM MEMBER. LIST OF ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS IS DETERMINED.

THE RESULTS OF THE MOST RECENT ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ARE REVIEWED AS


PART OF THE MANAGEMENT REVIEW PROCESS, BASED ON THE REVIEW; IT
DETERMINES THE NEED TO UPDATE THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT EVALUATION.

ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION OF ASPECTS SHALL BE DONE BY DEEPT. HEADS FOR


DETERMINING THE SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACT AS PER ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECT
CREATION EVALUATION TABLE. THE DIRECTOR UNDERTAKES THE DETAILED

EVALUATION OF IDENTIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS. THE SIGNIFICANT ASPECTS


ARE PRIORITIZED AFTER DISCUSSION TO TAKE UP FOR SETTING OF OBJECTIVES.

AN ASPECT SHALL BE CONSIDERED HIGHLY SIGNIFICANT IF IT RATES ABOVE 250


POINTS AS PER THE TABLE , IF IT RATES BETWEEN 100 AND 200 POINTS IT SHALL BE
CONSIDERED AS MEDIUM SIGNIFICANT AND LESS THAN 100 POINTS SHALL BE
CONSIDERED LOW SIGNIFICANT.

ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS THAT ARE COVERED UNDER LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS


SHALL BE CONSIDERED HIGHLY SIGNIFICANT IF ANY SUCH FAILS TO MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS IRRESPECTIVE OF THE LOW RATING IN THE TABLE.

THE LIST OF ASPECTS AND CRITERIA FOR SIGNIFICANCE EVALUATION IS KEPT UP TO


DATE. NEW ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES ( ASPECTS ) AS DECIDED IN MANAGEMENT
REVIEW MEETING MAY BE CONSIDERED IN EMS.

RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY

SECTION IN CHARGE IS RESPONSIBLE FOR IDENTIFYING ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS


IN HIS AREA.

MR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW.

DIRECTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS.

EP2: Evaluation of significant Environmental Aspects & Impacts

0.0 Scope

This procedure describes the responsibilities and methods for determining aspects,

impacts and their significance of MPPL operations.

1.0 Purpose

This procedure exists to ensure that MPPL significant environmental aspects and impacts are
identified in order that the EMS may address them.

2.0 Responsibilities

the Director must ensuring that this document is updated as often as is

necessary to ensure that it is relevant to MPPL working practices.

The Director is responsible for ensuring that all managers & supervisors are aware of those
aspects & impacts, which are generated by their work.

3.0 Procedure:

3.1

Aspects Evaluation

The environmental aspects of MPPL operations include:

energy consumption

resource consumption

The Director determines the aspect and impacts using an input output process model ,
recording the resources used and products developed .

Having determined these, the Director then determines the impacts of these aspects and
impacts under normal conditions.

3.2 Significance criteria test

Having determined an impact, the Director then uses the criteria test to determine whether or
not an aspect of MPPL operations is environmentally significant. The questions are listed in
order of priority.

1. Is the issue controlled by environmental legislation?


2. Is an effluents / emissions / wastes quantity or concentration at units controlled by an
environmental regulatory permit ?
3. Has anyone complained about the effluent/emissions/waste?
4. Can the emissions be the cause of an upset on pollution control equipment ?
5. Does the process consume more than 5% of the companys energy requirements ?
6. In an emergency, is there potential for an unintentional spillage of liquid or atmospheric
emission migrating outside the boundaries of the site and causing environmental
damage ?
The significant aspects are rated on from 4.3.1 F1(appendix-1), in order of significance. The
greater the number of yes answers, the more significant the aspect.
The list of significant , ranked impacts is then used as a trigger for setting the objectives and
targets.
Cross reference: Aspect and impact analysis

EP 2: Regulatory and legal requirements


1.0 Scope:

This procedure applies to all regulated process conducted by MPPL

2.0 Purpose:

This procedure outlines the responsibilities for supervising the implementation of legislation
relating to the environment .

3.0 Responsibility:

The MR is responsible for maintaining the register of legislation and other requirements, and for
implements any changes triggered by new regulations.

4.0 Procedure:

MPPL operates under a number of different consents imposed by the environment authorities.
The Director holds copies of the COMPANY (ies ) are
1.

The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986

These are supported by other acts, statutory regulations. This must be adhered to the
requirements.

The MR keeps up to date with legislation by subscribing to environments management. A copy


of this publication is held in the office. The company also keeps up to date with legislation and
other requirements through communications from the Manufactures Associations guidelines on
the environments.

All relevant legislation is maintained in a register of legislation and other requirements which is
held in Appendix 2, on Form EPF -R1 (appendix 2) Legal register of key processes ,
legislations, Releases and environmental impacts.

Cross reference:
Legal Register (Form EPF -R1)

EP : 3 Setting and Reviewing Objectives and Target

1.0 Scope:
This procedure is applicable for setting and reviewing the objectives & targets for MPPL

2.0 Purpose:
The aim of this procedure is to define new objectives and targets, and to review and update
objectives and targets . Targets should be quantifiable where possible and relate to the
objectives contains in the environmental policy.

3.0 Responsibility:

The MR has overall responsibility for the implementations of this procedure.

4.0 Procedure:

4.1 On an annual basis the operations Director is responsible for co-coordinating the objectives
and targets within the context of:

Findings resulting from the audit programme

Evaluation of the impacts register

Emerging legislation

Evaluation emerging environmental issues , such as phase out of specific hazardous


materials

New (environmental) technology

Reviewing process against current objectives and targets

1.1 The MR is responsible for ensuring that objectives and quantified targets are set for reducing
waste, and energy use in all production departments.
1.2

The MR is responsible for ensuring that any relevant technical objectives and target are set e.g.
development of new procedures, improved management of environmental impacts.

1.3

The maintenance Supervisor is responsible for ensuring that relevant objectives and targets
are set for maintenance activities.

1.4 The Director is responsible for setting relevant objectives and targets, e.g. looking for
environmentally friendly alternatives for hazardous materials, and establishing a phase out
schedule.

4.2 In addition to the annual objectives and target setting, objectives and targets may also be
set by managers when necessary , e.g. in case of new legislation or incidents . These must be
communicated to the Director.

4.3 The Director is responsible for consolidating environmental objectives and target provided
by the managers and for ensuring that targets are consistent with the environmental policy and
objectives

1. Include environmental high risk issues


2. Are quantified where possible
3. Include a cost benefit analysis where possible
4. Are demanding but achievable.

4.4 The Director is responsible for presenting the consolidated objectives and targets for
Management review and for communicating approved targets to relevant personnel.

4.5 Director is responsible for rotating an up to date list of objectives and targets together with
any superseded list and corrective actions.

Cross reference:
Environmental Objectives Chart (EPF- F1)

EP : 4 Communication

1.0 Scope :

This procedure applies to internal as well as external communication between employees of


MPPL suppliers, customers, and various applicable regulatory authorities.

2.0 Purpose:

Purpose of this procedure is to establish effective communication between internal & external
customer so that effective Environmental Management System can be established in MPPL.

3.0 Responsibility: &


4.0 Procedure:
Refer appendix of this procedure EMS Communication Matrix.

EP 5: Waste management

5.0 Scope :
This procedure applies to all waste management conducted by MPPL.

6.0 Purpose:

The purpose of this procedure is to make sure that:

All waste management activities are conducted in accordance with the requirements of relevant
legislation , regulations and other statutory codes .
Consistently high standards of waste management are observed at all times and in all places
The management realizes every opportunity for waste minimization.

7.0 Responsibilities

7.1

Contract waste carriers.

Retain copy waste carrier licenses (if applicable).

Monitor the performance of waste Disposal.

7.2

8.0

PRODUCTION MANAGER:

SUPERVISOR:

Keep an inventory of all waste products

Advise the MR on suitable waste contractors.

Sign and retain waste transfer documentation.

Describe each waste.

Develop and implement a waste minimization strategy.

Procedure
Any waste that is produced at MPPL is appropriately stored treated and disposed off some waste ,
such as scrap & other cloths waste( such as copper iron gun cloths powder etc.) several key
steps must be incorporated from waste production through to final disposal viz.

Identification and description of waste,


Appropriate storage of waste materials,
Transfer of waste materials to known persons only,
Completing and retaining waste transfer documentation,
Checking the performance of waste contractors.

Identification and description of waste:


All controlled wastes should be identified and recorded in a waste inventory. the inventory
should as a minimum contain details of :

A description of each waste, which should include :


The disposal method employed , i.e. waste carrier and skip type
where possible the inventory should the approximate quantities of each waste produced , per week
cans per month etc.

An example of a waste inventory and a blank pro-forma are included in the appendices of this
procedure .

Appropriate waste storage:


All waste produced must be stored appropriate storage shall
consider security from vandals ,children , trespassers and wildlife ,
clearly label waste storage compound
clearly label special wastage. , e.g. asbestos or minerals greases ,
investigate if the waste requires segregation due to the potential effects of any mixing of wastes.
Include an inspection program of storage areas commensurate with the risk ..

Transfer of waste material:

All waste contractors employed to remove waste materials must be in the list of approved
supplier.

COMPLETING AND RETAINING WASTE TRANSFER DOCUMENTATION

Each waste transfer to a waste carrier shall be recorded with the appropriate waste transfer note
Where waste transfers a repetitive and consists of general waste only an annual transfer note shall
be acceptable.
Waste transfer notes shall be retained for month of 2years.

EP 6 Effluent Monitoring
1.

Scope

This procedure defines the responsibilities and actions to ensure that the company complies
with all the requirements of all trade effluent discharge consent.

2. Responsibilities

The Director is responsible for ensuring compliance with trade effluent discharge consents, and
communicating with Waste control ( AMC ) & control of pollution) authority.

Production Manager is responsible for informing the Director of any planned change in process ,
which may result in change to the nature , and composition of a trade effluent.

3. Procedure

3.1 The company must comply with the relevant consent limits at all times .
3.2 Trade effluent must only be discharged from the specified points as detailed on individual
consents.
3.3 Monitoring points at all times without prior notification for the purpose of inspecting ,testing or
sampling effluent.
3.4 Trade effluent must not contain any oily substances .

A process change that may affect any effluent consent held necessitates a review of this
procedure . The Production manager must be notified of any such change.

Cross reference:
Effluent quality monitoring register.( EPF -R4)

EP 7 : Storage , handling and disposal of cloth waste and prevention of pollution

1.0 Scope
This procedure describes the responsibilities for, and the action to be taken , for the disposal ,
storage and handling of cloths waste and prevention of pollution.

2.0 Purpose
This procedure exists to ensure the safe and effective handling and storage of cloths waste, in
order to prevent pollution

3.0 Responsibilities
All personnel involved in the disposal , handling and storage of cloths waste, have a responsibility
for following this procedure .
Relevant seniors are responsible for ensuring all personnel under their jurisdiction are fully aware of
this procedure .
The Production Manager is responsible for regular checks and monitoring.

4.0 Procedure

4.1. CLOTHS WASTE


cloths waste must be stored in the designated areas prior to use these are :processing in the designated area
raw material in desired area

4.2.waste - cloths waste

4.2.1 all waste cloths waste should be stored in designated storage area having three ( 3 ) feet
boundary.

4.2..2 Related person should wear long shoes & equipped with long fork for handling the
scrape.

5.0 GENERAL:

5.1 When transporting or cloths scrape be taken to precaution.


5.2 It is offence to cause waste pollution, either deliberately or accidentally.
5.3 waste shall not be carried out in the store premises.
You might also like:
Quality Manual as per ICH Guidelines
SAFETY MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES
TRAINING MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES
Effluent Treatment Plant

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:29 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Monday, November 29, 2010


TRAINING MANUAL AS PER ICH GUIDELINES

1.0

INTRODUCTION

Pharmaceutical Ltd. recognizes the importance of formalized training programs to


impart training to all employees of various levels.

This Training Manual is prepared at the beginning of calendar year to enhance the
effectiveness of training procedure existing in the company.

Training Manual includes the various Types of training and cGMP training schedules
for each department, which identifies the name of the topic, targeted audience &
trainer to conduct the training in all organized manner.

Departmental training schedules are prepared by concerned departmental head in


coordination with the head QA, keeping in mind the background of training needs.

SOP training is not included in the Manual, since it will be covered in the change
management system, via a separate SOP. Whenever a new SOP is made (or)
existing SOPs is revised, the respective dept. personnel are trained to make them
familiar with the activities mentioned in the SOPs to make them effective.

2.0

OBJECTIVE

To ensure that all the employees working in Pharmaceutical Ltd., are capable to
perform the duties as per the cGMP, SOPs and procedures and each employee of
Pharmaceutical Ltd., shall improve the relevant knowledge, expertise and to
consolidate the same to discharge their duties effectively. cGMP advises that
appropriate training is required to perform the jobs effectively, which in turn helps in
maintaining the quality system.

3.0

SCOPE

This procedure applies for training of all levels of employees and permanent
workers, working in
Pharmaceutical Ltd.

4.0

RESPONSIBILITIES

Departmental heads are responsible to ensure that the training programs are
conducted as per the schedule in respective departments.

Personnel & administration department is responsible to coordinate with the trainer,


trainee and departmental heads and to monitor the schedules, to organize the
trainings and to keep the training records, department wise and individually.

Trainer should prepare / refer the (training) course material and a questionnaire will
be prepared for each topic in consultation with the departmental heads / seniors.

After completion of each session, trainer should evaluate feedback. If some body
needs retraining it should be organized in coordination with the personnel and
administrative department.

Each trainee should sign in their departmental training log after attending the
training program.

Each employee is responsible to attend the training / retraining as per the schedule
communicated to him.

QA shall verify whether the Training program is carried out as per the schedule
during their audits.

5.0

PROCEDURE

TYPES OF TRAINING:

5.1

Induction training

5.2

On job training

5.3

GMP training (Interim),

5.4

External training

MANUAL PREPARATION:

Individual Departmental Schedules of training topics are prepared by the respective


departmental heads, reviewed by Executive P & A, which is Approved by D.G.M
Q.A/Q.C and Authorized by Sr. G.M Manufacturing and then included in the training
Manual.

The schedules are prepared by departmental head in consultation with Executive


P & A, D.G.M Q.A/Q.C, identifying the training needs of personnel in respective
departments in connection with cGMP system. By including individual departmental
schedules besides the coverage of other kind of topics a training Manual shall be
compiled by Q.A.

A training Manual for the next calendar year may be prepared in the month of
March or in advance as appropriate.

Training Manual should be approved by D.G.M Q.A/Q.C and Authorized by Sr. G.M
Mfg. prior to issuance and implementation.

A copy of the training Manual shall be issued to personnel dept and Personnel
Department will circulate a copy of the departmental training schedules to the
respective head of departments.

A master copy of training Manual shall be retained at Q.A and controlled copy
circulated to Executive P & A.

5.1

Induction training
(Chemists, Officer, Executives & Above)

Each new employee from supervisory and above will be given induction training in the
following aspects:

Introduction about the companys code of conduct and job responsibilities.

Personal hygiene, dos & donts.

Importance of GMP and its compliance, key elements of GMP and GLP (Good
laboratory practices) as appropriate.

An induction program will be arranged by Executive P & A, where the new person
will be made familiar with the contact people in each dept. and the activities that are
being carried out in those departments.

Induction training (workman / Workmen)

Each new employee will be given induction training in the following aspects by
Executive P&A.

Introduction about the company.

Definition of GMP, its importance and basic rules of GMP.

Personal hygiene, personal up keepment at the work place and gowning


procedures.
Briefing about their job responsibilities.

Evaluation of Induction training

Evaluation of induction training will be done by oral questioning and interactive


sessions; hence no specific evaluation will be done. Mainly this training is to make
the employees familiar with the organization and their job roles / requirements in
brief and to know the preliminary information about the organization and the
contact personnel.

5.2

On the job training:

The topics will be selected on the basis of training needs related to the job by
department Heads periodically. The training will be conducted on the job at the work
places like manufacturing floor and in the Q.C lab etc (In brief at the work place.)

If required, classroom sessions will be also conducted to impart the knowledge


about the theory as decided by the department Head (trainer).

Training on relevant process equipment/analytical instruments, manufacturing


process steps and detailed procedure to operate the same equipment/ instruments
to be practically demonstrated / explained. Other procedures shall also be
practically explained on the job as applicable.

Trainer shall write the remark that participants were trained, head of department
review shall be carried out and review comments shall be recorded in the same
format.

On job training shall be documented only in the format Department Training Log.

Schedules are prepared by head of department for on job training and the same will
be complied to make the employees pertinent to their relevant jobs that they carried
out.

5.3

GMP Training:

GMP training schedules are prepared as part of training Manual by each dept. Head,
reviewed by Manager personnel, Approved by D.G.M - Q.A / Q.C, and Authorized by
Sr. G.M - Manufacturing.

Training sessions shall be conducted by the respective department Heads as per


the schedules and necessary evaluation shall be done at the end of the training

session, which shall be documented in the training logs and training cards and brief
summary is recorded in the on the job training format.

Evaluation of GMP training:

The effectiveness of the training will be evaluated for GMP training.

Trainees will be assessed by written test (objective questionnaire) / oral as


appropriate depending on the training topic.

The understanding about the topic on which participant was trained will be
assessed by the percentage of marks obtained. The trainee should obtain more
than 80% Marks. The trainee who scores less than 80% will be retrained. Suitable
method of departments can adopted for oral assessments.

5.4

External training:

External training will be imparted to chemists, Officers / Executives and other


personnel based on the needs. Normally following training topics are covered under
this training.

cGMP (current Good Manufacturing Practice).

GLP (Good Laboratory Practice).

Validations.

Regulatory aspects.

Other topics as appropriate.

External training shall be recorded in the individual training cards, no specific


formats /Logs are maintained for this kind of training. Training evaluation record
shall be maintained.

6.0
6.1

TRAINING RECORD:
All the employees training details are recorded in Training Card
maintained at Personnel dept. and in the respective Log Book for
Training. .

6.2

Training needs shall be identified by the respective department heads, before


preparation of schedules to be included in subsequent calendar year training
Manual.

6.3

All the training related formats are specified in the Annexure. Each training
shall be recorded as in the Annexure as Indicated below.

7.0

MODEL DOCUMENTS / FORMATS:

7.1

Annexure I: Induction Training Format.

7.2

Annexure II: GMP / On job Department Training Log.

7.3

Annexure III: GMP/ On Job Training Report Format.

7.4

Annexure IV: Employee Training Card.


ANNEXURE-I

INDUCTION TRAINING FORMAT

Issued By:

Topic: INDUCTION TRAINING

(Executive P & A)
Name of the Employee:

Designation:

Dept:

Date of joining:

Remarks After training by Executive P & A

Remarks After training by Head - Q.A

Conducted By

Sign

Date

1.

2.

Note:-One form shall be filled for each employee

After Induction training program, Details shall be recorded in the


following form.

ANNEXURE-II

GMP / ON JOB DEPARTMENT TRAINING LOG

Name Of Trainer:

Date:

Designation
Location:

Duration of Training:

Title Of Training

Topics Covered

S. No.

Name Of

Designatio

Departme

Employee

Employee

nt

Signature

Trainer Sign

ANNEXURE-III

GMP/ ON JOB TRAINING REPORT FORMAT

Issued By:

Sign

Date

Dept

Date

Head - Q.A
Topic:

Demonstration / Explaining / Counselling / Class room training


( which ever it appropriate)

Brief description/ Review:

Type of Evaluation

Written / Oral

Trainer Name:

Sign

ANNEXURE IV
EMPLOYEE TRAINING CARD

NAME
:
JOINING:

DATE OF

DEPARTMENT
:
DESIGNATION:

SR
No
.

Date
of
Traini
ng

Topic

Mode
of
training

Mode of
Evaluati
on

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Sign of
Employ
ee

Remark
s by
Trainer

Name
& Sign
of
Trainer

Sign
of
Dept
.
Head

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

Writte
n/
Oral

Writte
n / Oral

All kinds of training programs attended by the participant shall be


recorded in the following format. These formats are maintained one
individually for the each employee.

8.0

Training Course Material

Training course material should be prepared / referred for each training class or
relevant SOP Procedures, Quality Manuals, Quality Policy and instructions ICH
guidelines.

9.0

Training Feed back and evaluation

Training feedback should be obtained after conducting classroom training &


Questionnaire evaluation shall be done as appropriate.

Evaluation should be done as per the respective SOP.


10.0
Individual department training: Individual Department Training
Schedule is as per the list.

10.1

Production

10.2

Stores

10.3

Engineering

10.4

Quality Control

10.5

Personnel

10.6

Quality Assurance

Quality Manual as per ICH Guidelines

Title: Table of Contents


Sr. No.
01
02

Description
Table of Contents
Revision History

Section: QM 0.1
ISO 9001 Clause Ref.
---

Section No.
QM-0.1
QM-0.2

03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

List of Controlled Manual Holders


Introduction
Scope of the Quality Management System
Exclusions & Justifications
Quality Management System
Management Responsibility
Resource Management
Product Realization
Measurement Analysis and Improvement
Organogram

Title: Revision History


Sr. No.

Brief Description of Change

----4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
--

QM-0.3
QM-1.0
QM-2.0
QM-3.0
QM-4.0
QM-5.0
QM-6.0
QM-7.0
QM-8.0
QM-9.0

Section: QM 0.2
Rev. No.

Page No.

Title: List of Controlled Manual Holders


Sr. No.
01
02
03

Section: QM 0.3

Manual Holders
TM / MR
Production / Stores / Quality Control /Purchase / Marketing
Certification Agency

Title: Introduction

Copy No.
01 (Master Copy)
02
03

Section: QM 1.0

Our Company is one of the leading company in its class.


We at our company are dedicated to supply quality products with above mentioned
High Quality Testing Equipment, Highly qualified technical staff, in-house tool room,
checking & packing we are confident of handling your requirements.

Title: Scope of the Quality


Management System

Section: QM 2.0

Scope of the Quality Management System for ISO 9001: 2000 Standard Implementation is as
Under :

Manufacturer
Intermediates

and

Exporter

of

Bulk

Drugs

and

Pharma

Title: Exclusions & Justifications

Section: QM 3.0

The Following Clauses of ISO 9001:2000 Standard are not applicable in purview with the Scope
of the Organization:
Clause 7.3 : Design & Development :The organization is manufacturing as per the IP (31431-39-7), USP and B.P. and doesnt have its
own design hence this clause is not applicable.

Title: Quality Management System

Section: QM 4.0

4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


The company has established, documented, implemented and maintained a quality management
system to continually improve its effectiveness in accordance with ISO 9001:2000 QMS
standards
The process needed for quality management system and their applications throughout the
organization are identified.
The sequences and interaction of these processes are determined and documented in respective
sections of this manual and in respective documents. Also a Flow chart of interaction of these
processes is prepared.
The criteria and methods needed to ensure that both operation and control of these processes are
effective are determined.
Availability of resources and information necessary to support the operation and monitoring of
these processes are ensured.
These processes are monitored, measured and analyzed.
Action necessary to achieve planned results and continual improvement of these processes are
implemented.
These processes are managed by company in accordance with the requirements of ISO
9001:2000
Nitration process is outsourced and the same is controlled through outgoing and incoming
quality checks and the reports for the same are being maintained.
4.2

DOCUMENTATION

4.2.1 General
The Quality Management System Documentation includes:

Quality Policy and Quality Objectives

Quality Manual

Quality System Activities required by ISO 9001:2000 standards, which is identified by


the organization for its operations to be effective.

Work instructions, SOPs, product specifications, inspection and testing procedures,


supplier provided standards, etc.

Quality records

4.2.2 Quality Manual


This manual is in full conformity with requirements of ISO 9001 : 2000 Standards and is
supported by further levels of documentation as detailed in 4.2.1
The scope of quality management system covers activities relating to scope The documented
procedures established for the quality management activities under the scope are defined in level
B documentation.
This manual and cross-reference procedures in Process Interactions Chart describe the
interaction between various processes under the scope of Quality Management System.

4.2.3 Control of Documents


Documents as described in 4.2.1 are controlled, implemented, circulated, reviewed and approved
as activity flow charts, referred as under:
4.2.4 Control of Records
It is essential that Quality Records are maintained, since the records are the objective evidence
that the system is operating effectively at all stages. The activities for Control of Records are
referred as under:
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL- MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE

Title: Management Responsibility


5.1

Section: QM 5.0

MANAGEMENT COMMITMENT

The company commits itself to the development and implementation of quality management
system and continually improves its effectiveness. Regular meetings wherein the importance of
meeting customer requirements and feedback are communicated to employees whenever
necessity arises will achieve this. The administrative personnel are briefed regularly about the
statutory and regulatory requirements in meeting.
The quality policy is established and the text of the Quality Policy is given in 5.3
The Quality Policy is supported by tangible Quality Objectives as given in 5.3
Management Reviews are conducted regularly to ascertain effectiveness of QMS (refer 5.6)
The company ensures that adequate resources are made available to meet customer requirement,
Quality System requirements as well as statutory and regulatory requirements.
5.2

CUSTOMER FOCUS

The Company has belief in the philosophy that, CUSTOMER is the purpose of its business.
Employees are regularly trained on customer focus. The feedback from customer in terms of
quality, delivery, quality complaints etc. are accorded top priority and their cause and preventive
measures are immediately implemented.
Customer Satisfaction is enhanced through regular meeting with customer/representatives and
fulfilling their targets in terms of quality, delivery lead-time and price expectations. Periodically
customer feedback form is sent to ascertain their needs and expectations.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL - MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE AND MARKETING

5.3 QUALITY POLICY


Considering the needs and expectations of customers and our companys business strategy, Top
Management has formulated the quality policy:
The quality policy of the company is defined, documented and made known to all the employees
by way of display at prominent places and emphasizing its intents in regular training at all level.
The policy is regularly reviewed in management review meeting for its continuing suitability and
revised as and when necessary.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
QUALITY POLICY

5.4.1 QUALITY OBJECTIVES


The quality objective is segmented department wise and the measures to evaluate its
achievements are defined. These objectives are periodically reviewed, updated and MR identifies
actions for implementation.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
QUANTIFICATION OF QUALITY OBJECTIVES

5.4.2 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PLANNING


The Management Representative ensures that the quality management system is planned with
defined responsibility and authorities, which is documented in Quality Activities. The system is
planned to meet the requirements of clause 4.1 and quality objectives as defined in clause 5.4.1
of the manual.
The integrity of the QMS is ensured by way of review of the system, when the scope of the
system is enhanced or when new product lines are introduced. Quality Manual and Quality
Activities are reviewed for changes as and when required.
Internal audit results are reviewed and the corrective actions are standardized in the quality
system Documents.
Product configuration changes are reviewed and product related documents are updated as
applicable.
Corrective and preventive actions are reviewed and the changes are standardized in appropriate
documents.
The result of internal and external audit is reviewed and appropriate corrective and preventive
actions are initiated.
5.5.1 Responsibility, Authority and Communication
The organogram chart included in Section 09.0 of this manual shows the relationships between
the respective functions.
All employees are responsible for the quality of their own work and for advising their
responsible Manager or supervisor of any conditions that are adverse to the quality of the work
being produced or adverse to the satisfactory operations of the quality system.
Managers and supervisors are responsible, and have the authority within their defined areas of
control for:

the quality of work carried out

initiating action to prevent the occurrence of nonconformance

identifying and recording quality problems

initiating, recommending and providing solutions to quality problems.

The responsibilities and authorities of the organization chart are described as below:

a)
b)
c)
d)

TOP MANAGEMENT
Responsibility:
Overall business development of the organization
Financial Management of the organization
Recruit executives in Managerial Cadre
Formulate quality policy with objectives for the organization
Overall responsible for implemented quality management system
Authority:
Make key decisions and can supercede decisions taken by others
Approve purchase of capital goods
Approve the formulated quality management system
Final authority in all policies of the company

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)

HOD OPERATIONS
Responsibility:
Maintain Harmonic cultures in the company
Liaison and handling prospective customers
Recruitment of personnel at works
Handling and resolving customer complaints
Execution of work orders in time
Procurement of all material and services required for the organization
Manage supplier development
Overall responsible for processes of the organization
To implement on-line inspection stage wise
To plan production and manpower
Impart regular training at shop floor
To maintain plant and machinery and general house keeping
Co-ordinate with Materials, QC&I and Design department

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Authority:
a) Approve all purchases of material and services
b) Approve recruitment personnel at works
c) Sanction commercial transactions at work
d) Approve the formulated quality management system

a)
b)
c)
d)

SUPERVISOR
Responsibility:
To Inspect, approve, reject all incoming material
To Inspect, approve, reject process activity
For final inspection of the product
Co-ordination with third party for inspection

e) Co-ordination with production dept. for product quality improvement


f) Co-ordination with MR for QMS implementation
Authority:
a) Approve deviation in production processes
b) To prepare dispatch documents
c) Control of material at shop floor
d) Recruit workers required for production activity
5.5.2 MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE
Management Representatives Responsibilities and authorities include:

Preparation, Updating and maintenance of Quality Manual

Issue of Quality Manual. Quality Activities

Implementation of Quality Systems.

Review of document & data control, making current version available, precludes use of
obsolete documents, identifying nature of change.

Control of quality records is means of identification, collection, indexing, disposition and


retention time.

Liaison with external agency for ISO 9001 certification

Conducting the internal quality audit as per schedule, recording non-conformities, and
verification of effectiveness of corrective action against non-conformities.

Conducting the Management Review Meeting and reporting the finding of IQA to Top
Management.

Promoting the awareness of customer requirements throughout the organization.

5.5.3 INTERNAL COMMUNICATION


Internal communication channels are ensured as follows:

Quality Policy: Display, Induction Program & Training

Quality Objectives: Distribution of documents

Customer Feed Back: Meetings, Letters, Emails, Feedback form & proactive actions

Internal Audit, C & P Actions: Management Review Meetings

MR is overall responsible to maintain internal communication channels.

5.6 MANAGEMENT REVIEW


5.6.1 General
Top Management with all HODs will conduct Management Review Meeting once in every six
months or as when required. The purpose of the meeting is to ensure that Quality System meets
or exceeds the requirement of ISO 9001 : 2000 standard. In addition it will assess the Quality
Systems continued suitability with respect to achieving companys Quality Policy and
Objectives and opportunity for improvement in quality management system, quality policy and
quality objectives.
The MR records review inputs in agenda for management review. Review outputs are recorded
in minutes of MRM and communicated to all concerned.

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

5.6.2 Review Input


The input to management review shall include:
Results of internal audit and external audit
Customer feedback and complaints
Routine Operational performance of the organization
Status of corrective and preventive actions taken
Pending actions from previous management reviews
Changes that are required/effected in documentation of QMS
Other general points

5.6.3 Review Output


The review output is recorded by MR and shall include decisions and actions, target date and
responsibility related to:
a) Improvement of effectiveness of quality management system
b) Improvement in processes to meet customer requirements
c) Requirement of resources necessary for effective overall functioning

ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL - MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE

Title: Resource Management

Section: QM 6.0

6.1 PROVISION OF RESOURCES


The Company ensures provision of resources that are needed:

To implement and maintain the quality management system and continually improve its
effectiveness.

To enhance customer satisfaction by meeting customer requirements.

The resource needs are identified through activities such as product planning, internal
audit, management reviews and review of quality objectives.

6.2 HUMAN RESOURCES


6.2.1 General
The Company ensures that personnel performing work affecting product quality are competent
on the basis of appropriate education, training, skills and experience.
6.2.2 Competence, Awareness & Training
Necessary competence needed for performing work affecting product quality are determined by
the MR and HODs and documented.
The personnel are assessed on the basis of determined competence requirements. Gaps, if any,
are assessed and training is provided to personnel to meet the competence need. The training
may be in-house or external classroom training.
The effectiveness of the actions taken in terms of enhancing the competence levels is evaluated.
Employees are made known the requirement of skills and knowledge required relating to the jobs
they handle and how they contribute for attaining quality objectives.
Appropriate records are maintained regarding, education, training, skills & experience
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL - MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE

6.3 INFRASTRUCTURE
Infrastructure needs are assessed on the basis of the resource requirement and business plan.
The infrastructure such as building and amenities for the operators are provided.
Tools & Tackles, Testing Instruments, Testing facilities are provided on the basis of quality plan.
Need for supporting services such as logistics, computer support, etc. are provided.
6.4 WORK ENVIRONMENT

The Company ensures that proper layout, adequate ventilation, lighting, house keeping systems
and safety devices maintain the work environment neatly where appropriate.

Title: Product Realization

Section: QM 7.0

7.1 PLANNING OF PRODUCT REALIZATION


The Company plans the requirement of quality and identifies the controls of the process,
inspection and test methods, measurement needs and standards of acceptability, acquisition of
any controls, equipment, etc.
The quality planning also includes the compatibility of product/process, establishment inspection
and test activities, development of newer measurement methods, identification of inspection and
testing requirement, identification and preparation of quality records.
For each product line, such controls are defined in quality plan and are used as a means of
controlling quality. Quality Plan is prepared for final approval of equipment
7.2 CUSTOMER RELATED PROCESS
7.2.1 Development of requirements related to products
The Company identifies the requirements specified by customer though work order inputs and
application details provided by customer, delivery schedules desired b customers and feedback
on products supplied.
Requirements not specified by customer, who is required for intended use are identified by
Departmental Head.
Statutory and regulatory requirements related to the products are identified through customer
communication
Any additional requirements related to the products are identified based on the organizations
experience in supplying products to similar application
7.2.2 Review of requirements related to the product
The Company ensures to review the requirements related to the product as follows:Product specification/application is reviewed during the order processing and any mismatch or
incompatibility is reported to the customer. Order requirements are reviewed and recorded.
Delivery requirements are reviewed and recorded.
During this review, if any product or order requirements are deviating from those previously
expressed, they are resolved
After review it is ensured that confirmation to customer is established to prove ability to meet
customer requirements.
Where the customer requirements are communicated verbally, the customer requirements are
confirmed in review documents as above, prior to acceptance.
When the product requirements are changed, the amendments are reviewed and the changes are
incorporated on all relevant internal documents.
The document changes are made known and communicated to relevant functions.

7.2.2 Customer Communication


The various communication systems to customers are as follows
Product information: sales executives communicate product configuration and price information.
Order handling, queries and amendment handling are carried out by Marketing Personnel and
communicated to customers.
Customer feed back and complaints are analyzed and communicated to them.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL - MARKETING

7.3 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


EXCLUDED

7.4 PURCHASING
7.4.1 Purchasing Process
The Quality System Activities ensure that products, Raw material & Packaging Material are
purchased form approved sources only
Any new source of product / make shall approve based of evaluation and/or trial production,
which shall access the ability of the source to meet the companys quality and delivery
requirements.
The extent of control on the source of supply is based on the product criticality. This is defined in
product quality plan.
The results of supplier performance in terms of adherence to quality and delivery requirements
are monitored. The data is reviewed by HOD Purchase and Top Management and the supplier are
evaluated once in a year.
Records of evaluation, re-evaluation and ratings are maintained.
7.4.2 Purchasing information
Purchasing specification describes the following data.
Product configuration, code, makes, size and other unique information.
Requirements of approval of product such as test certificates, need for Quality system
Certificates and as per Raw Material Testing Plan
The Company ensures that adequacy of Purchase requirements are reviewed prior to release.

7.4.3 Verification of purchased products


The purchased products are verified by one of the following methods.

Verification of Test Certificates

Product evaluation through a plan of evaluation

Receiving inspection as per receiving inspection plan

Where specified by customer or when required by the company, the verification may be
done at suppliers premises by company or by Customer.

The verification method may include product evaluation, Supplier Quality System Audit.

In such case, purchasing information shall specify the method of verification and sub-sequent
product release.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL PURCHASE

7.5 PRODUCTION AND SERVICE PROVISION


7.5.1 Control of Production and Service Provision
The production activity is carried out under controlled condition.
The information about the product configuration is provided to the Technicians and Engineers
Operations are carried out as per work instruction/ purchase order.
The equipment used for Production and testing is ensured have the requisite capability through
preventive maintenance of equipments.
Technicians and Engineers are provided with necessary Equipments and Instruments.
The monitoring of process and testing is as per Quality Plan.
The products are released to the next stage and delivery after due verification and recording.
7.5.2 Validation of process for production
Production process is validated by way of Inspection and control as per Quality plan.
No Special Process is presently carried out in the company and if any such process is carried out
in future, the records for the same will be maintained.
7.5.3 Identification and Traceability
The constituent parts, products in-process, finished products and packed products ready for
dispatch are identified by means of status boards, displayed besides the product.
The status of products after each verification stage is clearly identified as passed or failed by way
of recording on the Inspection Reports.

Traceability of constituent parts is accomplished by means of unique Batch numbers.


7.5.4 Customer Property
The organization receives drawings and samples from the customer and the same are controlled.

7.5.5 Preservation of Products


The products and constituent parts of the products are preserved appropriately to avoid any
damage or deterioration during storage, handling, packaging and delivery.
Suitable work instructions are issued to the personnel carrying-out these activities.
7.6 CONTROL OF MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES
The selection of the Instruments and test equipments is done in such a way that measurement
uncertainty is known and is consistent with accuracy required.
To control, calibrate and maintain inspection, measuring and test equipment to provide evidence
of conformity of product to specified requirements the procedure for calibration and
Maintenance of Instrument is followed.
It is also ensured that monitoring and measurements are carried out and in a manner that is
consistent with the monitoring and measurement requirements.
For this purpose, list of measuring and test equipment is prepared.
To ensure valid results, measuring equipment is Calibrated at specified intervals, or prior to use,
against measurement standards traceable to international or national measurement standards;
where no such standard exists, the basis used for calibration or verification is recorded.
ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL PRODUCTION & QUALITY CONTROL

Title: Measurement Analysis and


Improvement

Section: QM 8.0

8.1 GENERAL
The Company plans and implements the monitoring, measurement, analysis and improvement
process as follows:

To demonstrate that products produced conform to specification

To ensure that quality management system requirements are conformed

To continually improve the effectiveness of quality management system

In order to measure, analyze and continually improve, methods including statistical


methods are used. The extent of use of statistical method are explained in 8.2.3

8.2 MEASUREMENT AND MONITORING

8.2.1 Customer Satisfaction


In addition to other method, performance of the Quality Management system is also measured by
monitoring the information related to customer perception provided by customers.
8.2.2 Internal Quality Audit
Internal audits are conducted at regular intervals based on a plan. The purpose of such audits is to
ascertain:Whether the planned system as outlined in this manual, Activities and other quality system
Documents as defined in 4.2.1 are complied with and whether the documented system is in
accordance with the requirements of ISO 9001:2000 standards.
Whether the implemented system is effective and maintained
An audit program is planned as follows:

The frequency and duration of an audit is determined based on the volume of activity,
importance of the activity.

The area or department to be audited and

Results of previous audits

8.2.3 Monitoring and Measurement Of Processes


Methods such as graphs, charts, are used to demonstrate that the processes achieve or deviate
from the targets.
When planned results are not achieved, appropriate plans are identified and implemented to
effect correction and corrective actions to ensure conformity of the product.
8.2.4 Monitoring and Measurement of Products
The Company ensures that the products are verified at appropriate stages viz., on receipt, various
production process stages and pre delivery stage. The requirements are verified against the
receiving inspection plan, in-process quality plans and customer purchase order.
Evidence of conformity of the products as defined above is maintained in the form of inspection
reports, test log/test report. These records indicate the persons authorizing product release for the
next stage or delivery to customer.
The deliveries of products are affected only after all quality requirements are completed
satisfactorily.
8.3 CONTROL OF NON-CONFORMING PRODUCT
The Company ensures that products, which do not conform to product requirements, are
Identified and controlled to avoid inadvertent use or delivery. Activity for non-conforming
products describes the controls involved in segregating non-conforming products, quarantine
areas for non-conforming products, the responsibilities and authorities for evaluation,
notification and disposal of non-conforming products.
The methods of dealing with non-conforming products are :-

Required actions such as rework, to eliminate the detected non-conformity

By authorizing use non-conforming products, or release for dispatch or accept under


authorized concessions by the authority as defined 5.5.1, or where applicable, by
customer.

By taking action to scrap after due care that the scrapped products do not find its way to
the original intended use.

8.4 ANALYSIS OF DATA


The Company determines the data to be collected, analyzed to demonstrate suitability and
effectiveness of quality management system and to effect continual improvement.
The various data collected are:

Measurement data

Defect data

Customer feedback data

Analysis of these data shall provide information on :

Level of customer satisfaction

Level of conformity to specification

Trends of product specification compliance, opportunity for improvement

Supplier performance

Tools and techniques such as graphs, charts, brainstorming etc. are used in the analysis of
data

8.5 IMPROVEMENT
8.5.1 Continual Improvement
Continuous improvement in the effectiveness of quality management system is achieved through
the use of :

Well defined Quality policy

Measurable quality Objectives

Audits that identify opportunities for improvement

Analysis of data of product conformance and operational performance, customer


satisfaction and supplier performance

Corrective and preventive actions

Management review

Improvement opportunities are tracked for effective implementation and achievement of


desired results

8.5.2 Corrective Action


The Company takes appropriate action to eliminate the cause of non-conformities in order to
prevent recurrence. The corrective actions will be appropriate to the effects of non-conformities.
Activity for corrective action ensures the following requirements are defined :

The methods followed to review non-conformities and customer complaints

The determination of cause of non-conformities

Develop solutions that are needed to eliminate the recurrence of non-conformity

8.5.3 Preventive Action


The Company takes appropriate action to eliminate the potential cause of non-conformities in
order to prevent occurrence. The preventive actions will be appropriate to the effects of nonconformities.
Activities for preventive action ensures the following requirements are defined :

The determination of potential cause of non-conformities

Recommend actions that are needed to prevent occurrence of non-conformity

Implement the actions identified to prevent occurrence of nonconformity

Records of the results of action taken

Reviewing the preventive actions taken

ACTIVITY REFERENCE:
PROCEDURE MANUAL QUALITY CONTROL & INSPECTION
PROCEDURE MANUAL MANAGEMENT REPRESENTATIVE

You might also like:


Sampling and Testing of packing materials
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down a procedure for sampling and testing of packing materials.

2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist / Q.C Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1

Collect the intact packs of Bottles / ROPP caps / Inner caps or any other primary packing
materials (Annexure-1) from the consignment and transfer to Microbiology laboratory. Carry out
sampling under laminar air flow in MLT area. Seal the containers properly and send it back to
warehouse.

4.2

Prepare 3x100ml of 0.9% of NaCl solution and sterilize by autoclaving ,for sample of each
consignment of packaging material (for small items like caps ,rubber stoppers used for oral
packaging material etc) .

4.3

Open the sample under LAF and submerge 20units in the prepared solution and swirl it for 10
min.

4.4

Transfer the solution in sterile filtration unit & filter the solution with 0.45mm filter membrane of
100ml each.

4.5

Then transfer the filter membrane in sterile SCD agar plate and incubate at 35C for 72 hrs
,for bacteria,
SDA agar plate, for fungi, and incubate at 20-25C for 120 hrs and note the observations, for
pathogens submerge the filter membrane in 100ml of sterile SCD Medium and proceed for the
testing of pathogens as per SOP
Formula : No. of cfu in each unit=Number of cfu observed on filter membrane / 6 (unit)

Limit: Bacteria NMT 5 cfu / unit, Fungi NMT 1 cfu / unit and pathogens nil / unit.
4.6

For vials and bottles used for oral packaging material pour 5 ml of sterile solution into
each of the 15 containers with the help of sterile pipette and thoroughly wet the inner walls and
filter the solution in sterile 0.45mm filter membrane.

4.7

Then pour rinsed solution from 5 vials in each three sterile 0.45mm membrane filter assembly
and filter the solution.

4.8

Then transfer the filter membrane in sterile SCD agar plate and incubate at 35C for 72 hrs ,
(for total bacterial count), SDA agar plate, (for total fungal count) , and incubate at 20-25C for
72 hrs and note the observations ,for pathogens submerge the filter membrane in 100ml of
sterile SCD Medium and proceed for the testing of pathogens as per G.P No.Formula : No. of cfu in each unit =Number of cfu observed on filter membrane / 5 (unit)

4.9

For pathogen testing test for S aureus , Pseudomonas , E. coli and Salmonella as per SOP
No. K/QC/059.

4.10

Limit (for oral packing materials: for bottles or vials): For bacteria: 100 cfu / unit , For
fungi: 10 cfu / unit., pathogens: Nil / unit
4.11

Limit (for injectable packing materials, Like vials, rubber-stoppers etc ): For

bacteria.
NMT 10 cfu / unit , For fungi. <1 cfu / unit , pathogens: Nil / unit
4.11

Foils( Aluminum, PVC / PVDC Films)- Cut (three replicates) inner 20 x 20 cm with sterile
tools and use contact plate (RODAC plate) for sampling
Formula :No. of cfu in 100cm2 =Sum of the number of cfu observed on three RODAC
plates/ 3x 19
Limit: 50 cfu / 100cm2 (for bacteria).
5 cfu / 100cm2 (for fungi). And nil pathogen.

4.12

Note the observations in the format given in annexure-II.


5.0

ABBREVIATIONS :

cfu Colony forming unit


C Degree centigrade
6.0

ANNEXURES : Annexure Iand II

ANNEXURE 1
Rubber plugs, Caps 20 Nos.
Up to 20ml Bottle- 15 Nos.
30 , 50 , 60 & 100 ml Bottle 12 Nos.
125 ml Bottle 9 Nos.
170 , 250 , 375 ml Bottle 6 Nos.
Vials 20 Nos.
Frequency of testing For every export batches OR as per requirement.
ANNEXURE II

FORMAT FOR TESTING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS


SAMPLE

CONSIGNMENT No./DATE

SAMPLE TY./AREA

SAMPLED BY

MEDIA PREPERATIONS:
MEDIA NAME

MEDIA BATCH NO.

STERILI. CYCLE MEDIA LOT


NO.

0.1%Buffered NaCl- soln.


Soyabean Casein Digest Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Medium used for submerging the sample: 0.9%Buffered NaCl- solution.
TOTAL AEROBIC MICROBIAL COUNT:
LIMIT :

Bacteria:

Cfu per Bottle

Fung Cfu per Bottle

PREPAR

TEST MEDIUM PLATES:

For Bacteria

No. of plates used

Medium used

For Fungi

SCDA

SDA

Observation Of Microbial Count


Days
Dil.

SCDA( for bacteria at 30-35C)


+ve

-ve

control

control

SDA( for fungi at 20-25C)

Cfu / plate

+ve

-ve control

Cfu / plate

control

Ist day
2nd day
3rd day
4th day
5th day

Calculation:
(B)

TEST FOR PATHOGEN


MEDIA PREPERATIONS:
MEDIA NAME

MEDIA BATCH
NO.

STERILIZATION CYCLE MEDIA

PREPARED ON

LOT NO.

Cetrimide broth Media


Mac koncy broth
Tetrathionate broth

MEDIA NAME

MEDIA B. NO.

Preparation of media by boiling

STERILIZATION CYCLE MEDIA

PREPARED ON

LOT NO.
Cetrimide agar
Brilliant Green Agar
Xylose Lysine Deoxy. agar
Mac koncy Agar

LIMIT Must be absent


Organism to be

Primary test

Secondary test

Inference

tested
S.aureus
Pseudomonas
E. coli
Salmonella
TBC=

cfu/unit , TFC=

cfu/unit , Pathogens =

INFERENCE: The above sample complies / does not complies the test.
You might also like:
Sampling, testing and release of raw materials
Dispensing of packing materials
Re-testing of raw materials and intermediates
SAMPLING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:20 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Operation of colony counter
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down a procedure for operation of colony counter.

2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist / Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Head - Quality Control

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

Ensure that the instrument is clean & free from dust.

4.2

Ensure that the magnifying lens is fixed on its stand.

4.3

Ensure that the marker is connected to either right or left side of the instrument.

4.4

Switch on the mains.

4.5

Switch on the power button. The internal light will be flashed ON and the digital screen will
show 0000 figure in red. Again pressing this button will turn the power. OFF.

4.6

Now press the plate containing colonies to be counted.

4.7

Now, mark each and every colony one after the other by pressing the tip of the marker.

4.8

The number of colonies will automatically get displayed on the screen can be reset to 0000 by
pressing the RESET button.

4.9

The counting can be done manually by pressing the MANUAL button.

4.10

Switch OFF the instrument and put under cover when not required.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: For Display Near The Colony Counter

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

You might also like:


Operation of compound microscope
Sampling and Testing of packing materials
Preparation of Microbial Plates
Disposing of microbiological culture media

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:13 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Operation of compound microscope
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down a procedure for operation of compound microscope.

2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist / Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Head Quality Control

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1 Keep the microscope on the clean and stable platform.


4.2 Switch on the main switch of microscope so that bulb will glow.
4.3 Adjust the low power objective, by rotating the revolving nose piece in position.
4.4 Adjust the focus of light with the help of condenser.

4.5 Now place the objective ( high power / oil immersion whichever is required) in position by
moving the resolving nose piece.
4.6

Place the slides on the stage, set the objective at the closest position w.r.t slide then slowly lift
the objective with coarse adjusting screw, while observing through the eye piece, till the field
appears clearly ( if the oil immersion objective is in use, place on drop of immersion oil on the
slide before placing it on the stage and then lower the objective just to touch the oil drop.

4.7

Make the field clearer with the help of fine adjustment and then observe the slide.

4.8

Slide can be moved in left, upper and lower direction to observe the complete smear area with
help of slide stage screw and coarse adjustment.

4.9

After completion of observation, remove the slide, clean the objective lens and condenser with
cotton soaked in xylene. Bring the 10x objective in the active position. Lower down the
condenser and place low power objective in position.
4.10

Do not allow the oil to harden on the lens.

5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: For Display Near The Microscope

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

You might also like:

Operation of colony counter

Preparation of Microbial Plates


Sampling and Testing of packing materials
Disposing of microbiological culture media
Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiological Analysis

1.0

OBJECTIVE: To lay down a procedure for handling of out of specification (OOS) result in
Microbiological analysis and monitoring.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Control Executive/ Microbiologist

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
In all the reports the identified reason shall be written on a continuation sheet to the annexure
provided. A copy of the above investigation report shall be maintained with the batch
manufacturing records concerned to increase awareness and for any future reference
4.1

4.1.1

STERILITY TEST

If evidence of microbial growth is found, the product to be examined does not comply with
thetest for sterility, unless it can be clearly demonstrated that the test was invalid for causes
unrelated to the product to be examined .The test may be considered invalid only when one or
more of the following conditions are fulfilled:

4.1.1.1The data of the microbiological monitoring of the sterility testing facility shows fault;
4.1.1.2 A review of the testing procedure used during the test in question reveals a fault;
4.1.1.3 Microbial growth is found in the negative controls;
4.1.1.4 After determination of the identity of the microorganisms isolated from the test, the
growth of this species or these species may be ascribed unequivocally to faults with respect to
the material and / or the technique used in conducting the sterility test procedure.
4.1.2 If the test is declared to be invalid it is repeated with the same number of units as in the original
test.

4.1.3 If no evidence of microbial growth is found in the repeat test the product examined complies with
the test for sterility. If microbial growth is found in the repeat test the product examined does not
comply with the test for sterility.
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
4.2.1 If the microbial counts are found to be more than or equal to the alert limit then
open a deviation report (annexure I) through Q.C. Head to the concerned Production head.
Production personnel shall check the working discipline, supply of air, safety measures etc.
4.2.2

If the count exceeds or reaches the action limit then the urgent notification to the Production
head and Engineering Head through Q.C. Head shall be followed by an investigation for the
same.
- Supply of air
- Working discipline
-

Review of data from the same place and others from the incubated plates

If any of the plates does not indicate the same then no action is necessary.

If any of the plates indicates more count then perform additional cleaning, disinfection or
fumigation and retraining to the operator shall be given.

All activities shall be recorded as per the annexure attached with this SOP.

More number of samplings (i.e. double the original) shall be preformed at the same location
where the counts observed were beyond or equivalent to the action limit but an additional
relevant parameter of monitoring shall also be performed which shall be incorporated with the
same annexure.

All the batches manufactured during the said period shall be subjected to the microbial
analysis for MLT / Sterility &BET in order to ensure that the batches manufactured are in
accordance with the relevant finished product specifications. The investigation report shall be
submitted to the Q.C. - Head

4.2.3

If the bio-burden is found out of specified limit in the core areas the identification of the
organism shall be performed.

4.2.4

Stop the production immediately and check all the possible parameters, which can affect bioburden of the area.

4.2.5

Check the pressure differential of the area, which must be within the specified limit.

4.2.6

Check the air velocity of LAF /HEPA filters, which must be within the specified limit.

4.3

If the investigation / review of manufacturing activities (e.g. sterilization process, aseptic


filtration, environmental conditions, personnel practices) indicates failure of manufacturing
activities, then the batch shall be considered as failed to comply sterility.

4.4

MICROBIOLOGICAL AND BET EXAMINATION OF WATER


If only the alert is exceeded without finding an undesirable microorganism the release of the
preparation for which this water has been used, has to be taken under hold till the result comes.
In case of the counts touching the action limit then all the batches manufactured shall be re
analyzed by taking 25 grams and making the allowance for the larger size specimen for the
analysis.
In the case of counts crossing or touching the alert limit or action limit in any type of water the
same will be intimated to the production department and maintenance department. If the result
cannot be attributed to the analytical error, sampling error, contamination in the container
sampled then the microorganism detected must be identified / differentiated by taking sample
from all other points.

4.4.1

Adequate sanitization of the system shall be ensured to eliminate the source of contamination
with a rigorous check for the same.

4.4.2

All the investigations made shall be recorded in the annexure III provided with this SOP.

4.5

MICROBIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION OF RAW MATERIAL / FINISHED PRODUCT

4.5.1

The first action is to intimate the Q.C. Head.

4.5.2

Retest the same material/product but with a sample size of 25 grams by making allowance for
the larger size specimen.

4.5.3

Results for the same shall be intimated to the Q.A. Head for final decision.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURE I
FORMAT FORDEVIATION REPORT TO PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT

(Deviation Report About the environmental monitoring)


REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.

: 00

Effective Date:

Sampling point where deviation occurred:


Name of the Product

Date:

Batch no.:

Deviation :

Parameter:

Requirement :
Results :

Page No.: 1 of 1

Signature :

Corrective action in Production Department:


Cleaning, Disinfection, Change of disinfectant, Checking of LAF unit parameters
Checking of HVAC system, Education to Operators, Repair/Maintenance Work (Cross
whichever is not applicable and specify actions taken).
Maintenance

Repair

Comments

..
Name

Signature

Date:

Repeated Sampling :

Parameter:
Result:
Comments

by

Q.C.

Head

for

Approval

of

Production

Signature :

ANNEXURE - II
Format for Corrective Report After Sampling of Environmental Parameters in Production

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.

: 00

Effective Date:

Page No.: 1 of 1

Date :

Deviation :

Date of repeated deviation :


Corrective Measures in Microbiological Lab
Checking of condition s of LAF unit during working , Checking of equipment
Growth promotion test for the media used.
Done By :

Checked

By :

Results of Microbiological Impurity of Finished Product :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

Comments of Quality of Quality of Control - Head :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

Comments of Quality Assurance - Head :


Name :

Date :

Signature :

ANNEXURE III
INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR FAILURE IN TEST FOR BACTERIAL ENDOTOXIN & M.L.T

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.

: 00

Effective Date:

Page No.: 1 of 1

Sample
Analyzed on

Analysed By

Checked By

Preparation parameters for


Sampling container

Procedure of sampling

GP test of media

Any testing error


BET
Micro tips

Test tubes

Pipette

LAL reagent
Batch No.

Mfg.

Expiry

Reconstituted

on

.LAL Reagent water


Batch No.

Expiry

Blank

Parameters of depyrogenation/sterilization apparatus:


Validation Status

Calibration Status

Results of other samples with same conditions tested on the same day.
Details of Raw material used in finished product
Result
Test repeated
Date

Result

Microbiologist
ACTION TAKEN :
Production Head
Control Head
CONCLUSION
(Results of MLT for Other Samples to be enclosed)

Engineering Head

Quality

Microbiologist

QC

Manager
Date:

Date:

Remarks from Q.C. Head


Name:

Sign

Date :

You might also like:


Disposing of microbiological culture media
Out of Specification Procedure
Reprocessing of Out of Specification Batch
OUT OF SPECIFICATION INVESTIGATION FORM

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 1:06 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Media Fill operation in the sterile dry powder filling
1.0

OBJECTIVE: To lay down a procedure for Media Fill operation in the sterile dry powder Filling
facility..
2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist, Operator concerned/Production officer/QA Officer

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager/ Production Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE

PRE-START UP:
4.0

Ensure that all the equipments, HVAC system, water system and other utility services of the
facility are validated.

4.1

Ensure that the Gamma irradiation certification report of the lactose + SCDM (Soyabean
Casein Digest) mixture (3:1) from BARC and sterility test report (done in-house) is available.

4.2

Ensure that solubility test report and growth promotion/inhibition test report of sterile
lactose+SCDM mixture is available. [Solubility should be NLT 1gm/10 ml of WFI].

4.3

Ensure that solubility test report and growth promotion/inhibition test report of sterile
lactose+SCDM mixture is available. [Solubility should be NLT 1gm/10 ml of WFI].

4.4

Ensure that freshly distilled WFI to be used for filling, is autoclaved and the sample given for
sterility test.

4.5

Ensure that all the contact parts of Dry Powder Filling machine are duly cleaned and
sterilized or sanitized.

4.6

Ensure that the last Environmental Control Reports of the area are conforming to the
acceptance standard.

4.7

Ensure that the Liquid Filling machine is done inside the sterile filling area on the previous day
after autoclaving /sanitization.

4.8 Ensure by manometer readings, that the pressure balancing of the sterile area is as per
requirement.
4.9

Ensure that the cleaning, sanitization and fumigation of the area is done on the previous day.
START UP

4.9

Enter the sterile area as per SOP using gowns sterilized 4days back.

4.10

Check the cleanliness of the sterile area.

4.11

Check the cleanliness of the Liquid Filling machine.

4.12

Check and confirm the temperature and RH of liquid filling room is as per the requirement.
4.13

Assemble the Liquid Filling machine.Ensure that that filling of liquid and liquid can be done
simultaneously.
4.14

Measure the nonviable particulate count of filling cabinet and filling room.

OPERATION
4.15 Bring the autoclaved WFI container near the liquid filling assembly.
4.16 Transfer sterile SCDM liquid from the container in to liquid hopper.
4.17 Transfer sterile dried rubber stoppers (sterilized 4 days back) in to the hopper of stoppering unit.
Send sample for sterility testing simultaneously.
4.18

Put the inlet suction tube of Liquid Filling Assembly into the WFI container.

4.19

Set the Liquid Filling machine for the respective dose.


4.20 Remove the Liquid Filling Assembly and all the contact parts. Disinfect it, clean it and get it
sterilized/sanitised.

4.21

Ensure that all the left over rubber stoppers are given outside the sterile area for destruction.

4.22

Shut down the vial liquid-filling machine as per SOP


CLEANING:
4.23 Ensure that all the tools and accessories containers etc. used during media fill are given for
cleaning/sanitization/sterilization.

4.24

Follow the cleaning and sanitization SOP for cleaning of sterile area.
4.25

Do the extra cleaning and sanitization of the floor/walls/machine after media fillrun with 10%
Bacillocide and Lysol solution

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:
4.26

Initial validation: During initial validation, it should qualify all three consecutive media fill run i.e.
during each run there should not be growth in more than two vials.

4.27

Revalidation: Only one media fill run in which there should not be any growth in more than two
vials.

ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA FOR PERSONNEL PERFORMING MEDIA FILL RUN :


4.28

Persons involved in media fill should be medically examined and declared fit within last one year.

4.29 Persons should be trained on general hygiene and current gowning procedure, and the present
health condition should be O.K.
4.30

The personnel should be microbiologically monitored during run.


NOTES
In case of any positive growth in any vial during the incubation period.\

4.31

It should be isolated and identified to the genus level.


4.32

If the isolated organism is other than the house flora, thorough investigation shall be carried out
by Quality Assurance and Production.

4.33

The source of the contamination must be established.


In case of any failure in media fill run:
4.34

When there is no assignable cause, media fill shall be repeated three times and production
should commence only after all the three runs meet the acceptance criteria.

4.35

When there is assignable cause, after rectification of the cause, repeat the media fill run
once.

4.36

Before and during media fill run no special cleaning shall be carried out.
4.37

Normal production can resume only after minimum one day of environmental monitoring
compliance report.

4.38

Batches filled before the final result of the media fill run shall not be released to the market till the
media fill run passes in case of initial validation.

4.39 The routine environmental monitoring plates shall be kept for 14 days (in case of any growth) to
help in investigation of any positive growth in the media filled vials.
4.40 If for any reason the media fill run is considered invalid vials shall not be incubated.
4.41 Media fill runs can be aborted for the same reason that a product lot would be aborted. All
media filled units filled before an incident that would cause an aborted fill must be incubated.
4.42 During media fill all the Operators, Officers& Maintenance staff who are authorized to do the
sterile filling, supervision and maintenance must be involved in media fill trial.

4.43

The volume of liquid filled must be sufficient to wet all surfaces including the closure and

to facilitate inspection.
4.44

The line must be run at a slower speed than normal production run to give greater

exposure time.
4.45 Total duration of the routine media fill must be the same or more as the longest process
conducted on that line.
4.45

The incubation temperature of the filled containers must be sufficient to promote

microbial growth at 30-35oC. for 336hrs(stored upright) followed by 20-25oC. for 336 hrs.
(stored upside down).
4.47

Personnel that conduct the inspection of incubated media fills must have training on
basic microbiological concepts ,concepts of media fill and examples of contaminated container
showing various stages of growth.
POST MEDIA FILL RUN :

4.48
4.49

Filled incubated vials should be optically checked by microbiologist and certified.


Incubate the vial samples with no growth approximate 5 vials for 14 days with normal house flora
and 5 vials with organisms used for the sterility test growth promotion for 14 days.

4.5

Temp. range for incubation 1st two week at30 to 35o C. (vials stored upright).

4.51

Next two week at 20 to 25o C. (vials stored upside down).

4.52

These vials should show promotion of growth.


ANNEXURE - I

LIST OF PERMITTED INTERVENTIONS DURING FILLING


These are the activities which are performed during normal working in the sterile filling area:
1)

Adjustment of weight in the dosing wheel.

2)

Adjustment of Stopper holding spring.

3)

Transfer of liquid from container to hopper.

4)

Transfer of stoppers from bag to hopper.

5)

Picking unstoppered vials from the outfeed back to conveyor for stoppering.

6)

Adjustment of separator.

7)

Picking up of fallen vials from turn table.

8)

Cleaning of machine with vacuum cleaner.

9)

Adjustment of stoppering channel height.

10)

Adjustment of stoppering pressure rollers.

11)

Replacing of a piston from the wheel.

12)

Adjustment of turn table over load sensor.

13)

Lifting and closing of the LAF cabinet door.

14)

Checking the weight in balance.

15)

Adjustment of dosing air.

16)

Cleaning of vacuum pot.

17)

Pushing stopper in the channel by forceps.

18)

Power interruption (samples should be marked)

19)

Number of personnel in sterile filling area (8 persons).

20)

Multiple dosing of the liquid.

21)

Running the machine at a slower speed than actual production run.

22)

Covering the working shift usually 12 hours and shift Change over

23)

Entry of maintenance person for repairing of M/C

ANNEXURE - III

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR MEDIA FILL SIMULATION


MAXIMUM
NO.OF
REJECTED
VIALS

PERCENTAGE

BATCH SIZES

OF FAILURE

ACCEPTABLE
AT 95%
CONFIDENCE
LEVEL
5000

10000

20000

50000

100000

INFINITY

2469

2668

2808

2912

2951

2995

3676

4047

4339

4575

4670

4747

4684

5207

5670

6044

6207

6294*

24698

26686

29944

46093

47047

47047

62911

62911

* Normal media fill run size


You might also like:

Disposing of microbiological culture media


Operation of colony counter
Operation of compound microscope
Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiological Analysis
Disposing of microbiological culture media
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down a procedure for disposing of microbiological culture media.

2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist /Q. C Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

INTRODUCTION:

4.1.1 Bacteriological culture media contains all the nutritive sources which favors rapid growth of
different types of Micro-organisms. Some selective medias are used for cultivating specific type
of Pathogenic

organisms. The micro-organisms grown either

on enriched or selective

medias if not disposed or destroyed in proper way can cause contamination of the
environment which in turns is very hazardous.
4.2
4.2.1

METHOD:
Collect all the used semi solid medias in plastic bag containing about 50 ml of 2.5% Savlon
solution and close the opening tightly with a tag or rubber-band and transfer the it to the
incinerator.

4.2.2

For liquid media add 2.5% disinfectant (savlon), to the liquid media ,mix it well ,hold for half an
hour and then discard them in a stream of running tap water.

4.2.3

The plates & test tubes are then thoroughly washed with soap water and sterilized by
autoclaving.
4.3

PROCEDURE FOR CLEANING OF GLASS-WARES


4.3.1 INTRODUCTION

Proper cleaning of glasswares used in microbiology laboratory is very important in


microbiological work. If the equipments used in microbiology are not cleaned properly, due to
contamination, the microbiological results may get affected; also it can cause danger to the
persons handling the equipment and risk of infection due to potential hazards of pathogenic
cultures.
GMP require the standard procedure for glassware cleaning used in microbiological
work. This procedure provides Guidelines for proper cleaning of glassware in micro
section.
4.3.2

METHOD FOR CLEANING

4.3.2.1Keep all the glasswares used in microbiology in the cupboard of the tables used by the
Microbiologists to work.

4.3.2.2Do not use these glass wares in chemical


testing.
4.3.2.3Rinse all the glass wares with tap water two to three times.

4.3.2.4Dip all the glass wares in 2% v/v solution (prepared in D.M water)of teepol or liquid soap for at
least 4 hours, for depyrogenation dip it into 2.5% NaOH solution.
4.3.2.5Remove the glass wares from the solution.
4.3.2.6Rinse twice with D.M water followed by rinsing once with W.F.I
4.4

ABBREVIATIONS

W.F.I= Water For Injection, NaOH= Sodium hydroxide, %=Percentage, v/v =Volume by volume
D.M water= De mineralized water
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period
7.0

--

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

You might also like:

CULTURE MEDIA PREPARATION FOR MICROBIAL TEST


Out of specification (OOS) result in Microbiological Analysis
Media Fill operation in the sterile dry powder filling
Preparation of Microbial Plates
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 11:50 AM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Wednesday, December 15, 2010


Preparation of Microbial Plates
1.0

OBJECTIVE: The objective of this SOP is: to lay down a procedure for preparation of plates
that can be used as settling plates and in various microbiological analysis.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
The Microbiologist shall be responsible for preparation of settle plates, their pre-incubation and
related documentation.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY:
Executive - Quality Control

4.0
4.1
i)

PROCEDURE:

Media with the content of agar can be used for the preparation of settle plates like.
Soyabean Casein Digest Agar (SCDA) - For enumerating Bacteria and Fungi (required for
Environmental monitoring and Microbial limit tests.)

ii)

Sabarauds Dextrose Agar (SDA) For estimation of fungi.( Required for Microbial limit
tests. )

4.2

Prepare media as per SOP.

4.3

Follow the gowning procedure and enter the M.L.T Room by following SOP.

4.4

Clean the LAF with 70% I.P.A and wait till drying.

4.5

Switch on LAF and UV lamp 15 min. before pouring the plates.

4.6

Open the containers containing sterile petri-dishes (That are previously sterilized by
Autoclaving) and place on the working surface table of L.A.F.

4.7

Open the containers containing sterile petri-dishes and place them on the working table of
LAF.

4.8

Take out the cotton plug of conical flask containing agar medium.

4.9

Sterilize the mouth of the conical flask by flaming it and start pouring about 20-25 ml of
medium to each petri-dish quickly .

4.10

Cover the plates and keep under LAF, till they are solidified.

4.11

After getting solidified, preincubate the plates to the incubator at 30-35C for 48 hrs to check
any accidental contamination.

4.12

Check each and every plate under colony counter before exposure to the environment for
monitoring.

4.13
5.0

Record the activity in Media preparation record.


TRAINING :
Trainer
Trainees

-- Executive Quality Assurance


-- Microbiologists

Period
6.0

-- One day

DISTRIBUTION:
Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: Microbiology Department

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

You might also like:

Available Guidance and Best Practices for Conducting Forced Degradation


Studies

Forced degradation or stress testing is undertaken to demonstrate specificity when


developing stability-indicating methods, particularly when little information is available
about potential degradation products. These studies also provide information about the
degradation pathways and degradation products that could form during storage. Forced
degradation studies may help facilitate pharmaceutical development as well in areas
such as formulation development, manufacturing, and packaging, in which knowledge of
chemical behavior can be used to improve a drug product.
The available regulatory guidance provides useful definitions and general comments
about degradation studies. However, guidance concerning the scope, timing, and best
practices for degradation studies is very general. Various issues related to stress testing
are addressed in numerous guidance documents but not always in the context of stress
testing. For example, the available guidance discusses issues such as stereo chemical
stability, degradation product identification thresholds, polymorphism and crystal forms,
stability of (parenteral) combination products, and mass balance but does not address
these issues in the context of degradation studies.
The FDA and International Conference on Harmonization (ICH) guidance provides very
little information about strategies and principles for conducting forced degradation
studies, including problems of poorly soluble drugs and exceptionally stable
compounds. In particular, the issue of how much stress is adequate in stress testing is
not addressed specifically. Overstressing a molecule can lead to degradation profiles
that are not representative of real storage conditions and perhaps not relevant to
method development. Therefore, stress-testing conditions should be realistic and not
excessive. In this regard, it is the amount of stress that is important and not necessarily
the extent of degradation. Indeed, some compounds may not degrade significantly after
considerable exposure to stress conditions. Also somewhat unclear is what should be
done at each development phase from both a regulatory and a scientific perspective.
Although FDA does not require degradation studies for an investigational new drug
(IND) application, prelimi-nary degradation studies are useful for the development of the
stability-indicating methods that will be used during the clinical trials.

This article provides a practical interpretation and summary of the available guidance
and some suggestions for best practices for conducting forced degradation studies.
Overview of regulatory guidance
According to the available guidance, forced degradation studies are carried out for the
following reasons:
Development and validation of stability-indicating methodology
Determination of degradation pathways of drug substances and drug products
Discernment of degradation products in formulations that are related to drug
substances versus those that are related to nondrug substances (e.g., excipients)
Structure elucidation of degradation products
Determination of the intrinsic stability of a drug substance molecule Degradation
studies have several defining characteristics. They are carried out in solution and/or the
solid state
Involve conditions more severe than accelerated testing (e.g., _40 0C; 75% relative
humidity; in excess of ICH light conditions; high and low pH, oxidation, etc.)
Are typically carried out on one batch of material
Include conditions that analyze thermolytic, hydrolytic, oxidative, and photolytic
degradation mechanisms in the drug substance and drug product (as appropriate)
are not part of the formal stability program.
Summary of requirements at the IND phase
Although the reporting of degradation studies is not required in IND applications,
preliminary studies may be carried out to facilitate the development of stability-indicating
methodology. Studies can be conducted on the drug substance and developmental
formulations to test for degradation by thermolysis, hydrolysis, oxidation, and photolysis
or to evaluate the potential chemical behavior of the active ingredient.
A draft guidance document suggests that results of one-time stress studies should be
included in Phase 3 applications for INDs.
Summary of requirements for marketing application

Completed studies of the degradation of the drug substance and drug product are
required at the new drug application (NDA) stage, including isolation and/or
characterization of significant degradation products and a full written account of the
degradation studies performed.
Drug substance-For degradation studies of a drug substance, FDA requests the
following at the time of registration:
stressing the drug substance in solution or suspension at acidic and alkaline pH and
under oxidation conditions
stressing the solid bulk drug substance at temperature and temperaturehumidity
conditions in excess of accelerated conditions
stressing the drug substance photolytically in the solid state and/or in solution in
excess of ICH conditions
demonstration of the specificity of stability-indicating methods with forced-degraded
samples or with the drug substance spiked with appropriate markers
isolation and/or full characterization (by means of NMR, mass spectrometry [MS], UV
analysis, etc.) of all significant degradation products if possible. Procedures for the
preparation and/or isolation (where applicable) and structure determination of the
degradation products should be reported. Unsuccessful attempts to identify significant
degradation products should also be documented
the chemical and physical properties of degradation products, if available
The mechanism and kinetics of formation of each degradation product, if available.
The

guidance

says

to

determine

reaction

kinetics

if

practicable,

thereby

acknowledging the difficulty in cases in which the mechanism may be complex (e.g.,
autoxidation).
Other issues that may be investigated but are not explicitly requested for degradation
studies are the physical and chemical stability of important crystal forms, mass balance,
and the formation of stereoisomers.
Drug product-The guidance specifies the following for degradation studies of the drug
product at the time of registration:

challenge methods intended for monitoring the stability of the drug product with the
degraded samples or with the drug substance spiked with a mixture of known
degradation products
isolation and characterization of significant degradation products, if possible. The
identity and chemical structure, procedure for isolation and purification, mechanism of
formation (including order of reaction), and chemical and physical
properties should be reported, if available. These degradation products include any drug
substancerelated compounds such as drug substance degradation products, drug
substanceexcipient degradation products, drug substance extractive degradation
products, and so forth.
distinction between degradation products that are related to drug substances and
those related to nondrug substances
photolysis of the drug product in excess of ICH light conditions
Information requested in the submission. The available guidance explicitly requests
the following in the NDA documentation:
for degradation products: identity and structure; procedure for isolation (where
applicable) and characterization; mechanism of formation, including order of reaction;
and physical and chemical properties
information about stress testing of the drug substance and drug product (the guidance
does not state specifically what information is required).
At the time of this writing (May 2001), more-specific guidance for the reporting of stress
testing was found in FDA draft guidance documents dealing with stability and method
validation. According to these documents, the applicant should provide
degradation pathways of the drug substance, alone and in the drug product
a discussion of the possible formation of polymorphic and enantiomeric substances;
the possible formation of any stereoisomers is implied
data showing that neither the freshly prepared nor the degraded placebo interferes
with the quantitation of the active ingredient
data from stress studies of the drug substance and drug product demonstrating the
specificity of the assay and analytical procedures for degradation products. These data

may take the form of representative instrument output (e.g., chromatograms) and/or
degradation information obtained from stress studies (e.g., results of peak purity
experiments performed on degraded samples).
Experimental approach
The experimental protocol for degradation studies of new drug substances and drug
products ideally will result in samples that either have been degraded 10% or have been
exposed to an amount of energy that slightly exceeds that supplied under accelerated
storage conditions (e.g., 400C for 6 months).
Forced degradation studies should be conducted whenever a stability-indicating method
is required. Studies may need to be repeated as methods, processes, or formulations
change. Alternatively, methods can be developed with a mixture of the known
degradation products, if available. Forced degradation studies should be performed on
each unique formulation before formal stability studies begin.

Table I shows a general outline for degradation studies of new drug substances and
drug products that was endorsed at the workshop. Sufficient exposure of a drug
substance or drug product is achieved when the drug substance has degraded 10%
from its initial amount or after an exposure in excess of the energy provided by
accelerated storage (e.g., 400C for 6 months), whichever comes first. Application of this
rule of thumb may result in no degradation in some cases. The goal is to generate

degradation in profile that mimics what would be observed in formal stability studies
under ICH conditions.
The duration of storage required at a given temperature can be estimated by making
conservative kinetic assumptions. The energy of activation, Ea, represents the
quantitative relationship between reaction rate and temperature. The range of activation
energies for most drug substances is 1224 kcal/mole with an average of about 1920
kcal/mole.
Assuming activation energy of 12 kcal/ mole affords nearly a doubling of the reaction
rate for every 100C increase in temperature. (Recognize that this is a conservative
estimate and that activation energy of 20 kcal/mole affords about a 2.5- to 3-fold
increase in reaction rate for every 10 0C increase in temperature.) With this relationship,
one can calculate the amount of time a sample should be stored at a specified
temperature to achieve the energy equivalent of exposure at accelerated stability
conditions (e.g., 400C for 6 months). A sample of bulk drug substance stored at 80 0C
would be stored for 12 days. Thus, for a compound that degrades with Ea -12
kcal/mole, storage at 800C for 12 days is kinetically equivalent to storage at 40 _C for 6
months.
Suggested equipment and exposure levels for photo stability stress testing are
described in ICH and FDA guidance. Light storage should be in sufficient excess of ICH
light conditions. The guidance states that solution-phase degradation studies of a drug
substance can be carried out in solution or in suspension. The use of inert organic
cosolvents may be indicated in cases in which drug substances are extremely insoluble
but recognize the potential of any organic co solvent to react with the drug substance
under a given set of stress conditions.
For drug products, nondrug substance related peaks should be distinguished from
drug substance related compounds. This process can be accomplished through
comparative analysis of stressed samples of drug substance alone, of drug substance
plus excipients, and of excipients alone. Stressing drug substance and/or excipient
blends instead of final dosage forms may be adequate for the determination of
degradation pathways of a drug product. However, there may be significant differences
in degradation profiles observed between blends and actual drug products.

Consideration also should be given to the possibility of a reaction between the drug
substance and components of a film-coating or capsule shell. For combination
parenteral or aerosol products, the guidance recommends an investigation of the
chemical compatibility or stability of multiple actives that will be combined before
administration. By extension, any combination product should be stressed to examine
for drugdrug interactions potentially manifested by accelerated degradation and/or new
degradation pathways and products. Early investigation can facilitate development of an
optimum formulation as well as stability-indicating methodology. Consideration may be
given

to

stereochemical

stability,

mass

balance,

and

crystal-form

stability.

Stereoisomers should be treated like any other potential degradation product. Failure to
observe an increase in stereoisomers during forced degradation studies may be
sufficient justification to eliminate testing for stereoisomers during stability studies.
Investigation of the mass balance in degraded samples can reveal the adequacy of the
analytical methods to examine for degradation products. Assessing mass balance is the
process of adding the assay value and levels of degradation products to see how
closely these add to 100% of the initial value, with due consideration of the margin of
analytical error. In cases in which substantial mass loss is observed, efforts to account
for the missing mass should be made such as consideration of response factors or the
formation of highly retained or volatile degradation products. FDA recognizes that mass
balance may not be obtained in all cases and instead emphasizes the thoroughness of
the investigation to determine the specificity of the assay and the pathways of
degradation. The chemical and physical stability of crystal forms, if relevant, should be
investigated. This analysis could include evaluation of stressed solid-state samples for
changes in crystallinity or crystal form.
Method specificity for the active ingredient can be established by peak purity
experiments using hyphenated techniques such as liquid chromatography (LC)MS,
LCUV (photodiode array detection), and LCNMR or orthogonal methods. If needed,
degradation product structure elucidation can be accomplished with hyphenated
techniques (e.g., LCMS, LCUV, and LCNMR) or by synthesis and/or isolation.
Structure elucidation may be postponed until the drug demonstrates safety and efficacy.

A decision to isolate and/or characterize a degradation product should be based


primarily on results obtained from formal stability studies of the drug substance and
drug product whenever possible. The guidance provides the identification thresholds for
degradation products in drug substances and drug products found in formal stability
studies.
Summary
Forced degradation studies of new drug substances and drug products are essential to
help develop and demonstrate specificity of stability-indicating methods and to
determine the degradation pathways and degradation products of the active ingredients.
They also can be useful in the investigation of the chemical and physical stability of
crystal forms, the stereochemical stability of the drug substance alone and in the drug
product and mass-balance issues, and for differentiating drug substancerelated
degradation products in formulations. Procedures for the preparation of specific
degradation products needed for method validation often emerge from these studies.
Knowledge gained from these studies can be used to guide formulation development
and improve manufacturing and packaging processes.
For marketing applications, current FDA and ICH guidance recommends inclusion of the
results, including chromatograms of stressed samples, demonstration of the stabilityindicating nature of the analytical procedures, and the degradation pathways of the drug
substance in solution, solid state, and drug product. The structures of significant
degradation products and the associated procedures for their isolation and/or
characterization also are expected to be included in the filing. The experimental protocol
for degradation studies will depend on the active ingredients and formulation involved
because the chemistry of each compound is different. A target of the lesser of 10%
degradation of the active ingredient or exposure to energy in slight excess of
accelerated storage is recommended. A compound may not necessarily degrade under
a given stress condition. No further stressing is advised in these cases.
References

1. FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Stability Testing of New Drug


Substances and Products, Federal Register 59 (183), 4875348759 (22 September
1994) (ICH Q1A).
2. FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Draft Revised Guidance on Q1A(R)
Stability Testing of New Drug Substances and Products, Federal Register 65 (78),
2144621453 (21 April 2000) [ICH Q1A(R)]. This revised guideline reached Step 4 of
the ICH process on 8 November 2000. Implementation as of this writing EU: adopted
by CPMP, November 2000, issued as CPMP/ICH/2736/99.MHW: to be notified. FDA: to
be notified.
3. FDA,Draft Guidance for Industry, Stability Testing of Drug Substances and Drug
Products, Federal Register (Notices) 63 (109), 3122431225 (8 June 1998)
(combination of ICH Q1A-Q1C and Q5C, draft).
4. FDA, INDs for Phase II and III Studies of Drugs, Including Specified Therapeutic
Biotechnology Derived Products, Federal Register (Notices) 64 (76), 1954319544 (21
April 1999).
5. FDA, Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, Submitting Documentation for the
Stability of Human Drugs and Biologics (Rockville, MD, February 1987).
6. FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Guideline for the Photostability
Testing of New Drug Substances and New Drug Products, Federal Register 62 (95),
2711527122 (16 May 1997) (ICH Q1B) and References 1 and 2.
7. FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Guideline on Impurities in New Drug
Substances, Federal Register (Notices) 61 (3), 371376 (4 January 1996) (ICH Q3A)
and FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Draft Revised Guidance on
Impurities in New Drug Substances, Federal Register (Notices) 65 (140), 45085
45090 (20 July 2000) [ICH Q3A(R)]. ICH Q3A(R) currently is at Step 3.
8. FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Guideline on Impurities in New Drug
Products, Federal Register (Notices) 62 (96), 27453274561 (19 May 1997) (ICH Q3B)
and FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Draft Revised Guidance on
Impurities in New Drug Products, Federal Register (Notices) 65 (139), 4479144797
(19 July 2000) [ICH Q3B(R)]. ICH Q3B(R) currently is at Step 3.

9. A,Draft Guidance for Industry on Analytical Procedures and Methods

Vaidation

Chemistry, Manufacturing, and Controls Documentation, Federal Register (Notices) 65


(169), 5277652777 (30 August 2000).
10.FDA, International Conference on Harmonization: Guideline on the Validation of
Analytical Procedures: Methodology, Availability, Notice, Federal Register 62 (96),
2746327467 (19 May 1997).
11.A. Conners, G.L.Amidon, and V.L. Stella, Chemical Stability of Pharmaceuticals (Wiley
and Sons, New York, New York, 2d Ed., 1986), p. 19 and Reference 3.
12 FDA,International Conference on Harmonization: Guidance on Q6A Specifications: Test
Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for New Drug Substances and New Drug Products:
Chemical Substances, Federal Register (Notices) 65 (251), 8304183063 (29
December 2000) (ICH Q6A) and FDA, International Conference on Harmonization:
Draft Guidance on Q6A Specifications: Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for
New Drug Substances and New Drug Products: Chemical Substances, Federal
Register (Notices) 62 (227), 6288962910 (25 November 1997) (ICH Q6A). PT

VALIDATION OF ANALYST
1.0

OBJECTIVE
To lay down a procedure to establish capability of analyst to perform analysis accurately.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Control Officer / Quality Control Executive

3.0

ACCOUNABILITY :
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1.1

Samples of known analytical values shall be identified by the Quality Control Manager.

4.1.2

The analytical value(s) of sampler(s) along with acceptable limit(s), AR no., and code no.

shall
be recorded by Quality Control Manager in a register maintained for this purpose.

4.1.3
used within

All the coded samples shall be kept in sealed vials in the refrigerator and shall be

the period specified on the label.


4.1.3
4.2

The necessary information required for analysis of coded samples shall be disclosed to the
analyst.
The analyst shall be undergone validation for either one or more of following areas of
analysis.
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

Assay (by HPLC, UV or Chemical )


Moisture content
Melting point
Identification (by IR Spectrophotometer or Chemical ) .

4.2 The Analyst validation shall involve use of one or more of the following instruments.

4.2.7

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5

HPLC
UV Spectrophotometer
Auto-apparatus ( Titrator , KF Titrator )
Melting point apparatus
IR Spectrophotometer

4.2.6

The results of analyst shall be checked for cGlp compliance and compared with expected
values.

The capability to perform tests by Analyst shall be considered satisfactory if the results reported
by the
Analyst are within the acceptable limits , and documentation as per the
requirement.
4.2.8

The analyst shall be revalidated once in two years.

4.2.9

The details like calculations, chromatograms, strip charts alongwith comments of Quality
Control Manager shall be filed in training file of analysts.

TEST
Assay (HPLC) (on as is basis)

ACCEPTANCE LIMIT
+ 0.5% of the initial reported value

2.
Assay (by titration) (on as is basis)
Assay (by UV) on as is basis)
Water (by KF)
IR
Melting range
4.3 ABBREVIATIONS

+.5 % of the initial reported value


+.5% of the initial reported value.
+.5% of the initial reported value
should be compared with initial IR
Spectra.
should be within the range

AR No. = Analytical Reference Number.,cGLP


= Current Good Laboratories Practices.
HPLC = High performance liquid chromatography.,UV
= Ultra violet.
IR
= Infra red,KF
= Karl fisher.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Scope

Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:
-- Manager Quality Control

Trainer

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants

Period
7.0

-- One day
DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Original Copy
8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:
Nil

Validation of QC Chemist
1.0 Purpose

: To provide an instruction for the validation of QC Chemist.

2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure for the validation of QC Chemist.


: This procedure is applicable for QC Chemist .
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary

Secondary : Overall: QC In charge

: QC Chemist / QC-Officer

5.0 Procedure

Following method used for the validation of QC Chemist to confirmed his / her
analytical skills.

QC In-charge identifies a previously analyzed and approved batch sample.

Identified batch sample shall be coded and hand over to QC Chemist with all

the details of test procedure.

QC Chemist qualified on the criterion as follows:


QC Chemist performs the analysis and documents the result as per Good
Laboratory Practices.

QC Chemist performs the analysis and meets the acceptance criteria as per below
mentioned table.

The QC Chemist working in laboratory shall be qualified on one or more tests as


required by the QC In-charge.

The QC Chemist shall be qualified once a year.

A record shall be maintained.

Incase of QC Chemist fails to meet the criteria, the QC Chemist shall be trained and
re-qualified. The training record shall be recorded
Acceptance Criteria for Chemist Validation
Sr.
No.
01

Test

Acceptance Criteria

Assay test by HPLC

% RSD of Retention Time and Area of six replicate

02

Impurity test by HPLC

injection should not more than 2 %


% RSD of two replicate injection for highest impurity

03

IR test

should not more than 10 %


Three separate analysis, which shall be concordant

04

Water / LOD test

with each other.


% RSD of triplicate analysis should not more than 2
%
10 % moisture / LOD range 0 to 0.5 %
5 % moisture / LOD range 0.5 to 2.0 %

05

UV test

2 % moisture / LOD range 2 % above


% RSD of three replicated absorption of solution of
particular concentration at specified wavelength

GC test

should not be more than 2 %


% RSD of Retention Time and Area of six replicate

07

Sp. Gravity test

injection should not more than 2 %


% RSD of six replicates reading should not more

08

Specific Optical

than 2 %
% RSD of six replicates reading should not more

09

Rotation test
Assay by chemically

than 2 %
% RSD of six replicate analysis should not be more

test

than 2 %

06

Cleaning Validation Procedures

General concept

Three consecutive validations will be performed to prove that the method is validated.
Whenever a new product is introduced, equipment usage and nature of potential contaminant
will be studied to assess whether it poses a challenging study for cleaning validation.

If the new product represents worst case, study/ identify/develop method of cleaning to be
employed. Simultaneously develop Analytical method for cleaning and validate the same.

Revalidation Policy.

Level of cleaning:

Levels of cleaning during processing depends on:


o

Equipment usage (e.g. dedicated or not)

Stages of manufacturing

Nature of contaminant (e.g. solubility, toxicity, color etc.)


Our policy is to carry out cleaning after the end of each process, so that the equipment is clean
and ready for the next use.

Elements of cleaning validation:

Cleaning validation study includes:

Cleaning Procedure
o

Identification of equipment

Characterization of products

Determination of cleaning agents

Analytical method and its validation


Sampling procedure
Establishment of acceptance criteria
Validation protocol
Validation Reports

Cleaning Procedure:

Prior to developing cleaning validation study, evaluate the following:

Identification of Equipments:
Identify equipments to be cleaned.
Identify difficult to clean areas
Check for ease of dismantling

Characterization of products:

Study activity/toxicity, solubility of the active substance of current batch and dosage and batch
size of next product to be taken on the equipment.
o

Determination of Cleaning Agents:


Identify cleaning agents to be used
Identify number of cleaning cycles
Identify equipments / materials to be used for cleaning.

Based on above, prepare detailed written cleaning procedures for each equipment.

Analytical Methods and its validation:

In order for the analytical testing of the cleaning validation samples to yield meaningful results,
the analytical methods used should be validated.

Analytical method validation for cleaning should include limit of detection, limit of
quantification, acceptance criteria and rationale for setting the specified limits.

Sampling Procedure:

Sampling plan for validation study should be drawn which includes:


Sampling technique: Type of Sampling methods to be used are,
o

Direct surface sampling by swab.

Rinse water sampling (for equipment cleaning).

Plate exposure (for area cleaning).

Sampling Locations:
o

Two easy to clean and two hard to clean areas should be clearly defined in Protocol.

Sampling Procedure:
o

Should mention how many samples are to be taken

Swab samples should be taken separately for chemical and microbiological studies
For each of chemical and microbiological analysis take 2 swabs from easy to clean hard to clean
locations

How the samples are to be taken


Sample Numbering:
o

Swab samples should be numbered numerically and sequentially like 01, 02 etc for
identification.

Establishment of Acceptance Criteria:


o

Based on the data available calculate acceptance criteria for both Pharmacological dose method
and limiting the level of product to 10 ppm which appear in the following product.

Of these two, choose the criterion with stringent limits and detectable by analytical
method.

Microbiological limit is 50 CFU/100 cm2. Per swab

Validation Protocol

Validation protocol defines protocol number.


Protocol defines a validation team that will be responsible for carrying out validation studies.
Validation team comprises of at least one responsible person from production, QC & QA
department.
Responsibilities of team member are:o

Production Carrying out cleaning methods & implementing validation protocol.

Quality Control Developing analytical method for cleaning, sampling, testing & recording the
results.

Quality Assurance Issuing & reviewing of protocol, supervision of validation activities.


Validation protocol given details location, product manufactured, profile of active ingredient,
cleaning agents used, testing equipment to be used, sampling points, sampling procedures, limit
of detection acceptance calculation, surface area, validation report etc.

Responsible persons from Production, QC and QA should formally approve the cleaning
validation protocol.

After approval Validation protocol is issued to QC Department.


QC will perform validation studies in accordance with protocol and record results in validation
report.

Validation Procedure:

After completion of the manufacturing process, workman will clean the equipment.

If the cleaned equipment is listed in the protocol, production person will inform QC Department
to collect samples for testing and QA department for supervision.
QA/QC chemist will first check visually for cleanliness of equipment.
If it observed not clean, instruct for re-cleaning.

If it observed visually cleaned, collect samples separately for both chemical and microbial
analysis (if required) from locations given in the protocol as per sampling procedure.

Samples are carried to QC, where testing of the samples will be done using validated Analytical
method.

Validation Report:

QC will record the results of testing in the protocol.


QC will return the protocol with documented results and attachments like work sheet, graphs,
chromatograms etc. to QA for review.
After completion of documented studies, QA will write conclusions regarding acceptability of
the results and status of procedures considered for validation.
Any recommendations based on the documented results will be mentioned.
References to the procedures used for cleaning, sampling and testing should be mentioned in the
validation report.
All the members of validation team should approve conclusion
In cases where it is unlikely that further batches of the product will be manufactured for a period
of time, it is advisable to generate interim reports on batch-to-batch basis till such time the
cleaning validation study is complete.

If the results of validation of any of the three studies are non-conforming to set limits of
acceptance criteria, QC should inform immediately to QA.

Further manufacturing process on the equipment/in the area should be suspended.


Re-validation should be performed.

Prior to re-validation, cleaning methods/procedures, sampling methods/ procedures and


analytical procedures employed should be re-checked and reviewed.

Re-validation Policy:

Revalidation of validated cleaning procedures will be considered


o Once in a year, three replicate studies will be performed.
o In case of changes in equipment/process of product

If the new product represents worst-case challenge


1.0 The result of inadequate cleaning procedures is that any of a number of contaminants may be
present in the next batch manufactured on the equipment such as:
o

Precursors to the Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient

By-products and/or degradation products of the Active Pharmaceutical


Ingredient

The previous product

Solvents and other materials employed during the manufacturing process.

Micro-organisms

This is particularly the case where microbial growth may be sustained by the product.
o

Cleaning agents themselves and lubricants


2.0 Cleaning techniques to be evaluated

Manual cleaning

CIP (Clean-in place)

COP (clean-out-of-place)

Semi automatic

Automatic

Time considerations

Number of cleaning cycles.

SWAB SAMPLING FOR CLEANING VALIDATION


1.0

OBJECTIVE :
To establish a procedure for swab sampling for validation of test surface to evaluate cleaning efficacy.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY:
Quality Control Chemist / Quality Assurance Chemist.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY:
Quality Control Manager / Quality Assurance Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
FOR CHEMICAL EVALUATION:

4.1

SWAB
TRANSPORT
CONTAINER

for

SAMPLING
SOLVENT

: A clean room laundered polyurethane foam swab molded into a


polypropylene stick.
: Capped test tubes made of glass.
: As mentioned in the validation protocol of analytical method used
analysis of swab samples of respective active ingredients.

4.2

Swab sampling procedure :

4.2.1

Pipette out 10ml of sampling solvent in transport container.

4.2.2

Remove a swab from its protective bag using a clean latex hand glove.

4.2.3

Avoid touching the swab head to prevent its contamination.

4.2.4

Transfer the swab in transport container (test tube)containing 10ml of sampling solvent and allow the
swab to soak completely.

4.2.5

Take out the swab from sampling solvent and squeeze the tip against inner surface of test tube to
remove excess solvent in such a manner that excess sampling solvent drips inside the test tube.

4.2.6

Hold the stem of swab without touching the head of the swab.

4.2.7

Using one side of moistened swab wipe the test surface of 2 x 2 with 10 firm horizontal strokes as
illustrated in Fig. 1.

4.2.8

At the end of each stroke, lift the swab carefully.

4.2.9

Turn the swab over to its other side, wipe the test surface of 2 x 2 with 10 firm vertical strokes as
illustrated in figure no.2.
At the end of each stroke, lift the swab carefully.

4.2.10
4.2.11

Hold the steam of the swab without touching the head of the swab and let the swab drop into
the
transport container. Cap the transport container and send for analysis after labeling the
same.

4.3

PROCEDURE FOR MICROBIOLOGICAL EVALUATION :


4.3.1.

Take a sterile swab to sampling point.

4.3.2.

Make the swab with (1) sampling point and (2) Date on outer cover.

4.3.3

Put on the clean latex hand gloves and disinfect the same with 70% IPA.

4.3.4
x

Take out the sterile swab carefully from the outer cover and swab the complete selected area (10
10cm).

4.3.5.

Replace the swab immediately inside the cover, close if and send for analysis.
4.4.

ABBREVIATIONS:

IPA = Iso- Propyl Alcohol

5.0

REASON FOR REVISION:


Harmonization of format.

6.0.

TRAINING:
-Head Quality Control

Trainer

Trainees-Period -7.0.

Quality Control Chemists

One day

DISTRIBUTION:
Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control
Original Copy
: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

8.0.
9.0.

ANNEXURES:
Nil.
REFERENCES
In-house.

Type Of Validation Procedures


1)

PROCESS VALIDATION

prospective validation

concurrent validation

prospective validation

2)

cleaning validation

3)

change control

4)

Re- validation
Cleaning validation

Documented evidence to establish that cleaning procedures are removing residues to


predetermined levels of acceptability, taking into consideration factors such as batch size, dosing,
and toxicology and equipment size.
Validation
Action of proving and documenting that any process, procedure or method actually and
consistently leads to the expected results.
Process validation
Documented evidence which provides a high degree of assurance that a specific process will
consistently result in a product that meets its predetermined specifications and quality
characteristics
Concurrent validation
Validation carried out during routine production of products intended for sale.
Prospective validation
Validation carried out during the development stage on the basis of a risk analysis of the
production process, which is broken down into individual steps; these are then evaluated on the
basis of past experience to determine whether they may lead to critical situations.
Retrospective validation
Involves the evaluation of past experience of production on the condition that composition,
procedures, and equipment remain unchanged.
- The sources of data for this validation may include batch documents, process control chart,
maintaince logbook, records of personnel change process capability studies, fp data and stability
results.
Validation report (VR)
A document in which the records, results and evaluation of a completed validation programme
are assembled and summarized. It may also contain proposals for the improvement of processes
and/or

equipment.

Process Validation Program


The number of process runs for validation should depend on the complexity of the process or the
magnitude of the process change being considered. For prospective and concurrent validation,

three consecutive successful production batches should be used as a guide, but there may be
situations where additional process runs are warranted to prove consistency of the process
For retrospective validation, generally data from 10 to 30 consecutive batches should be
examined to assess process consistency, but fewer batches can be examined if justified.
Critical process parameters should be controlled and monitored during process validation studies.
Process parameters unrelated to quality, such as variables controlled to minimize energy
consumption or equipment use, need not be included in the process validation.
Process validation should confirm that the impurity profile for each API is within the limits
specified. The impurity profile should be comparable to, or better than, historical data and, where
applicable, the profile determined during process development or for batches used for pivotal
clinical

and

toxicological

studies.

Approaches to validation
5.1.1 There are two basic approaches to validationone based on evidence obtained through
testing (prospective and concurrent validation), and one based on the analysis of accumulated
(historical) data (retrospective validation). Whenever possible, prospective validation is
preferred. Retrospective validation is no longer encouraged and is, in any case, not applicable to
the manufacturing of sterile products.
5.1.2 Both prospective and concurrent validation, may include:
extensive product testing, which may involve extensive sample testing (with the estimation of
confidence limits for individual results) and the demonstration of intra- and inter-batch
homogeneity;
simulation process trials;
challenge/worst case tests, which determine the robustness of the process; and
control of process parameters being monitored during normal production runs to obtain
additional information on the reliability of the process.
5.2 Scope of validation
5.2.1 There should be an appropriate and sufficient system including organizational structure and
documentation infrastructure, sufficient personnel and financial resources to perform validation

tasks in a timely manner. Management and persons responsible for quality assurance should be
involved.
5.2.2 Personnel with appropriate qualifications and experience should be responsible for
performing validation. They should represent different departments depending on the validation
work to be performed.
5.2.3 There should be proper preparation and planning before validation is performed. There
should be a specific programmed for validation activities.
5.2.4 Validation should be performed in a structured way according to the documented
procedures and protocols.
5.2.5 Validation should be performed:
for new premises, equipment, utilities and systems, and processes and procedures;
at periodic intervals; and
when major changes have been made. (Periodic revalidation or periodic requalification may
be substituted, where appropriate, with periodic evaluation of data and information to establish
whether requalification or revalidation is required.)
5.2.6 Validation should be performed in accordance with written protocols. A written report on
the outcome of the validation should be produced.
5.2.7 Validation should be done over a period of time, e.g. at least three consecutive batches (full
production scale) should be validated, to demonstrate consistency. Worst case situations should
be considered.
5.2.8 There should be a clear distinction between in-process controls and validation. In-process
tests are performed during the manufacture of each batch according to specifications and
methods devised during the development phase. Their objective is to monitor the process
continuously.
5.2.9 When a new manufacturing formula or method is adopted, steps should be taken to
demonstrate its suitability for routine processing. The defined process, using the materials and
equipment specified, should be shown to result in the consistent yield of a product of the
required quality.
5.2.10 Manufacturers should identify what validation work is needed to prove that critical
aspects of their operations are appropriately controlled. Significant changes to the facilities or the

equipment, and processes that may affect the quality of the product should be validated. A risk
assessment approach should be used to determine the scope and extent of validation required.
You might also like:

Analytical Method Validation

WHY VALIDATE ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES ?


There are many reasons for the need to validate analytical procedures. Among them
are regulatory requirements, good science, and quality control requirements. The
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 311.165c explicitly states that the accuracy,
sensitivity, specifi city, and reproducibility of test methods employed by the fi rm shall
be established and documented. Of course, as scientists, we would want to apply
good science to demonstrate that the analytical method used had demonstrated
accuracy, sensitivity, specifi city, and reproducibility. Finally management of the
quality control unit would defi nitely want to ensure that the analytical methods that
the department uses to release its products are properly validated for its intended
use so the product will be safe for human use.

CYCLE
OF
ANALYTICAL
METHODS
The analytical method validation activity is not a one - time study. This is illustrated
and summarized in the life cycle of an analytical procedure in Figure 1 . An analytical
method will be developed and validated for use to analyze samples during the early
development of an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API) or drug product. As drug
development progresses from phase 1 to commercialization, the analytical method
will follow a similar progression. The fi nal method will be validated for its intended
use for the market image drug product and transferred to the quality control laboratory
for the launch of the drug product. However, if there are any changes in the
manufacturing process that have the potential to change the analytical profi le of the
drug substance and drug product, this validated method may need to be revalidated
to ensure that it is still suitable to analyze the API or drug product for its intended
purpose.

General Concepts

Validation is the act of demonstrating and documenting a procedure that operates


effectively.

The discussion of the validation of analytical procedures is directed to the four most
common types of analytical procedure:

Identification tests

Quantitative tests for impurities content

Limit tests for the control of impurities

Quantitative tests of the active moiety in samples of drug substance or drug product or
other selected components in the drug product.

Typical validation characteristics which should be considered are:

Accuracy

Precision

Specificity

Quantitation Limit

Linearity and Range

Robustness

Method Validation Parameter for the assay of Mebendazole:

Linearity: Mebendazole to be analyzed as per proposed method. The results obtain is used to
statistically evaluate for coefficient of determination (r 2), standard error of estimate and y
intercept.

Precision: Precision of the chemical method is ascertained by carrying out the analysis as per the

procedure and as per normal weight taken for analysis. Repeat the analysis five times.
Calculate the % assay, mean assay, % Deviation and % relative standard deviation and
%RSD.
Accuracy: Accuracy of the method is ascertained by standard addition method at 3 levels.
Standard quantity equivalent to 80%, 100% and 120% is to be added in sample.

Method Validation Parameter for residual solvent by GC for Mebendazole:

Specificity: Resolution of the analyte peak from the nearest peak: Solution of each of the analyte
was injected separately and their retention time is noted. The standard working solution
containing a mixture of the component being analyze is also injected and each of
analyte peaks is check for its resolution from the nearest.

Precision:
Repeatability: Six replicate injections of standard solution for system precision should
analyze as per the proposed method and from the chromatograms obtained the
percentage % RSD is calculated.
Intermediate precision: The purpose of this test is to demonstrate the intermediate
precision of the method when method is executed by a different analyst and on different
day. Results obtained will be compared.

Linearity and Range: Solution of analyte solvent, having different concentration


should make separate from L.O.Q. concentration, which is 50% to 150%. The result
obtained is statistically evaluated for coefficient of determination (r 2), standard error of
estimate and y intercept.

LOD & LOQ:


The limit of Detection (L.O.D.) was calculated as per below equation:
LOD

3.3

X
SD
Slope

The limit of Quantification (L.O.Q.) was calculated as per below equation:

LOQ

10

X SD
Slope

Accuracy / % Recovery (By Standard Addition Method): Accuracy of the method


was ascertained by standard addition method at 3 levels.

Standard solution quantity equivalent to 50%, 100% and 150% are added in sample.

The solutions amount is analyzed by the proposed method and chromatogram


obtained.

The amount recover by the method is compared to the amount added. Percent
deviation is calculated at each levels and a grand average across all the levels are also
calculated.
Methanol standard concentration 3000 ppm
Acetic acid standard concentration 5000 ppm
DMF standard concentration

880 ppm

Robustness:
The evaluation of robustness should be considered during the development phase and
depends on the type of procedure under study. It should show the reliability of an
analysis with respect to deliberate variations in method parameters.
If measurements are susceptible to variation in analytical conditions, the analytical
condition should be suitably controlled or a precautionary statement should be included
in the procedure.
One consequence of the robustness should be that a series of system suitability
parameters (e.g. resolution test) is established to ensure that the validity of the
analytical procedure is maintained whenever used.

PROCESS
OF
ANALYTICAL
METHOD
VALIDATION
The typical process that is followed in an analytical method validation is
chronologically listed
below:
1.
Planning
and
deciding
on
the
method
validation
experiments
2.
Writing
and
approval
of
method
validation
protocol
3.
Execution
of
the
method
validation
protocol
4.
Analysis
of
the
method
validation
data
5.
Reporting
the
analytical
method
validation
6.
Finalizing
the
analytical
method
procedure

The method validation experiments should be well planned and laid out to ensure
effi cient use of time and resources during execution of the method validation. The best
way to ensure a well - planned validation study is to write a method validation protocol
that will be reviewed and signed by the appropriate person (e.g.,
laboratory management
and
quality
assurance).
The validation parameters that will be evaluated will depend on the type of
method to be validated. Analytical methods that are commonly validated can be
classifi ed into three main categories: identifi cation, testing for impurities, and
assay. Table 3 lists the ICH recommendations for each of these methods.
Execution of the method validation protocol should be carefully planned
to optimize the resources and time required to complete the full validation
study. For example, in the validation of an assay method, linearity and accuracy may be
validated at the same time as both experiments can use the same standard solutions.
A normal validation protocol should contain the following contents at a
minimum:
(a)
Objective
of
the
protocol
(b)
Validation
parameters
that
will
be
evaluated
(c)
Acceptance
criteria
for
all
the
validation
parameters
evaluated
(d)
Details
of
the
experiments
to
be
performed
(e)
Draft
analytical
procedure
The data from the method validation data should be analyzed as the data are
obtained and processed to ensure a smooth fl ow of information. If an
experimental error is detected, it should be resolved as soon as possible to reduce any
impact it may have on later experiments. Analysis of the data includes visual
examination of the numerical values of the data and chromatograms followed by
statistical treatment of the data if required.

Upon completion of all the experiments, all the data will be compiled into a
detailed validation report that will conclude the success or failure of the validation
exercise. Depending on the company s strategy a summary of the validation data may
also be generated. Successful execution of the validation will lead to a final analytical
procedure that can be used by the laboratory to support future analytical work for the
drug substance or drug product.
METHOD REVALIDATION
There are various circumstances under which a method needs to be revalidated.
Some of the common situations are described below:
1. During the optimization of the drug substance synthetic process, signifi cant
changes were introduced into the process. To ensure that the analytical method
will still be able to analyze the potentially different profi le of the API, revalidation
may be necessary.
2. If a new impurity is found that makes the method defi cient in its specifi city,
this method will need to be modifi ed or redeveloped and revalidated to ensure
that it will be able to perform its intended function.
3. A change in the excipient composition may change the product impurity
profi le. This change may make the method defi cient in its specifi city for the
assay or impurity tests and may require redevelopment and revalidation.
4. Changes in equipment or suppliers of critical supplies of the API or fi nal drug
product will have the potential to change their degradation profi le and may
require the method to be redeveloped and revalidated.
STABILITY STUDY PROTOCOL FOR ANALYTICAL METHOD VALIDATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Item No.

Item

Page No.

--

Table of content

1.0

Objective

2.0

Scope

3.0

Responsibility

4.0

Stability tests on Finished Product

4.1

Quality specifications for the proposed shelflife

4.1.1

Batches details

4.1.2

Specifications of test methods

1.0

4.1.3

Study design and study conditions

4.1.4

Analytical test procedures

4.1.5

Results of tests

Results format Annexure-II

8-9

Conclusion

11

OBJECTIVE:

To perform long term stability study on production batches to evaluate and justify
the recommended shelf life. Storage conditions and desired packing.

2.0

SCOPE:

Scope of the study is to perform:

Long term stability studies: A minimum of one batch per year for long term
stability study and any batch where a process change is made which will affect the
stability and quality of the product.

3.0

RESPONSIBILITY:

Sr.
No.

Team
Member

Department

Designati
on

Responsibility

1.

2.

3.

4.0

Quality
Assurance

Manager

Issue and review of Stability


protocol

Quality
Control

Manager

Quality
Control

QC Officer

(QA)

Implementation and supervision


of Stability protocol

(QC)

To carry out QC test procedures

STABILITY TESTS ON FINISHED PRODUCT

Quality specifications for the proposed shelf life

The recommended shelf life, storage conditions, and desired packaging should be
accompanied by the results of the testing.

Product Mebendazole USP packaged in a double laminated aluminum sachet.

Batches details:

Batch No.

Mfg. Date

Exp. Date

Batch Size

Specifications and Test Methods

pecifications for long-term stability study.

Sr. No.

Test

DESCRIPTION:

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

ASSAY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

Limits

All of the analytical methods used for carrying out the above mentioned tests are
the same as those described in European Pharmacopoeia Annexure-I.

udy Design and Study conditions

Long term stability studies: One batch per year.

ong-Term Storage Conditions and Testing Frequency

Samples of Mebendazole USP. were packaged in a double laminated


aluminium sachet. Total 10 samples should be packed as per stability program. (9
samples as per stability program and one additional sample). Sample quantity is
about 3 gm in each pack.

The samples were then stored in an environmental chamber at temperature


25C 2 C & Relative Humidity 60% 5%

Temperature:

25C 2 C

Relative
humidity:

60% 5%

Time interval:

0 Month (initial
month)
3 Months
6 Months
9 Months
12 Months
18 Months
24 Months

36 Months
48 Months
60 Months

ANALYTICAL TEST PROCEDURES

The following Test methods were applied to verify product integrity during the
time period tested as per Specification.

DESCRIPTION

DENTIFICATION (IR)

RELATED SUBSTANCES (BY THIN LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY)

LOSS ON DRYING

MELTING POINT :

CLARITY :

RESIDUE ON

ASSAY :

IGNITION:

Results of tests
All test results shall be recorded in attached Annexure-II:

Conclusion:

Conclusion shall be marked after completion of stability sample testing at each


time interval.

And completion of total stability study, overall conclusion shall be marked.

Annexure-II
Results of Long term testing at Temperature 25C 2 C & Relative
Humidity 60% 5%

Product name

Batch No

Manufacturing date

Pack

Batch size

Double laminated aluminum sachet

Sr.
No.

Test

DESCRIPTION:

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

CHROMATOGRA-PHIC
PURITY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

Limit
s

Analysis (after months)


0

12

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

Sr. No.

8.

Test

ASSAY

Limits

Analysis (after months)


0

12

Month

Month

Month

Month

Month

Results of Long term testing at Temperature 25C 2 C & Relative


Humidity 60% 5%

Product name

Batch No

Manufacturing date

Pack

Batch size

Sr.
No.

Test

Limi
ts

Double laminated aluminum sachet

Analysis (after months)


0

18

24

36

48

60

Mont Mont Mont Mont Mont Mont


h
h
h
h
h
h
1

DESCRIPTION:

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

CHROMATOGRA-PHIC
PURITY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

Test

Limits

Analysis (after months)

Sr.
No.
8.

12

Month

Month

Month

Month

Month

ASSAY

Conclusion:

You might also like:

Analytical Method Validation


Cleaning Validation Procedures
VALIDATION OF ANALYST
Validation of QC Chemist
Validating Corporate Computer Systems: Good IT Practice for Pharmaceutical
Manufacturers
One of the biggest computer validation challenges facing pharmaceutical manufacturers is the
large corporate system. This book provides practical information and advice on good IT practice
and validation principles. Written by experts, it includes case studies on EDMSs, EAM systems,
LIMSs, and MRP II systems. Topics include paper- and peopleless plants, GxP compliance,
integrating manufacturing systems,electronic signatures, validating asset management systems,
enterprise/manufacturing planning systems, lab information management systems, and Local &
Wide Area Networks, compliance for IT Infrastructure, IT system maintenance and support, and
auditing
suppliers,
software
Integrators,
and
hardware
manufacturers.

Download

Validating Corporate Computer Systems: Good IT Practice for Pharmaceutical Manufacturers


You might also like:

Cleaning Validation Procedures


Validation of QC Chemist
Analytical Method Validation
VALIDATION OF INCUBATORS

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:57 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Wednesday, December 8, 2010


Analytical Method Validation

WHY VALIDATE ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES ?


There are many reasons for the need to validate analytical procedures. Among them
are regulatory requirements, good science, and quality control requirements. The
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 311.165c explicitly states that the accuracy,
sensitivity, specifi city, and reproducibility of test methods employed by the fi rm shall
be established and documented. Of course, as scientists, we would want to apply
good science to demonstrate that the analytical method used had demonstrated
accuracy, sensitivity, specifi city, and reproducibility. Finally management of the
quality control unit would defi nitely want to ensure that the analytical methods that
the department uses to release its products are properly validated for its intended
use so the product will be safe for human use.

CYCLE
OF
ANALYTICAL
METHODS
The analytical method validation activity is not a one - time study. This is illustrated
and summarized in the life cycle of an analytical procedure in Figure 1 . An analytical

method will be developed and validated for use to analyze samples during the early
development of an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API) or drug product. As drug
development progresses from phase 1 to commercialization, the analytical method
will follow a similar progression. The fi nal method will be validated for its intended
use for the market image drug product and transferred to the quality control laboratory
for the launch of the drug product. However, if there are any changes in the
manufacturing process that have the potential to change the analytical profi le of the
drug substance and drug product, this validated method may need to be revalidated
to ensure that it is still suitable to analyze the API or drug product for its intended
purpose.

General Concepts

Validation is the act of demonstrating and documenting a procedure that operates effectively.

The discussion of the validation of analytical procedures is directed to the four most common
types of analytical procedure:

Identification tests

Quantitative tests for impurities content

Limit tests for the control of impurities

Quantitative tests of the active moiety in samples of drug substance or drug product or other
selected components in the drug product.

Typical validation characteristics which should be considered are:

Accuracy

Precision

Specificity

Quantitation Limit

Linearity and Range

Robustness

Method Validation Parameter for the assay of Mebendazole:

Linearity: Mebendazole to be analyzed as per proposed method. The results obtain is used to statistically
evaluate for coefficient of determination (r2), standard error of estimate and y intercept.
Precision: Precision of the chemical method is ascertained by carrying out the analysis as per the
procedure and as per normal weight taken for analysis. Repeat the analysis five times.
Calculate the % assay, mean assay, % Deviation and % relative standard deviation and %RSD.
Accuracy: Accuracy of the method is ascertained by standard addition method at 3 levels. Standard
quantity equivalent to 80%, 100% and 120% is to be added in sample.

Method Validation Parameter for residual solvent by GC for Mebendazole:

Specificity: Resolution of the analyte peak from the nearest peak: Solution of each of the analyte was
injected separately and their retention time is noted. The standard working solution containing a
mixture of the component being analyze is also injected and each of analyte peaks is check for
its resolution from the nearest.
Precision:

Repeatability: Six replicate injections of standard solution for system precision should analyze
as per the proposed method and from the chromatograms obtained the percentage % RSD is
calculated.

Intermediate precision: The purpose of this test is to demonstrate the intermediate precision
of the method when method is executed by a different analyst and on different day. Results
obtained will be compared.

Linearity and Range: Solution of analyte solvent, having different concentration should make
separate from L.O.Q. concentration, which is 50% to 150%. The result obtained is statistically
evaluated for coefficient of determination (r2), standard error of estimate and y intercept.

LOD & LOQ:

The limit of Detection (L.O.D.) was calculated as per below equation:

LOD

3.3

SD

Slope

The limit of Quantification (L.O.Q.) was calculated as per below equation:

LOQ

10

SD

Slope

Accuracy / % Recovery (By Standard Addition Method): Accuracy of the method was
ascertained by standard addition method at 3 levels.

Standard solution quantity equivalent to 50%, 100% and 150% are added in sample.

The solutions amount is analyzed by the proposed method and chromatogram obtained.

The amount recover by the method is compared to the amount added. Percent deviation is
calculated at each levels and a grand average across all the levels are also calculated.
Methanol standard concentration 3000 ppm
Acetic acid standard concentration 5000 ppm
DMF standard concentration

880 ppm

Robustness:

The evaluation of robustness should be considered during the development phase and
depends on the type of procedure under study. It should show the reliability of an analysis with
respect to deliberate variations in method parameters.

If measurements are susceptible to variation in analytical conditions, the analytical condition


should be suitably controlled or a precautionary statement should be included in the procedure.

One consequence of the robustness should be that a series of system suitability parameters
(e.g. resolution test) is established to ensure that the validity of the analytical procedure is
maintained whenever used.

PROCESS
OF
ANALYTICAL
METHOD
VALIDATION
The typical process that is followed in an analytical method validation is chronologically listed
below:
1.
Planning
and
deciding
on
the
method
validation
experiments
2.
Writing
and
approval
of
method
validation
protocol
3.
Execution
of
the
method
validation
protocol
4.
Analysis
of
the
method
validation
data
5.
Reporting
the
analytical
method
validation
6.
Finalizing
the
analytical
method
procedure
The method validation experiments should be well planned and laid out to ensure
effi cient use of time and resources during execution of the method validation. The best way to
ensure a well - planned validation study is to write a method validation protocol that will be
reviewed and signed by the appropriate person (e.g., laboratory management and quality
assurance).
The validation parameters that will be evaluated will depend on the type of
method to be validated. Analytical methods that are commonly validated can be
classifi ed into three main categories: identifi cation, testing for impurities, and assay. Table 3
lists
the
ICH
recommendations
for
each
of
these
methods.
Execution of
the method validation protocol should be carefully planned
to optimize the resources and time required to complete the full validation
study. For example, in the validation of an assay method, linearity and accuracy may be
validated at the same time as both experiments can use the same standard solutions.
A normal validation protocol should contain the following contents at a
minimum:
(a)
Objective
of
the
protocol
(b)
Validation
parameters
that
will
be
evaluated
(c)
Acceptance
criteria
for
all
the
validation
parameters
evaluated
(d)
Details
of
the
experiments
to
be
performed
(e)
Draft
analytical
procedure
The data from the method validation data should be analyzed as the data are
obtained and processed to ensure a smooth fl ow of information. If an experimental error is
detected, it should be resolved as soon as possible to reduce any impact it may have on later
experiments. Analysis of the data includes visual examination of the numerical values of the
data and chromatograms followed by statistical treatment of the data if required.

Upon completion of all the experiments, all the data will be compiled into a
detailed validation report that will conclude the success or failure of the validation
exercise. Depending on the company s strategy a summary of the validation data may also be
generated. Successful execution of the validation will lead to a final analytical procedure that
can be used by the laboratory to support future analytical work for the drug substance or drug
product.

METHOD REVALIDATION
There are various circumstances under which a method needs to be revalidated.
Some of the common situations are described below:
1. During the optimization of the drug substance synthetic process, signifi cant
changes were introduced into the process. To ensure that the analytical method
will still be able to analyze the potentially different profi le of the API, revalidation
may be necessary.
2. If a new impurity is found that makes the method defi cient in its specifi city,
this method will need to be modifi ed or redeveloped and revalidated to ensure

that it will be able to perform its intended function.


3. A change in the excipient composition may change the product impurity
profi le. This change may make the method defi cient in its specifi city for the
assay or impurity tests and may require redevelopment and revalidation.
4. Changes in equipment or suppliers of critical supplies of the API or fi nal drug
product will have the potential to change their degradation profi le and may
require the method to be redeveloped and revalidated.

Type Of Validation Procedures


1)

PROCESS VALIDATION

prospective validation

concurrent validation

prospective validation

2)

cleaning validation

3)

change control

4)

Re- validation
Cleaning validation
Documented evidence to establish that cleaning procedures are removing residues to
predetermined levels of acceptability, taking into consideration factors such as batch size, dosing,
and toxicology and equipment size.
Validation
Action of proving and documenting that any process, procedure or method actually and
consistently leads to the expected results.
Process validation
Documented evidence which provides a high degree of assurance that a specific process will
consistently result in a product that meets its predetermined specifications and quality
characteristics
Concurrent validation

Validation carried out during routine production of products intended for sale.
Prospective validation
Validation carried out during the development stage on the basis of a risk analysis of the
production process, which is broken down into individual steps; these are then evaluated on the
basis of past experience to determine whether they may lead to critical situations.
Retrospective validation
Involves the evaluation of past experience of production on the condition that composition,
procedures, and equipment remain unchanged.
- The sources of data for this validation may include batch documents, process control chart,
maintaince logbook, records of personnel change process capability studies, fp data and stability
results.
Validation report (VR)
A document in which the records, results and evaluation of a completed validation programme
are assembled and summarized. It may also contain proposals for the improvement of processes
and/or

equipment.

Process Validation Program


The number of process runs for validation should depend on the complexity of the process or the
magnitude of the process change being considered. For prospective and concurrent validation,
three consecutive successful production batches should be used as a guide, but there may be
situations where additional process runs are warranted to prove consistency of the process
For retrospective validation, generally data from 10 to 30 consecutive batches should be
examined to assess process consistency, but fewer batches can be examined if justified.
Critical process parameters should be controlled and monitored during process validation studies.
Process parameters unrelated to quality, such as variables controlled to minimize energy
consumption or equipment use, need not be included in the process validation.
Process validation should confirm that the impurity profile for each API is within the limits
specified. The impurity profile should be comparable to, or better than, historical data and, where
applicable, the profile determined during process development or for batches used for pivotal
clinical

and

toxicological

studies.

Approaches to validation
5.1.1 There are two basic approaches to validationone based on evidence obtained through
testing (prospective and concurrent validation), and one based on the analysis of accumulated
(historical) data (retrospective validation). Whenever possible, prospective validation is
preferred. Retrospective validation is no longer encouraged and is, in any case, not applicable to
the manufacturing of sterile products.
5.1.2 Both prospective and concurrent validation, may include:
extensive product testing, which may involve extensive sample testing (with the estimation of
confidence limits for individual results) and the demonstration of intra- and inter-batch
homogeneity;
simulation process trials;
challenge/worst case tests, which determine the robustness of the process; and
control of process parameters being monitored during normal production runs to obtain
additional information on the reliability of the process.
5.2 Scope of validation
5.2.1 There should be an appropriate and sufficient system including organizational structure and
documentation infrastructure, sufficient personnel and financial resources to perform validation
tasks in a timely manner. Management and persons responsible for quality assurance should be
involved.
5.2.2 Personnel with appropriate qualifications and experience should be responsible for
performing validation. They should represent different departments depending on the validation
work to be performed.
5.2.3 There should be proper preparation and planning before validation is performed. There
should be a specific programmed for validation activities.
5.2.4 Validation should be performed in a structured way according to the documented
procedures and protocols.
5.2.5 Validation should be performed:
for new premises, equipment, utilities and systems, and processes and procedures;
at periodic intervals; and

when major changes have been made. (Periodic revalidation or periodic requalification may
be substituted, where appropriate, with periodic evaluation of data and information to establish
whether requalification or revalidation is required.)
5.2.6 Validation should be performed in accordance with written protocols. A written report on
the outcome of the validation should be produced.
5.2.7 Validation should be done over a period of time, e.g. at least three consecutive batches (full
production scale) should be validated, to demonstrate consistency. Worst case situations should
be considered.
5.2.8 There should be a clear distinction between in-process controls and validation. In-process
tests are performed during the manufacture of each batch according to specifications and
methods devised during the development phase. Their objective is to monitor the process
continuously.
5.2.9 When a new manufacturing formula or method is adopted, steps should be taken to
demonstrate its suitability for routine processing. The defined process, using the materials and
equipment specified, should be shown to result in the consistent yield of a product of the
required quality.
5.2.10 Manufacturers should identify what validation work is needed to prove that critical
aspects of their operations are appropriately controlled. Significant changes to the facilities or the
equipment, and processes that may affect the quality of the product should be validated. A risk
assessment approach should be used to determine the scope and extent of validation required.
You might also like:

Validation of QC Chemist

VALIDATION OF INCUBATORS

Analytical Method Validation

Cleaning Validation Procedures


LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 5:13 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reactions:

Cleaning Validation Procedures

General concept

Three consecutive validations will be performed to prove that the method is validated.
Whenever a new product is introduced, equipment usage and nature of potential contaminant
will be studied to assess whether it poses a challenging study for cleaning validation.

If the new product represents worst case, study/ identify/develop method of cleaning to be
employed. Simultaneously develop Analytical method for cleaning and validate the same.

Revalidation Policy.

Level of cleaning:

Levels of cleaning during processing depends on:


o

Equipment usage (e.g. dedicated or not)

Stages of manufacturing

Nature of contaminant (e.g. solubility, toxicity, color etc.)


Our policy is to carry out cleaning after the end of each process, so that the equipment is clean
and ready for the next use.

Elements of cleaning validation:

Cleaning validation study includes:

Cleaning Procedure
o

Identification of equipment

Characterization of products

Determination of cleaning agents

Analytical method and its validation


Sampling procedure
Establishment of acceptance criteria
Validation protocol
Validation Reports

Cleaning Procedure:

Prior to developing cleaning validation study, evaluate the following:


o

Identification of Equipments:
Identify equipments to be cleaned.
Identify difficult to clean areas
Check for ease of dismantling

Characterization of products:

Study activity/toxicity, solubility of the active substance of current batch and dosage and batch
size of next product to be taken on the equipment.
o

Determination of Cleaning Agents:


Identify cleaning agents to be used
Identify number of cleaning cycles
Identify equipments / materials to be used for cleaning.

Based on above, prepare detailed written cleaning procedures for each equipment.

Analytical Methods and its validation:

In order for the analytical testing of the cleaning validation samples to yield meaningful results,
the analytical methods used should be validated.

Analytical method validation for cleaning should include limit of detection, limit of
quantification, acceptance criteria and rationale for setting the specified limits.

Sampling Procedure:

Sampling plan for validation study should be drawn which includes:


Sampling technique: Type of Sampling methods to be used are,
o

Direct surface sampling by swab.

Rinse water sampling (for equipment cleaning).

Plate exposure (for area cleaning).

Sampling Locations:
o

Two easy to clean and two hard to clean areas should be clearly defined in Protocol.

Sampling Procedure:
o

Should mention how many samples are to be taken

Swab samples should be taken separately for chemical and microbiological studies
For each of chemical and microbiological analysis take 2 swabs from easy to clean hard to clean
locations
How the samples are to be taken
Sample Numbering:
o

Swab samples should be numbered numerically and sequentially like 01, 02 etc for
identification.

Establishment of Acceptance Criteria:


o

Based on the data available calculate acceptance criteria for both Pharmacological dose method
and limiting the level of product to 10 ppm which appear in the following product.

Of these two, choose the criterion with stringent limits and detectable by analytical
method.

Microbiological limit is 50 CFU/100 cm2. Per swab

Validation Protocol

Validation protocol defines protocol number.


Protocol defines a validation team that will be responsible for carrying out validation studies.
Validation team comprises of at least one responsible person from production, QC & QA
department.
Responsibilities of team member are:o

Production Carrying out cleaning methods & implementing validation protocol.

Quality Control Developing analytical method for cleaning, sampling, testing & recording the
results.

Quality Assurance Issuing & reviewing of protocol, supervision of validation activities.


Validation protocol given details location, product manufactured, profile of active ingredient,
cleaning agents used, testing equipment to be used, sampling points, sampling procedures, limit
of detection acceptance calculation, surface area, validation report etc.

Responsible persons from Production, QC and QA should formally approve the cleaning
validation protocol.

After approval Validation protocol is issued to QC Department.


QC will perform validation studies in accordance with protocol and record results in validation
report.

Validation Procedure:

After completion of the manufacturing process, workman will clean the equipment.
If the cleaned equipment is listed in the protocol, production person will inform QC Department
to collect samples for testing and QA department for supervision.
QA/QC chemist will first check visually for cleanliness of equipment.
If it observed not clean, instruct for re-cleaning.

If it observed visually cleaned, collect samples separately for both chemical and microbial
analysis (if required) from locations given in the protocol as per sampling procedure.

Samples are carried to QC, where testing of the samples will be done using validated Analytical
method.

Validation Report:

QC will record the results of testing in the protocol.


QC will return the protocol with documented results and attachments like work sheet, graphs,
chromatograms etc. to QA for review.
After completion of documented studies, QA will write conclusions regarding acceptability of
the results and status of procedures considered for validation.
Any recommendations based on the documented results will be mentioned.
References to the procedures used for cleaning, sampling and testing should be mentioned in the
validation report.
All the members of validation team should approve conclusion
In cases where it is unlikely that further batches of the product will be manufactured for a period
of time, it is advisable to generate interim reports on batch-to-batch basis till such time the
cleaning validation study is complete.

If the results of validation of any of the three studies are non-conforming to set limits of
acceptance criteria, QC should inform immediately to QA.

Further manufacturing process on the equipment/in the area should be suspended.


Re-validation should be performed.

Prior to re-validation, cleaning methods/procedures, sampling methods/ procedures and


analytical procedures employed should be re-checked and reviewed.

Re-validation Policy:

Revalidation of validated cleaning procedures will be considered


o Once in a year, three replicate studies will be performed.
o In case of changes in equipment/process of product
If the new product represents worst-case challenge
1.0 The result of inadequate cleaning procedures is that any of a number of contaminants may be
present in the next batch manufactured on the equipment such as:

Precursors to the Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient

By-products and/or degradation products of the Active Pharmaceutical


Ingredient

The previous product

Solvents and other materials employed during the manufacturing process.

Micro-organisms

This is particularly the case where microbial growth may be sustained by the product.
o

Cleaning agents themselves and lubricants


2.0 Cleaning techniques to be evaluated

Manual cleaning

CIP (Clean-in place)

COP (clean-out-of-place)

Semi automatic

Automatic

Time considerations

Number of cleaning cycles.


You might also like:

Validation of QC Chemist

Analytical Method Validation

SWAB SAMPLING FOR CLEANING VALIDATION

VALIDATION OF INCUBATORS
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 5:08 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reactions:

Vendor Audit for Validation


1.

GENERAL:
1.1

Building Maintenance

2.

1.2

Reception

1.3

Administrative Block/O

1.4

Utility Block

1.5

Maintenance

1.6

Surroundings

PERSONNEL:
2.1

Or

2.2

Qu

2.3

Pro

Me

Fo

Fo
2.4

Pe

Fo

Fo
2.5

Fa

Fo

Fo

Wa
2.6

Pe
Sh

WC
Lo

Ca

3
.

2.7

Jo
Re

2.8

Tra

2.9

En

2.10
2.11

:
:

Dr
Sy

2.12

Pe

PLANT & BUILDING :


3.1

: Well equipped and sufficient area for Storages

a)

: Raw Material

____________

b)

: Packing Material

____________

c)

: Intermediate

____________

d)

: Finished Goods

____________

e)

: Cleaning / Schedule

____________

f)

: Cleaning of used equipment


and accessories
: Separate area for storage of incoming material
Quarantine area
Approved materials Storage
Rejected material Storage
Sampling area
Dispensing area
Adequate cleaning , washing and toilet area

g)

3.2
3.3

Separate canteen area

3.4

Utilities like compressed air, steam, nitrogen gas


area qualified and lines are identified with arrow
mark for flow direction.

____________

3.5

HVAC are providing for critical operation.

3.6

Drain is properly sanitized for critical area.

3.7
3.8

Water purification system


Water distribution system and quality of water
used
Men and materials movement system

3.9
3.10
3.11

Area is product dedicated or group of products


are manufactured then se the list of the product.
Cross contamination possibilities

3.12

Area cleaning procedure

3.13

Procedure of handling of rejected material.

3.14

Lighting level

3.15

Handling of sewage and waste

3.16

Sanitization of process equipments

3.17

Pest control system

3.18 : EQUIPMENT
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
k)
l)
m)
n)
4
.

Design MOC of contact parts


Qualification of equipment
Cleaning operation and preventive maintenance
procedures
Cleaning frequency
Measuring device calibration procedure
Cleaning validation approach
Computerized system are qualified as per CCF
part 11
Access to the computerized system is limited
Identification
Cleaning requirement for same product
for Product Change Over
Housekeeping & Sanitation
Special Procedure / Precaution

MANUFACTURING CONTROL:
4.1

: Identification level for material under processing

5.

4.2

Written Manufacturing Procedure

4.3

Deviation Control Procedure

4.4

Means of Communication

4.5

Status label for rejected / released material

4.6

: Used container control

TSE QUESTIONNAIRE:
5.1
5.2
5.3

: Have you obtained the COS Certificate from EDQM for the
Material you are supplying to us? If yes please attach the copy.
: Is any of the starting material used in the manufacturing from
Animal Origin. If yes, Please ensure to obtain the TSE free Certificate
from your supplier.
: Is the Production Line dedicated?

5.4 : If NO Please Specify:a) Are the equipments shared with any other product, which uses
original starting material?
b) Do you have sufficient Cleaning Procedure?
b) Is cleaning procedure validated?
5.5

the animal

: Is your batch COA contains the TSE / BSE free Declaration. If no submit an
undertaking to send the batch wise TSE / BSE free Declaration for all
supplies to us?

6. RECORD KEEPING :

7.

6.1

: Material issue control

________________

6.2

: Equipment Log

________________

6.3

: Process Record

________________

6.4

: In-Process Results

________________

RAW MATERIAL CONTROL:

7.1

Raw Material Receipt Control

__________________

7.2

Approved Material Segregation

__________________

7.3
8.

Rejected Material Control

__________________

QUALITY CONROL:
8.1: Raw Material Specification / Test Procedure & its control_______
8.2: Calibration Record

______

8.3: Finished Product Analysis & Release control


8.4: Testing facilities
9.

_______
_______

INFORMATION RELATED TO OTHER PRODUCT MANUFACTURED:

9.1: List of product manufactured (Attach Sheet)


9.2: Product change over control (Cleaning Validation) _______
10.

FILING SYSTEM:
10.1

11.

Retrievable

______________

NON CONFORMANCES IF ANY:


CRITICAL
MAJOR
OTHER

12.

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

13.

PREVENTIVE ACTIONS:

14.

CLOSURE OF AUDIT:

CONCLUSION
VALIDATION OF INCUBATORS
1.0

OBJECTIVE
To lay down a procedure for validation of incubator in microbiology

laboratory.

2.0

RESPONSIILTY
Microbiologist / Executive.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Assurance Control

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

DETAILS OF THE STANDARD THERMOMETER USED FOR VALIDATION OF


LAB THERMOMETER.
4.1.1

4.1.2

Type

: Liquid - Glass lab Thermometer.

Place the standard thermometer dipped in glycerin in incubator at various


locations as mentioned in annexure-II.

4.1.3

The incubator is set for desired temperature with the knob on control panel of
incubator
e.g 32.5 0C, 35 0C & 22.5 0C.

`
4.1.4

Wait till the temperature reaches at set point & note down the temp. displayed on
the small screen of incubator and compare this temp. with standard thermometer
kept near the RTD probe.Likewise check the temperature after every 15 minutes up
to one hour and note down the readings on the format.

4.1.5

Record any difference between the displayed temp. & temp. showed by standard
thermometer and set the incubator accordingly

4.1.6

Frequency of validation : once in a year.


4.1.7
4.2

The observations are noted in the format of annexure-I

PROCEDURE FOR VALIDATION OF D.H.S (HOT AIR OVEN):


4.2.1

Keep all the apparatus wrapped thrice with aluminum foil inside DHS

as locations shown
in the diagram.

4.2.2

Keep the Spore loaded strips (having spore of B subilis) & Endotoxin

indicator indicators
having 10,000EU/vial in DHS(hot air oven) kept in 30ml vial wrapped thrice with
aluminum foil at locations shown in the diagram keep one vial unbaked as PPC.
Set the hot air oven at 250C ,wait till the temperature reaches upto the set
temperature.
4.2.3

After reaching the set temperature, note the time & temperature, hold for one hour
4.2.4

After completion of depyrogenation cycle ,switch off the power supply

and take out


Indicators for testing.
4.3

Procedure for testing reduction of endotoxin as under.


4.3.1

Take out the baked endotoxin loaded vial from the DHS.

4.3.2

Reconstitute 1ml of LRW in the baked vial and transfer 100l of

sample to the
depyrogenated reaction tube kept in heating block at 37 0 C and add 100l of
LAL in the
same tube in duplicate.

4.4.

4.3.3

Prepare the dilutions for PPC for confirming 10,000EU/vial .

4.3.4

Note the gel clot after incubation of one hour

Procedure for testing of reduction of prepared spore loaded strip(B

subtilis):
4.4.1

Transfer (spore loaded) strip from backed vials and are inoculated in100ml

sterile SCD

media and incubate at 30 350C for 7 days to observe for any turbidity, if any,
report to Manager QC..
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer -

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Original Copy
8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

Annexure 1. Formats for Instrument validation.


9.0

REFERENCES:

USP 25 page no.-1890 & 2251

ANNEXURE-1
INSTRUMENT VALIDATION
.

Microbiology

NAME OF

Incubat

LOCATION

laboratory

INSTRUMENT

or

MANUFACTURED BY

MODEL No.

IDENTIFICATION No.

INSTALLED ON

SET TEMPERATURE =
TIME

TEMP. RECORDED

DISPLAYED

MINIMU

MAXIMU

DEVIATI

TEMP.

ON

LOCATIONS INSIDE THE

CHAMBER
1

6
C

INITIAL
TEMP

C
C

AFTER 15
MIN

C
C

C
C

C
C

LIMIT:-

AFTER 60
MIN

AFTER 45
MIN

AFTER 30
MIN

2% of Set Temperature

CONCLUSION: The incubator is maintaining / does not maintaining set temperature


within
Specified limits.
VALIDATED BY:
DATE:
NEXT VALIDATION
DUE ON DATE
You might also like:

CHECKED BY:
DATE:
MANAGER /QC

Cleaning Validation Procedures


Validation of QC Chemist
Type Of Validation Procedures
Analytical Method Validation
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:25 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Monday, November 29, 2010


STABILITY STUDY PROTOCOL FOR ANALYTICAL METHOD VALIDATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Item No.

Item

Page No.

--

Table of content

1.0

Objective

2.0

Scope

3.0

Responsibility

4.0

Stability tests on Finished Product

4.1

Quality specifications for the proposed shelflife

4.1.1

Batches details

4.1.2

Specifications of test methods

4.1.3

Study design and study conditions

4.1.4

Analytical test procedures

4.1.5

Results of tests

Results format Annexure-II

8-9

Conclusion

1.0

11

OBJECTIVE:

To perform long term stability study on production batches to evaluate and justify
the recommended shelf life. Storage conditions and desired packing.

2.0

SCOPE:

Scope of the study is to perform:

Long term stability studies: A minimum of one batch per year for long term
stability study and any batch where a process change is made which will affect the
stability and quality of the product.

3.0

RESPONSIBILITY:

Sr.
No.
1.

2.

Team
Member

Department

Designati
on

Quality
Assurance

Manager

Quality
Control

Manager

(QA)

(QC)

Responsibility
Issue and review of Stability
protocol
Implementation and supervision
of Stability protocol

3.

4.0

Quality
Control

QC Officer

To carry out QC test procedures

STABILITY TESTS ON FINISHED PRODUCT

Quality specifications for the proposed shelf life

The recommended shelf life, storage conditions, and desired packaging should be
accompanied by the results of the testing.

Product Mebendazole USP packaged in a double laminated aluminum sachet.

Batches details:

Batch No.

Mfg. Date

Exp. Date

Batch Size

Specifications and Test Methods

pecifications for long-term stability study.

Sr. No.

Test

DESCRIPTION:

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

ASSAY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

All of the analytical methods used for carrying out the above mentioned tests are
the same as those described in European Pharmacopoeia Annexure-I.

udy Design and Study conditions

Limits

Long term stability studies: One batch per year.

ong-Term Storage Conditions and Testing Frequency

Samples of Mebendazole USP. were packaged in a double laminated


aluminium sachet. Total 10 samples should be packed as per stability program. (9
samples as per stability program and one additional sample). Sample quantity is
about 3 gm in each pack.

The samples were then stored in an environmental chamber at temperature


25C 2 C & Relative Humidity 60% 5%

Temperature:

25C 2 C

Relative
humidity:

60% 5%

Time interval:

0 Month (initial
month)
3 Months
6 Months
9 Months
12 Months
18 Months
24 Months
36 Months
48 Months
60 Months

ANALYTICAL TEST PROCEDURES

The following Test methods were applied to verify product integrity during the
time period tested as per Specification.

DESCRIPTION

DENTIFICATION (IR)

RELATED SUBSTANCES (BY THIN LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY)

LOSS ON DRYING

MELTING POINT :

CLARITY :

RESIDUE ON

ASSAY :

IGNITION:

Results of tests
All test results shall be recorded in attached Annexure-II:

Conclusion:

Conclusion shall be marked after completion of stability sample testing at each


time interval.

And completion of total stability study, overall conclusion shall be marked.

Annexure-II
Results of Long term testing at Temperature 25C 2 C & Relative
Humidity 60% 5%

Sr.
No.

Product name

Batch No

Manufacturing date

Pack

Batch size

Test

DESCRIPTION:

Double laminated aluminum sachet

Limit
s

Analysis (after months)


0

12

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

Mont
h

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

CHROMATOGRA-PHIC
PURITY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

Sr. No.

8.

Test

ASSAY

Limits

Analysis (after months)


0

12

Month

Month

Month

Month

Month

Results of Long term testing at Temperature 25C 2 C & Relative


Humidity 60% 5%

Product name

Batch No

Manufacturing date

Pack

Batch size

Sr.
No.

Test

Limi
ts

Double laminated aluminum sachet

Analysis (after months)


0

18

24

36

48

60

Mont Mont Mont Mont Mont Mont


h
h
h
h
h
h
1

DESCRIPTION:

IDENTIFICATION (IR)

CHROMATOGRA-PHIC
PURITY

MELTING POINT

LOSS ON DRYING

CLARITY

RESIDUE ON IGNITION

Test

Limits

Analysis (after months)

Sr.
No.
8.

12

Month

Month

Month

Month

Month

ASSAY

Conclusion:

You might also like:

Analytical Method Validation


Cleaning Validation Procedures
Validation of QC Chemist
Type Of Validation Procedures
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:51 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Newer Posts Older Posts Home
Subscribe to: Posts (Atom)

Opening and closing of QC department


1.0 Purpose

To provide an instruction for opening and closing of QC department.

bjective : To provide a documented procedure for opening and closing of QC department.

Scope

3.0

Scope

This procedure is applicable for opening and closing of QC

department.
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary : QC Chemist / QC Officer

Secondary :

5.0 Procedure

Overall: QC Incharge

Opening Procedure.

Check the lock of main door of the department. It should be locked, if the door is not
locked inform to Security department.
Open the lock of Main door.
Check for obnoxious smell or odour and ensure the absence of odour or smell.
Switch ON the departmental lights.

Before switching ON the precise testing equipment ensure that the voltage stabilizer
through which power supply is made to such equipment is under operation.

Closing Procedure.

All the instruments except automatic instrument on which program is going on are
switched OFF.

Gas supply stations and cylinders are turned OFF.


Water supply is put OFF.
Fill the water supply tank of stability chambers with DM water.
Containers of all volatile and fuming liquids are properly closed.
Record room is locked.
Switch OFF the lights and air conditioner.
The department entrance door is locked.
Hand over the key of main door to security department.
You might also like:
Cleaning of sampling tools
1.0

Purpose

: To provide an instruction for cleaning of sampling tools.

2.0

Objective

: To provide a documented procedure for cleaning of sampling tools.

: This procedure is applicable for cleaning of sampling tools in QC Department.

4.0

Responsibility

5.0

Primary

Secondary : Overall: QC Incharge

Procedure

:
: QC Chemist / QC Officer

After sampling of raw materials / finished products, keep used tools in poly bag.

Affix the label TO BE CLEANED on poly bag.

Bring the un-cleaned tools to QC department for cleaning.

Remove tools from the bag and clean with water.

Ensure that there is no adhered material on the tool.

If required use suitable solvent for the cleaning of tools, then thoroughly wash with water.

Dry the sampling tools.

Place the tools in to new poly bag.

Affix the label CLEANED on poly bag.

Keep the cleaned sampling tools at its respective place.

You might also like:

Cleaning & Sanitisation of Sampling room


Washing of dispensing tools
Cleaning of Sampling Area
SAMPLING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:26 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction

s:
Standardization and storage of Reference and Working standards

Purpose : To provide instructions for selection, standardization and storage of reference and working
standards.

Objective: To provide documented procedures for selection, standardization and storage of reference and

cope :

working standard
This procedure is applicable for selection, standardization and storage of reference and working
standards in QC Department.
4.0

Responsibility :

Primary

Secondary : Overall QC Officer


5.0

: QC Chemist

Procedure

Selection and Storage of Reference Standards.

Reference standard/substance RS are issued by the respective Pharmacopoeia Commission.

They are the official standards.

Select current lots of the reference standards.

Store them in suitable container (e.g. desiccators) moisture free atmosphere under
temperature-controlled condition.

Maintain records for reference standard in respective logbook.

Selection, Standardization and Storage of Working Standards.


Working Standard shall be used for routine analysis.

Working standards should be standardized at regular intervals against the reference


standards.

Procedure for Raw Materials working standards.

Working standards are selected from amongst the raw materials received and approved by the
QC.

The selected raw materials working standards having high purity or negligible impurities and
low moisture content.

For solvent working standard shall be used from any reputed external manufacturer, pure
grade materials with certificate of analysis.

Selected raw material working standard shall be re-tested and note down the observations in
respective worksheet.

Procedure for Intermediates and Finished Products working standards.


Selected intermediate and finished product working standards can be prepared by repeated
crystallization in suitable solvents.

These working standard having high purity or negligible impurities and low moisture / loss on
drying content.

R&D and QA should authorize procedures for the preparation of intermediate and finished
products working standard.

Approved methods should be used for the preparation of working standard.

Working standards should be standardized at regular intervals against the reference standards
or previous working standards.

Frequency of standardization: Once in a Year.

Standardization should be done in triplicate analysis.

Loss On Drying / Moisture content and Assay tests parameters taken for standardization.

The average value should be reported.

Note down the observations in respective worksheet. And maintained relevant graphs in
respective working standard file.

Re-standardization shall be done within + 15 days from the said date.

Bottle of working standards should be stored in a desiccators having activated silica gel, and
kept at controlled temperature.

Information on status label includes name of material, working standard batch number, purity,
LOD / moisture content, date of preparation, valid up to etc.

Storage of working standards.

After standardization the working standard is divided into equal quantities

(Approx 2 to 10 gm each) and filled appropriate vials / bottles (minimum 2 to 4). Vials should
be cleaned and dried.

Each vial/bottle is to be used for three months from the date of opening and then discarded.
Open on date shall be mentioned on the label.

The other information of the label includes name of material, open on date, purity, LOD/Water
value, and use before date and valid up to.

The bottles are then sealed and kept in desiccators at the prescribed storage condition for the
future use.

The temp of the area of storage is maintained and monitored daily.

The last bottle is kept for use as a reference std. during next standardization. Reference
standard to be re-validated every year.
You might also like:

HANDLING OF REFERENCE STANDARDS, PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF


WORKING STANDARDS
ANALYTICAL REFERENCE NUMBERING SYSTEM
Preparation, Standardization and Shelf-life of Volumetric solutions, Standard
reagent solution and Indicators
OPERATION, CLEANING, STORAGE, CALIBRATION AND REGENERATION OF
HPLC COLUMN
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:23 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post

Reaction
s:
Preparation, Standardization and Shelf-life of Volumetric solutions, Standard reagent
solution and Indicators

Purpose

: To provide instructions for the Preparation, Standardization and Shelf-life of Volumetric solutions,
Standard reagent solution and Indicators.

Objective : To provide documented procedures for Preparation, Standardization and Shelf life of Volumetric
solutions, Standard reagent solution and Indicators

cope

: This procedure is applicable for preparation, standardization and shelf life of

volumetric

solutions, standard reagent solution and indicators in QC Department.


4.0

Responsibility :

Primary

Secondary : Overall: QC Officer


5.0

: QC Chemist

Procedure

Volumetric Solutions

Volumetric solution shall be prepared as mentioned in the respective procedure.

Volumetric solutions shall be prepared by accurately weighing a specified quantity & dissolving
it to produce a specific volume.

Records shall be maintained in respective logbook.

Volumetric solutions shall be standardized by titration against a primary standard or by titration


with a standard solution that has been recently standardized against a primary standard.

Record shall be maintained.

Volumetric solutions shall be standardized before use; shelf life of this solution is one month
from the date of preparation. Discard the solution after one month or if observed hazy.
Note: Strength of the volumetric solutions should not deviate more than 10% of the prescribed
strength.

All volumetric solutions should be standardized in triplicate set & % RSD should not be more
than 0.20 %. Average value shall be reported.

All the bottles should be labeled indicating the name, strength of the solution, date of
preparation, signature of the person who prepared it, use before date, standardization due on,
date of standardization.

Records shall be maintained for each solution starting with the value determined when the
solution was prepared & continuing with the values determined throughout the shelf life of the
solutions in respective register.

This record shall be retained for at least 1 year after the solution has expired.

Solutions of limited stability should be prepared on the day of use & discarded on completion
of analysis.

Standard Reagent Solutions:

Standard Reagent solutions shall be prepared as mentioned in the respective procedure.

Standard Reagent solutions shall be prepared by accurately weighing a specified quantity &
dissolving to produce a specific volume.

Records shall be maintained in respective register.

All the bottles should be labeled indicating the name, strength of the standard reagent solution,
date of preparation, signature of the person who prepared it, use before date.

Shelf life of these standard reagent solutions is Three months from the date of preparation.
Discard the solution after three months or if observed hazy.

This record shall be retained for at least 1 year after the solution has expired.

Indicators:

Use readymade indicators of MERCK make.


You might also like:

PREPARATION AND STANDARDISATION OF VOLUMETRIC SOLUTIONS AND


REAGENTS

Preparation and Maintenance of Standard Operating Procedure


Standardization and storage of Reference and Working standards
Instructions for Self Life of Documents
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:17 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Sampling of Raw Material
1.0 Purpose

: To provide instructions for sampling of Raw Material for Testing Purpose.

Objective: To provide a documented procedure for raw material sample quantity for testing.
3.0 Scope : This procedure for raw material sample method for testing in QC Department.
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary

Secondary : Overall: QC Officer

: QC Chemist

5.0 Procedure

On receiving the requisition of the raw material from the store. The QC Chemist will draw the
sample from store with proper safety. If sample is in tanker from outside factory gate.

Sample will be done by the chemist with equipments such as.


If the sample is in crystal form & powder form the sample will be taken by

SS sample tube.

If the sample is in liquid form then sample will be taken by glass sample tube.
If the sample is in tanker the chemist will take the sample from the each compartment of the
tanker of the bottom. And top of the each compartment with the help of glass sample tube.

Amount of the sample to be drawn.

If the sample is in solid form (like crystal or powder) then 50.0 Gms of the sample to be
withdraw.
If the sample is in liquid form then 250.0ml of the sample to be withdraw.

Sample to be taken from each batch or lot as per the package label. If the package are less
than 10. The sample should be drawn from each & every package is more than 10. Then
sample should be taken as per this rule n + 1.

We after drawing the sample chemist will put the label of UNDER TESTING on the package or
drums from where sample has been taken.

Chemist will bring the sample to QC lab and test the sample as per SOP of testing method.

If the sample is approved as per SOP then sample will be approved QC Manager and test
report will be sent to store incharge and production incharge and chemist will put the approved
label on the package of the new material and remove the under test label.

If the sample is not passed as per SOP testing method. The QC Manager will reject the raw
material and sent the report to the store incharge and plant in- charge, after that QC Chemist
will put the REJECT label on the package or drum and remove the UNDERTESITNG label.

here n = Number of package


You might also like:

SAMPLING OF STERILE RAW MATERIAL


Sampling, testing and release of raw materials
RAW MATERIAL (RM) SAMPLING, ANALYSIS AND APPROVAL (NON-STERILE)
RETESTING AND RE SAMPLING OF RAW MATERIALS
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:01 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Wednesday, December 29, 2010


Internal Audit Plan as per GMP

This document describes the conduct of the Management review of the quality system for GMP Conforma
Certification, including the conduct of an internal audit to assure the system meets the requirements of
Guidelines and is effectively implemented..

To Provide Documented Procedure for review of the quality system for GMP Conformance Certification, inclu
the conduct of an internal audit to assure the system meets the requirements.
To define role/responsibility of various functions responsible for Internal audit
4.0
o

Responsibility

Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee: Arranges for the internal audit and gather
information for the Management Review.

QA Management Committee: Provides all information as required by the Board of Internal Audit
Management Review Committee and is responsible for follow-up corrective and preventive actions.

o
5.0

QA Internal Auditor(s): Conduct the internal audit according to GMP.


Procedure :

The QA Management Committee, by consensus, selects three qualified individuals for the Board of Inte
Audit and Management Review Committee. Members to the Committee serve until they are replaced.

The Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee arranges for the half yearly internal aud
be conducted.

The date for the audit is established by mutual agreement between the Board of Internal Audit

Management Review Committee and the General Manager Production and Asst. Manager Production (AMP

The audit is conducted by any member of the board or Internal auditor qualified to participate on
Certification Board so long as the auditor is not a member of the QA Management Committee, is qualified
knowledgeable in certification, auditing.

The audit must be conducted at least every 06 months.

During the audit, personnel responsible for the area audited are immediately notified of the outcome of
audit of their area.

During an audit, it is possible that a difference of opinion can arise as to the severity of an observation.

important not to spend too much time debating the merits of the observation. If it does not appear that

difference of opinion can be resolved, then the auditee should be informed that the audit report is subjec
review by the Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee and the QA Management

The draft report is issued to the Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee within
calendar days. The Committee members review and comment on the report and a final report is issued.

The final internal audit report is submitted to the QA Management Committee.

The QA Management committee drafts a response to the audit report that is finalized after review:

Findings, nonconformities, trends, and other opportunities for improvement are identified; investigate

determine the causes; and corrective/preventive actions are developed. These actions are implemented
soon as possible and recorded.

The response to the internal audit report is submitted to the Board of Internal Audit and Management Rev
Committee for their concurrence.

Upon agreement on the response to the internal audit, the Board of Internal Audit and Management Rev

Committee prepares a complete Certification Program Management Review Report that includes,
appropriate,:

Results of internal and external audits

Feedback from clients and interested parties related to the fulfillment of the Certification Process

Feedback concerning impartiality

Follow-up actions from previous Certification Program Management Review Reports

The status of corrective or preventive actions

The fulfillment of objectives

Changes that could effect the management system

Appeals and complaints

The Board of Internal Audit and Management Review Committee submit their Certification Prog
Management Review Report to the QA Management Committee.

The Certification Program Management Review Report with the response to the internal audit is discusse

the next meeting of the full Board. The expected outputs of the review includes decisions and actions rela
to:

Improvement of the effectiveness of the management system and its processes.

Resource needs.

Decisions and actions of the Board are documented in the Board Minutes and all open Corrective/Preven
Actions are reviewed and their status documented at all subsequent quarterly Board Meetings.

Effectiveness of completed actions is reviewed at the next Program Management Review.

6.0

Abbreviations :

GMP: Good Manufacturing Practice

QA : Quality Assurance

You might also like:

Self Audit Checklist for


Self Audit Checklist for
Self Audit Checklist for
Self Audit Checklist for
Quality Control of Capsules

Maintenance Department
Production Department
Quality Control Department
Store Department

Quality control should be carried out during all stages of manufacturing operation which is the primary
requirement of good manufacturing practices.
Emptyhard capsules
According to Japanese Pharmacopoeia, the test called purity uses five capsules which are tested
individually. Each is placed in a 100 ml conical flask and shaken vigorously after adding 50 ml of water

37C throughout the test. The capsule passes the test if it completely dissolves within 10 mins giving
odorless, neutral (or slightly acidic).
Weight variation
For hard capsules: Accurately weigh 10 capsules. By suitable means the contents of each capsule should
be removed. The weights of emptied shells should be recorded individually. The difference of both the
weights will yield the net weight of the contents. Then calculate acceptance value.
For soft capsules: pre weigh 10 capsules. Cut the capsules by suitable means (either scissors or any
open blade) remove the contents by washing with a suitable solvent and let the solvent evaporate by
placing them at room temperature for about 30 mins. Weigh the individual shells. Calculate the
acceptance value.
Content uniformity
Hard capsules containing 25 mg or more of the drug contents should meet content uniformity
requirements.
Assay 10 capsules individually and calculate the acceptance value.
The requirement is met if the acceptance value of 10 capsules is less than or equal to 15%. If acceptance
value is greater than 15% or is about 25 % then, test the next 20 units and calculate the acceptance
value. The 30 capsules if less than or equal to 15% and no individual unit is 1-25*0.01 nor more than
1+25*0.01.
Calculation of acceptance value:
(Reference value-mean of individual contents ) + acceptability constant * sample standard deviation
Disintegration:
The disintegration of capsules is different from those of tablets because the determination of end point is
difficult owing to the adhesive nature of shell. The shell pieces after disintegration may agglomerate
forming large mass of gelatin taking more time to dissolve and may adhere to the mesh thus, blocking the
holes.
According to USP, place one dosage unit in each of the tubes of the basket with water or any other
specified medium (depends on individual monograph) maintained at 37 + 2C. Attach a removable wire
cloth with a plain square weave of 1.8-2.2 mm of mesh aperture and a wire diameter of 0.60-0.655 mm to
the surface of upper rack of the basket assembly. Observe the capsules for a time limit (specified in
individual monograph), at the end of prescribed time, all of the capsules must have been disintegrated
excluding the fragments from the capsule shell. If 1 or 2 capsules fail, the test should be repeated on
additional of 12 capsules. Then, not fewer than 16 of the total 18 capsules tested should disintegrate
completely.
Dissolution
Place each of the capsules in the apparatus 1, excluding air bubbles from the surface of the capsule.
Operate immediately at specified rate within specified dissolution medium at 37 + 0.5C. Aliquots should
be withdrawn at specified time points mentioned in individual monograph.
The requirements are met if the quantity of active ingredients dissolved conforms the following:
1) At stage 1 (S1): When 6 capsules are tested, amount of each of the dissolved content should not be
less than +/- 5% of the mentioned in monograph.
2) At stage 2 (S2): when 6 capsules are tested, the average of 12 (both from step 1and 2) should be
equal to or greater than 15% and no capsule should be than 15%.

3) At stage 3 (S3): when 12 capsules are tested, the average of 24 capsules (all 1,2 and 3 steps) should
be equal to or greater than the amount mentioned in the monograph, not more than two units are less
than 15% and no unit s less than 25%.
NOTE: 15%, 25% represent Q1 and Q2 unless and otherwise mentioned in the monograph.
Quality is not the step that can be incorporated at last, it is mandatory and should be inbuilt into the
products to, make this happen, apart from all these mandatory tests certain other tests can be performed
like
Raw materials1
The gelatin of the capsule shells should be assayed for various physical properties like bloom strength 3,
viscosity and its loss (by atomic force microscopy).4 Chemical tests like purity, microbial properties, and
limits for heavy metals like arsenic, ash content should be determined.
The colorants should also be checked for purity, limits for heavy metals, color properties, dye content,
subsidiary dye content and color value.5
Machine output
The manufacturing machines output should be monitored continuously via the dimensional correctness
during each lot production.
The color of the capsules should be checked against a standard strip; in case of any changes the gelatin
solution should be adjusted by adding standardized dye solutions which can be ensured via thin layer
chromatography.
Moisture content
Moisture content can be monitored with the aid of data the drying kilns can be adjusted.
Loss on drying
Determination of loss on drying via the oven method consumes more time. To prevent this advanced
methods like infrared balances, humidity meter etc.
Sorting of defects
After electronic or manual inspection, they are sampled by quality control inspectors. The results should
meet the inspection plan, if not the capsules should be resorted or rejected depending upon frequency of
faults.
Printing inspection
Quality inspectors sample the lot and are inspected for quality of print. The results will again be compared
with the inspection plan and in case if it does not match then, either capsules should be resorted or
rejected depending upon number of faults present.
Final inspection
After the capsules are placed in final containers, samples are checked for various parameters like
dimensions, physical defects and color. These samples are also subjected to various microbial tests also.

You might also like:

Functions of Quality control department


CLEANING OF QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
CONTROL OF ISSUANCE OF RECORD OF ANALYSIS
Labeling by Quality control department
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 5:39 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:

Friday, December 17, 2010


Calibration of Disintegration test apparatus
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down the procedure for operation and calibration of Disintegration test
apparatus

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Control Chemist / Quality Assurance Officer.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1

FOR GENERAL CLEANING


4.1.1 Ensure that the power supply to the apparatus is switched OFF before cleaning.

Clean the equipment with a clean dry cloth per day. Occasionally wet cloth dipped in dilute
soap solution may be used. Precaution has to be taken to clean the equipment immediately
with dry cloth to remove the moisture.
4.1.2

Clean the beaker and basket at the end of every operation.


4.2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4.2.1 Ensure the apparatus is properly connected to the power supply.
4.2.2 When the power is switched ON the TIMER and TEMP. shows digital value.
4.2.3 Set the temperature 37C by using SET, TEMP. , D , , DISP.SEL and ENTER

keys.

4.2.4 Set the timer 15.00 by using SET, TIME. , D , , DISP.SEL and ENTER keys.
4.2.5 Start the temperature by push the ENTER key.
4.2.6 Fill the beaker of DT apparatus with Purified water and adjust the temperature
between 37 1 OC
4.2.7 Fix the beaker in its position and adjust the level of water so that when the basket
is in upper most position, wire mesh of the basket is 25 mm below the water level, and when it is
at lower most position the wire mesh is at least 25 mm above the bottom of the beaker.
4.2.8 Once the set temperature is attain 37 1 OC.
4.2.9 In case of dispersible tablets, water temperature should be maintained within 15
to 25 OC.
4.2.10 Place on tablet / capsule in each of the tube and insert a disc in each of the tube.
4.2.11 Start the apparatus and Note the time taken by the last tablet / capsule for
complete disintegration.
4.2.12 Switch OFF the apparatus and power supply after the test is over, clean the
basket, discs and beaker.
4.3

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
4.3.1 Follow steps 4.2.1 to 4.2.7

4.3.2 Start the basket rack assembly and Timer simultaneously.


4.3.3 Place the standardized calibrated thermometer to record the actual temperature against the
temperature displayed.
4.3.4

Note the temperature of water in the beaker and Oscillation per minute of the basket-rack
assembly.

4.3.5

Switch OFF the apparatus and record the observations in the calibration record as per
annexure 1.

4.3.6 Report and discrepancy observed during calibration or operation of the instrument to Quality
Assurance Manager and notify the defect to Service Engineer to rectify the defect. Affix Under
Maintenance label on the instrument.
4.4

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

4.4.1 The temperature shall be between 37 1 OC.


4.4.2 The frequency of basket rack shall be between 29 to 32 per minute.
4.5

FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION

Once in a month and after each maintenance job.


4.6

ABBREVIATIONS :
QA = Quality Assurance
DT = Disintegration test

5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period
7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants


--

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: For Calibration File

Certified Copy No. 3

: For Display Near The Disintegration

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURE I

INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION RECORD


Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Effective from:

Name of Instrument

: Disintegration Test Apparatus

Instrument Ser.

Page No. : 1 of 1

No.
Make & Model

Calibration date

Calibration due on

Sr.No.

PARAMETER

Strokes per min. Basket 1

Strokes per min. Basket 2

Temperature by probe. Basket 1

Temperature by Standard thermometer .

OBSERVATIONS

LIMIT
29- 32 cycles /
min.

Basket 1
5

Temperature by probe. Basket 2

Temperature by Standard thermometer.

37 1 OC

Basket 2
7

Distance travel by Basket 1

Distance travel by Basket 1

Standard Thermometer Identification No. : ________

53-57 mm

REMARKS : Satisfactory / Not satisfactory.


You might also like:
Calibration of Friability test apparatus
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF DISSOLUTION TEST APPARATUS
Operating Leak test Apparatus
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF BULK DENSITY APPARATUS

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:19 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post
Reaction
s:
Calibration of Friability test apparatus
1.0

OBJECTIVE : To lay down the procedure for operation and calibration of friability test
apparatus

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Control Chemist / QA Chemist

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager / QA Manager.

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1

GENERAL CLEANING
4.1.1 Clean the apparatus free of dust with dry cloth from out side every day.

4.1.2 Clean the rotating disc and unloading pan from inside with dry cloth at the start and end of every
operation. Wet cloth may be used occasionally if cleaning is not proper with dry cloth but this
should follow drying of the inner surface by first wiping with dry cloth and exposure to
atmosphere air.
4.2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4.2.1 Ensure that apparatus is properly connected with power supply.


4.2.2 Weigh tablets to be tested and record the weight {WI}.
4.2.3 Switch on the main switch of power supply.
4.2.4 Press MODE key and select count mode.
4.2.5 Press SET button and set the RPM to 25 with the help of numerical keys (0 to 9) & press
ENTER
4.2.6 Key located on the front side of the instrument.
4.2.7 Load the weighed tablets in the drum, close the lid and secure it by tightening he screw and
press ENTER and then press START to run test.
4.2.8

After the completion of set rotations, the apparatus will automatically unload the tablets into the
tray. Observe the tablets.
4.2.9 Dedust the tablets, weigh and record the weight {W2}.
Calculate the percentage Friability by the following formula;
Initial Wt. of Tablets (W1) Wt. of tablets After 100 rotation (W2)

X 100

Initial Wt. of Tablets (W1)


4.2.10 Dstroy the tested tablets as per SOP.
4.3

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

4.3.1

Switch on the power supply.

4.3.2

Set the RPM to 25 and start the machine simultaneously with the stop watch. Count the actual
rotations and not the time required for the same.

4.3.3

Similarly set the RPM to 100 and note the time required and actual rotations.

4.3.4

Apparatus is in proper working condition if,


4.3.4.1

Time required for 25 rotations is 1 min 05 sec.


4.3.4.2

Time required for 100 rotations is 4 min 20 sec.

4.3.7

4.3.5

Record the observation in the calibration record as per Annexure 1.

4.3.6

Affix a Calibration Status label on the instrument.

In case of any discrepancy, report the observations to QC manager / QA Manager and notify
the defect to Engg. Department. Affix an UNDER MAINTENANCE label on the instrument.

4.4.

FREQUENCY
Once in a month and after each maintenance job.
.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period
7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants


--

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: For Calibration File

Certified Copy No. 3

: For Display Near The Friability Test Apparatus

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURE 1

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.: 00
Effective from:

Page No. : 1 of 1

Friability Test Apparatus

Name of Instrument
Instrument Ser. No.

Make & Model

: Electrolab.

Calibration date
Calibration due on

:
:

SET
ROTATION
Sr.

ROTATION
ROTATIONS
DISPLAYED

No.

OBSERVED
MA
NUALLY

TIM
E

ACCEPTANCE
CRITERIA

25

1 min 05
sec

1.
100
2

4 min
20 sec

You might also like:

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF DISSOLUTION TEST APPARATUS


Calibration of Disintegration test apparatus
Operating Leak test Apparatus
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF KARL FISCHER APPARATUS
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:12 PM 0 comments


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Links to this post

Reaction
s:
Calibration of serological water bath

BJECTIVE: To lay down the procedure for operation and calibration of serological water bath.
2.0

RESPONSIBILITY:
Q.C. Chemist

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY:
Head - Q.C.

4.0

PROCEDURE:

4.1.

PRECAUTIONS
4.1.1 Ensure that the Water Bath is cleaned every week .
4.1.2 Ensure that water bath is never operated without DM water, otherwise heater will

be damaged.
4.1.3 Check that water does not fall on the thermostat knob ( bellow the tray ).
4.1.4 Ensure that the mercury bulb of the thermometer is always dipped in water.
4.2

WORKING PROCEDURE
4.2.1 Maintain the DM water level in the water bath & switch 'ON' the main switch of the
Water Bath.
4.2.2 Set the thermostat knob to the desired temperature setting on the knob ( 0 100
settings ).
4.2.3

If desired temperature is not achieved, then fine tune the thermostat knob as per

requirement.
4.2.4

Switch OFF the water bath when not in use.


4.3

CLEANING OPERATION

Frequency: once in a week

4.3.1 Drain all the water from the Water Bath.

4.3.2 Scrap the side and bottom of Water Bath with help of Nylon gauze.
4.3.3. Wash with soap solution and rinse thoroughly it with DM water.
4.3.4

Wipe the surface of Water Bath with cloth.


4.3.5 Frequency for cleaning:
4.4

CALIBRATION
4.4.1

Once in a week

Frequency: Quarterly once

Set the temperature of serological water bath at 45C and switch on the

instrument.
4.4.2 Wait till temperature gets stabilized .
4.4.3

Note the temperature by calibrated thermometer and record it as initial

temperature.
4.4.4 After one hour again note the temperature.
4.4.5 Follow the similar procedure by setting the temperature to 100C.
4.4.6 Record the observations in the calibration format as mentioned in annexure I
Acceptance Criteria: The temperature should be within 2 C of the set

4.4.7
temperature.

4.4.8 Affix calibration tag , if calibration is satisfactory & under maintenance if found
unsatisfactory.
4.5

ABBREVIATION
C

5.0

- Degree centigrade

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

: Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

: For Calibration File

Certified Copy No. 3

: For Display Near Water Wath

Original Copy

: beginning QUALITY ASSURANCE.


ANNEXURE I
INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION RECORD

REF. SOP NO.:

Revision No.: 00

Page No. : 1 of 1

Effective from:

Serological Water Bath/Water wath

Manufactured By

Medica Instrument/

Identification No.

Date Of Calibration

Next Calibration Due On

Name Of Instrument

Set

Initial

Temperature

Temperature

Temperature

after 1 Hr. ( C )

( C )

Limits

Remarks

( C )

45

43 47 C

100

98 102 C

Frequency : Quarterly once.


REMARKS : Satisfactory / Not satisfactory.
You might also like:
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF REFRACTOMETR

SAMPLING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS

1.0

OBJECTIVE:

To lay down a procedure for sampling of packing materials so as to get the representative sample
of the whole lot.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

2.1

The Chemist / Assistant - Quality Control Packaging shall be:

2.1.1. Responsible for receiving the GRN and entering the details in Packaging Material
register.
2.1.2. Responsible for the ensuring appropriate cleanliness of sampling area and
integrity of consignment.
2.1.3. Responsible for ensuring proper documentation for sampling and assembling of
adequate number of samples for analysis purpose.
2.1.4. Responsible for proper sampling of PM as per Military Standard 105 D from the
pack (s) and its appropriate identification on each sampled container (s).
2.1.5. Responsible for carrying out analysis of material (s) accurately & precisely.
2.1.6. Responsible for maintaining the Reserve Sample and its Record.
2.1.7. Responsible for ensuring proper labelling on packs.
2.1.8. Responsible for recording the data in the samplers remarks and test data sheet.
2.1.9. Responsible for intimating to Executive QC, in case of any non-conformance.

2.2

The Executive - Quality Control shall be:

2.2.1
Responsible for verifying the recorded data of sampled consignment by Quality Control
Officers and review of the same.
2.2.2
Responsible for updating the document as per regulatory requirement
2.2.3
Responsible for imparting training to sub-ordinates.
2.2.4
Responsible for taking decisions on non-conformance in co-ordination with Head
Quality Assurance / Quality Control

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Manager Quality Control

4.0

PROCEDURE:

4.1
Receive Goods Receipt Note (GRN) from Warehouse and record relevant
informations in packaging material register (Refer Annexure-1).
4.2
Take out Photocopy of Samplers Check List - PM (Refer Annexure 2).
4.3
The separate samplers remark shall be used for each lot of Batches.
4.4
Prepare the UNDER TEST label from the computer system to affix on the
consignment.
4.5
Check the delivered items to ensure that the quantity received corresponds with
the GRN Quantity
4.6
Fill the necessary details in Samplers Check List by taking the reference of
Goods Receipt Note (GRN). If discrepancy found in GRN inform to warehouse for
corrective action.
4.7
Go to the Quarantine area and identify the material to be sampled from
Quarantined label which is affixed by Warehouse on the packs.
4.8
In case of Aluminium and PVC foils carry out the sampling under Laminar Air
Flow (LAF).
4.9
Cleaning of LAF shall be carried out on every alternate day or early if required.
The LAF shall be cleaned with wet mop followed by dry mop.
4.10
The cleaning shall be recorded in the cleaning record for LAF as given in
Annexure - 3.
4.11
Ensure that the surrounding area is clean, if not get it clean, prior to start of the
sampling.
4.12
Check the packing condition of the material and details mentioned on the Under
Test labels.
4.13
Verify that the Quarantine Labels are affixed by Warehouse Personnel.
4.14
In case of any discrepancies intimate to Executive / Head - Quality Assurance or
Head - Quality Control for necessary action.
4.15
Ensure that packs are cleaned externally and open the packages only after
ensuring the proper cleaning. Observe the material for any abnormalities and record it on
the Samplers Check List.
4.16
Check the following points during sampling of the material: 4.16.1
Mode of packing,
4.16.2
Indication of packing,
4.16.3
Details available on pack (Containers),
4.16.4
No. of packs (containers) received,
4.16.5
Total quantity received,
4.16.6
No. of packs (containers) sampled,
4.16.7
Quantity to be sampled.
4.16.8
Name of the person who sampled along with date of sampling.

4.17

Withdraw the samples randomly by opening different containers /

Boxes as per n +1 and take out sampling quantity for visual inspection as per sampling
plan MIL STD 105D Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) (Refer Annexure 5).
4.18
Note down the sampled quantity in Samplers checklist based on the number of
packages to be sampled.
4.19
Examine the sampled material as per AQL against the approved standard for
general appearance, deviation from normal visual quality, colour, text etc. wherever
applicable.
4.20
Record the results in approved Visual Inspection Report for Aluminium foil and
PVC Foil.
4.21
After completion of sampling the material pack shall be resealed with BOPP
Tape or tied with the help of cable tie.
4.22
Affix the UNDER TEST refer Annexure 4. to all the rolls of sticker labels,
foils and every container of rubber plugs. For all other packaging materials at least one
UNDER TEST Label shall be affixed on bottom container/ pack of each pallet.
4.23
Affix the SAMPLED BY QC (Refer Annexure 4) sticker label duly signed and
mentioning the container number according to sampling plan, on outer container of the
material from which sample is taken.
4.24
Check that the number of packs is correct as mentioned in under test label.
4.25
Take out composite sample for analysis as per respective Packing Material
Specifications. Put the sampled quantity in self-sealing polybag bearing the label of
SAMPLE FOR ANALYSIS Refer annexure 4.
4.26
Carry out testing of the packaging material as per the laid down specifications of
respective material.
4.27
The sampling procedure described above will not be applicable for Tertiary
Packaging material like Shipper, pad, partition and corrugated trays. For these materials
only one unit shall be collected and carry out the analysis as per laid down specification.
5.0
REASON FOR REVISION
Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer
Trainee
Period

---

-Manager QC
Chemist / Associate QC Packaging
One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1


Certified Copy No. 2
Certified Copy No. 3

: Head of Department Quality Control


: File Copy for Packaging Department
: Head PLANT OPERATIONS

Certified Copy No. 4


Original Copy

: For Display in Packaging Laboratory


: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE

8.0

ANNEXURES:

Annexure - 1

Annexure - 2
Annexure - 3

: Format for Packaging Material Register

: Format for Samplers Remarks


: Format for Cleaning Record of LAF.

Annexure 4 : Format for labels of UNDER TEST, SAMPLE FOR ANALYSIS and
SAMPLED
Annexure 5 : 105 D Military Standard Acceptable Quality Level Chart

9.0
REFERENCE:
APPROVAL AND REJECTION OF PACKAGING MATERIALS
1.0.

OBJECTIVE:

The objective of this SOP is to describe the procedure for Approval and

Rejection of Packaging
Material.

2.0.

RESPONSIBILITY:

2.1

The Chemist / Officer Quality Control Packaging shall be:

2.1.1. Responsible for ensuring proper documentation of sampling and adequate number
of quantity sampled.
2.1.2. Responsible for carrying out analysis of packing material (s) accurately & precisely
by following specification and standard testing procedure.
2.1.3. Responsible for maintaining the Packaging Material Register.
2.1.4. Responsible for preserving the reserve sample along with Analytical Test Report.
2.1.5. Responsible for recording the correct results in the Analytical Test Report for every
PM in a stipulated time.

2.2
2.1.1

The Executive Quality Assurance shall be:


Responsible for verify and review of the recorded results and of the
ensuring the results are within the
standard limits.

2.1.2

Responsible for updating the document as per regulatory requirement

2.1.3

Responsible for ensuring all laboratory instruments are calibrated and


working satisfactorily.

2.1.4

Responsible for final disposition of material under consultation with


Head QA/QC.

2.1.5

Responsible for imparting training to sub-ordinates including Good


Laboratory Practice.

3.0.

ACCOUNTABILITY:

Executive Quality Assurance

4.0.

4.1.

PROCEDURE:

The sampling of the packaging material shall be carried out as per the SOP

4.2.

Before starting the analysis take out Standards and Results Sheet from
Respective Product File and take out photocopy and get it issued from Sectional
Head by signing the space provided.

4.3.

The sampled items shall be analysed as per respective laid down specifications
and general test procedure. The results shall be recorded in the Analytical Test
Report and compare for its limits.

4.4.

Prepare Certificate Of Analysis in case the material is being used, to the


Regulated Market. (Refer Annexure 1).

4.5.

Then compile the results along with Samplers Remark and keep one Reserve
Sample for printed packaging material by affixing Reserve Sample Label on nonprinted part (Refer Annexure 2 for Reserve Sample Label).

4.6.

The Goods Receipt Note (GRN) along with complete analytical report shall be
checked thoroughly by another person.

4.7.

Then this complete report shall be forwarded to the Head QC or Executive QC


for further disposition (Approval / Rejection).

4.8.

The results are not within the specified limits and standards, the material shall be
rejected

4.9.

If the material is rejected, the Material Rejection Note (Refer Annexure 3) shall
be prepared and get it approved from Head Plant Operation, Head QA / QC.

4.10.

If all parameters found within the prescribed range Executive or Head QA shall
approve the Analytical Test Reports and GRN.

4.11.

The report with regards to the disposition of the said consignment is then made &
the status label as whether it is APPROVED or REJECTED (Refer Annexure 2) shall
be generated by using the computer System.

4.12.

Affix the duly signed APPROVED / REJECTED label to the consignment.

4.13.

Each approved pack of packing material shall be identified by affixing the small
green label (Refer Annexure 2) having the A.R. No. for identity of the Consignment.

4.14.

Forward the approved / rejected copies of GRN to Warehouse for further actions.

4.15.
4.16.

File the entire report along with Quality Control GRN Copy.
Then Warehouse personnel shall shift the Approved / Rejected material in the
designated areas.
4.17.
The rejected consignment shall be shifted to the designated Rejected
Areas under lock and
Key.

4.18.
4.19.

5.0

The approved material is then used for Production as per requirement.


The shelf life of each individual packaging material is being work out, on the basis
of stability study of these materials. Till that time the shelf life of packing materials
is three years from the date of release of material.

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-- Manager Quality Control

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants - Quality Control Packaging

Period

-- One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2 : File Copy for Packaging Laboratory
Certified Copy No. 3 : Head Plant Operation.
Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

9.0

ANNEXURES:

Annexure 1

: Format for Certificate of Analysis

Annexure 2

: Approved, Rejected, Reserve Sample and A.R. No. Labels.

Annexure 3

: Format for Material Rejection Form.

9.0

REFERENCES:
In house

ANNEXURE 1
FORMAT FOR CERTIFICATE OF ANALYSIS

CERTIFICATE OF ANALYSIS

ALKEM
LABORATORIES LIMITED

PACKAGING MATERIAL
(NAME)

DAMAN
Material name:
Item code:

Batch No.:

Mfr. Name:

Supplier Name:

Challan no.:

Challan Date:

GRN No. :

Date Received:

Quantity received:

Containers Received:

Containers sampled:

Date Of Sampling:

Sampled by:

A. R. No.:

TESTS

RESULTS

SPECIFICATIONS

APPROVED / REJECTED
Remarks: Sample COMPLIES / DOES NOT COMPLIES as per above Specification

ANALYST

CHECKED BY

APPROVED BY

(SIGNATURE / DATE)

(SIGNATURE / DATE)

(SIGNATURE / DATE)

K/QC/002/F-1/00

ANNEXURE 2
FORMAT FOR APPROVED, REJECTED, RESERVE SAMPLE AND A.R. NO.
LABEL
REF. SOP NO.: K/QC/002

Revision No.: 00

Page No.: 1
of 1

Effective from:

NAME
ITEM CODE
A.R. No.

B. No.

G.R. No

QTY.

POTENCY

NO. OF CONTAINERS

RETEST DATE

SIGN.

Date

ALKEM LABORATORIES LTD.. 333/1 KACHIGAM, DAMAN- 396210 ( U.T )

APPROVED
DOC/QC/001
ITEM CODE & NAME
A.R.NO

B. NO.

G.R. NO.

QTY.

POTENCY

NO. OF

CONTAINERS

SIGN.

Date

REJECTED
DOC/QC/002

RESERVE SAMPLE
A.R. No.

G.R.N. No.

Signature

Date

Analytical Reference No.


Sticker Label

(149P 2A/01)

ANNEXURE 3
FORMAT FOR MATERIAL REJECTION NOTE
To
Head Warehouse

Name Of Item:
Item Code No.:

Rejection Note No:

Name Of Manufacturer/Supplier:
GRN. No./Date:

A.R. No.

Challan No. / Date:

Qty. Received:

Batch No.

Qty. Rejected:

Date Of Analysis:
Reason For Rejection:

Remarks:

Prepared By. / Date

Checked By/Date
Rejection Approved By/ Date
(Executive QA)

Carbon Copy To:


1.

Head Plant Operation.

Head QA / QC

2.

Head Purchase.

K/QC/002/F-2/00

You might also like:

SAMPLING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS


RETESTING OF PACKAGING MATERIALS
REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ANALYTICAL RAW DATA
Responsibility of quality assurance in rejection.
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 4:30 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment

Responsibility of quality assurance in rejection.


1.0

Purpose

: To provide instructions for responsibility of quality assurance in rejection.

Objective : To provide a documented procedure for role of quality assurance in the handling of
rejection
Scope

: This procedure is applicable for the handling of rejection by quality assurance


department.

4.0

Primary: QA-Officer

Overall: QA-Manager

5.0

Responsibility :

Procedure:
Rejection of Raw Material:

Supply Rejected by QC
o

In case material does not meet specification parameters, QC raises an Out of


Specification (OOS) report along with attachments like report of analysis etc. and

forwards to QA for Approval, QA personnel will study available information / records /


documents of the material.
o

If QA find that supply needs to be rejected, QA In-charge will approve the Out of
Specification (OOS).

Rejection due to manufacturing activities


o

On receipt of Online rejection note from production department, inspect the rejection.

Approve the rejection by signing on Online Rejection Note.

If the quantity of rejection is very high, study the cause of rejection.

Based on study QA, suggest the corrective action.

If any corrective measures are required from the supplier, Inform to purchase
department for corrective actions.
You might also like:

Numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures and Index of Standard


Operating Procedure

0 Purpose: To provide instructions for numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures and
Index of Standard Operating Procedure. (SOPs).

0 Objective: To provide a documented procedure of numbering system for Standard Operating


Procedures and Index of Standard Operating Procedure. (SOPs)

3.0 Scope

: This procedure is applicable for numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures
and Index of Standard Operating Procedure. (SOPs).
4.0 Responsibility:

Primary: OfficerQA

Secondary: Manager-QA

5.0 Procedure:

SOP is prepared after studying total activities and interacting with all the concerned
Departments.

SOP is classified into following six main groups.

Sr. No.
1
2

Name of the Department.


Personnel and Administration
Production Department

Department
Code
PA
PR

SOP No.
ABC/XX/SOP/YYY
ABC/XX/SOP/YYY

3
4
5
6

Engineering Services
Quality Control Department
Quality Assurance
Store Department

MT
QC
QA
ST

ABC/XX/SOP/YYY
ABC/XX/SOP/YYY
ABC/XX/SOP/YYY
ABC/XX/SOP/YYY

Each departments SOPs having eleven digit code, e.g. ABC/XX/SOP/YYY

Where,
o

ABC = Name of City where plant located

SOP = Indicates Standard Operating Procedure

XX = Indicates department code (e.g. PA, PR, QC etc.)

YYY = Indicates Serial number of SOP (e.g. 001, 002, etc.)


After preparation of all SOPs, circulate the SOPs to respective department and give
training
You might also like:
Analytical report numbering

1.0

Purpose : To provide an instruction for analytical report numbering procedure (AR No.)

2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure for analytical report numbering.


3.0 Scope :
4.0

5.0

Responsibility :

Primary

Secondary : Overall: QC-Officer

: QC Chemist / QC-Officer

Procedure:

This procedure is applicable for analytical report numbering in QC department .

Analytical Report Numbering for Raw Material

Numbering of analytical report of raw material shall be in the form of R-XXX/YY/ZZ


For Raw material: R-XXX/YY/ZZ(e.g. R-001/09/09)
Where, R = raw material
XXX = serial no. (e.g. 001, 002,)
YY =month.

ZZ = year (e.g. 2009 as 09)

Analytical Report Numbering for Packing Material

Numbering of analytical report of packing material shall be in the form of P-XXX/YY/ZZ.


For Packing material: P-XXX/YY/ZZ (e.g. P-001/08/09)
Where, P = packing material
XXX = serial no. (e.g. 001, 002)
YY = month. (e.g.01,02.. )
ZZ = year (e.g. 2009 as 09)

Analytical Report Numbering for Intermediate


Numbering of analytical report of intermediate shall be in the form of
I-WWW/XXX/YY/ZZ.
For Intermediate: I- WWW/XXX/YY/ZZ (e.g. I-001/001/01/09)
Where,

= Intermediate

WWW = product code (001, 002, .)


XXX
YY
ZZ

= serial no. (e.g. 001, 002, .)


= month. (e.g.01,02.. )
=

year (e.g. 2009 as 09)

Analytical Report Numbering for Finished Product


Numbering of analytical report of finished product shall be in the form of XXX or WWW or
WW//XXX/YY/ZZ
For Finished product: WWW or WW/XXX/YY/ZZ (e.g. MBZ/001/01/09)
Where,

WWW or WW

= Short name of product (001, 002, .)

XXX = serial no. (e.g. 001, 002, .)


YY = month (e.g.01,02.. )
ZZ = year (e.g. 2009 as 09)

Analytical Report Numbering for Re-testing Raw Material

Numbering of analytical report of re-test raw material shall be in the form of

R-

XXX/ZZ/R1.
For re-test Raw material: R-XXX/ZZ/R1 (e.g. R-001/09/R1)
Where,

= raw material

XXX

= serial no. (e.g. 001, 002, .)

ZZ

= year (e.g. 2009 as 09)


R1

= re-test first time (e.g. R1, R2, .)

Analytical Report Numbering for Re-testing Intermediate

I- WWW/XXX /ZZ/I1
For Intermediate: I- WWW/XXX/ZZ/I1 (e.g. I-001/001/09/I1)
Where,

= intermediate

WWW = product code (001, 002, .)


XXX

= serial no. (e.g. 001, 002, .)

ZZ

= year (e.g. 2009as 09)


I1

= re-test first time ( e.g. I1, I2, .)

You might also like:

ANALYTICAL REFERENCE NUMBERING SYSTEM


Numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures and Index of Standard
Operating Procedure
REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ANALYTICAL RAW DATA
Code numbering system of packaging material

Record maintained by Quality control department

1.0 Purpose : To provide instructions for record maintained by quality control

department.
2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure for record maintained by

quality control department.


3.0 Scope : This procedure is applicable for record maintained by quality

control department.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary
: QC Chemist / QC Officer
Secondary :
Overall : QC In Charge
5.0 Procedure :
Following are control documents.

Standard Operating Procedures of Quality Control Department..

Specifications of Raw material.

Specifications of Packing material.

Specifications of In-process / intermediate.

Specifications of Finished product.

Standard Test Procedures of Raw material.

Standard Test Procedures of Packing material.

Standard Test Procedures of In-process / intermediate.

Standard Test Procedures of Finished product.

List of Instruments.
Following are records.

Raw materials testing records.

Packing materials testing records.

In-process / intermediates testing records.

Finished products testing records.

Instrument calibration records.

Stability study records.

Instrument calibration records.

Glassware calibration records.

Raw material inward logbook

Raw material work sheet issuance logbook.

Intermediate inward logbook.

Intermediate work sheet issuance logbook.

Finished product inward logbook.

Finished product work sheet issuance logbook.

In process samples inward logbook.

Instrument uses logbooks.

HPLC column logbook.

Stability chamber logbook.

Laboratory cleaning logbook.

Volumetric solution logbook.

Standard reagent solution logbook.

Indicator logbook.

Retention sample logbook.

Logbook issuance logbook.


You might also like:

Functions of Quality control department


1.0
2.0

Purpose : To provide an instruction for functions of quality control department.


Objective: To provide a documented procedure for functions of quality control
department.

3.0

Scope

: This procedure is applicable for functions of quality control department.

4.0

Responsibility :

Primary: QC Chemist / QC-Officer

Secondary : Overall: QC In charge

5.0 Procedure :

List of activities of quality control department.

Testing and release or rejection of all incoming raw materials, packing materials, inprocess / intermediates and finished products as per specified specifications.

Maintaining testing records as per standard procedures for raw materials, packing
materials, in-process / intermediates and finished products.

Calibration of laboratory instrument / equipment.


Performing stability study.
Control sample storage.
Analytical method validation.
Preparation of standard volumetric solutions and maintain standardization record.
Maintain Labeling procedure at all the stages and records.
Maintain working / reference standard record of products.
Analysis of complaint samples as and when required.
To conduct technical audit / self-inspection.

Follow safety norms at all the stage during handling of chemicals and using
instruments.

Follow good laboratory practices.


You might also like:

Labeling by Quality control department

Cleaning of HPLC columns

1.0 Purpose : To provide an instruction for washing of HPLC columns.


2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure for washing of HPLC

columns.
3.0 Scope

QC Department.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary : QC Chemist / QC-Officer
Secondary : Overall QC In charge
5.0 Procedure :
After completion of analysis stop the pump, keep the reservoir in the distilled

& filtered water.


Open the purging valve of the pump; purge the system for 3 to 5 minutes to

: This procedure is applicable for washing of HPLC columns in

remove air bubbles. Close the purging valve by decreasing the flow rate up to

zero.
Wash the HPLC column initial with HPLC grade water for about 15-20

minutes.
Then wash the HPLC column with respective solvent mixtures (e.g. 50:50

Methanol: Water or Acetonitrile: Water) for minimum hr to 1 hr.

Finally wash the HPLC column with respective solvent (Acetonitrile /

Methanol) for about 15-30 minutes.


Keep flow rate 0.5 ml / min or 1.0 ml / min. increase flow rate gradually.
Check the pH of eluent on pH paper (it should be neutral)
Store the HPLC column in solvent (acetonitrile or methanol).
Disconnect the HPLC column and keep it at respective column storage box.
Maintain the cleaning record in HPLC column logbook.
You might also like:

Re-testing of raw materials and intermediates

1.0

Purpose :

intermediates.

To provide an instruction for re-testing of raw materials and

2.0

materials and intermediates.


3.0
Scope : This procedure is applicable for re-testing of raw materials and

intermediates in QC department.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary : QC Chemist / QC Officer
Secondary : Overall: QC Incharge
Procedure:
After the receipt of re-testing intimation note from store department, QC

Objective: To provide a documented procedure for re-testing of raw

Chemist takes its entry in the respective Re-testing logbook and gives AR No. to

raw materials or intermediate.


AR No. Should be given as follows
For Raw material: R-XXX/ZZ/R1 (e.g. R-001/08/R1)
Where, R
= raw material
XXX = serial no. (e.g. 001, 002, .)
ZZ
= year (e.g. 2008 as 08)
R1
= re-test first time (e.g. R1, R2, .)
Collect samples as per sampling plan.
After completion of sampling, do the necessary critical tests (e.g. assay, LOD,
water content, pH, specific optical rotation etc.) as per the Standard Analytical

Procedure.
Raw material may also be approved on the basis of physical appearance.

After completion testing, put the status of approved / rejected on the

containers.
Re-testing of any raw materials should be four times only.
Frequency of re-testing for raw material is every year, and for intermediate is

every six months.


Re-testing should be performing on first come first out basis. The re-testing of

material should carry out, whose due date for re-test is earlier.
You might also like:

Dispensing of raw materials


1.0

Purpose : To define the procedure for dispensing of raw materials

2.0 Objective: To provide guidelines for dispensing of raw materials..


3.0

Scope

Department.

: This procedure applies to dispensing of raw materials in stores

4.0 Responsibility :

Follow up

Over all responsibility: Store Incharge.

5.0 Procedure

: Officer Stores

Stores Officer

Receive the raw material issue requisition and record the serial number, material code
and date of receipt. Check for the entries in all the columns viz. Dept, Batch Size., Batch
No. and signatures for requisite by and authorizes by. If any of these columns is
missing, return the requisition to production.

From the raw material stock register, check the quantities of material available and
quantities requested for. If any of the material in stock is less than the requisitioned
Quantity, inform to Stores Incharge.

Stores Incharge.

Check the materials in Under Test status. If the material requisitioned is


present in Under Test status, inform the Manager Production and Asst
Manager QC regarding the same. Hold the issue of the other materials
till the material is approved by QC.

Stores Assistant

Check the dispensing area for the following Cleanliness.

No other material is present in the area


The balance is clean and has been calibrated for the day.
Availability of cleaned dispensing devices (scoops, etc.)
Protective equipment has been worn as per the material safety data sheet.
Check the details of the material on the Approved Label.
o Name of the Material
o

Batch No.

Batch size.

A.R.No.

Quantity

No. of container.

Tare Wt

Gross Wt.

Net Wt.

Date

Signature

Check the tare weight of the empty container and note down on the dispensed label.

Select the bulk raw material container of appropriate AR No as per FIFO system.
Check the retest date on the label. If the retest date falls in the month of issue, inform
QC regarding the retesting.

Transfer the material to the dispensing area. Carefully transfer the material into the
container till the quantity required is transferred.

Note down the final weight of the container and record on the dispensing label for
gross weight.

Calculate the net weight and record on dispensing label and sign for issued by.
Close the bulk raw material container and transfer back the bulk raw material container
to the original space.

Repeat the steps for remaining materials of the raw l issue requisition one after the
other.

Never keep more than one material in the dispensing area. Transfer the second
material only after the first has been dispensed and transferred back to its original
space.

Always use clean dispensing devices and do not contaminate one with other material.
Enter the details of issue into the raw material stock register for the material.
Verify the quantities dispensed against the raw material issue requisition and sign for
Store officer.
Inform the Asst. Manager Production / Manager Production regarding the checking
of the material.
Material requisition will be made two copies. One copy will be kept in store department
and duplicate copy attach with B.M.R.
You might also like:

Dispensing of packing materials

Washing of dispensing tools


Receiving Liquid Raw Materials
Closing the Raw Material Stores
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:29 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reactions:

Receiving Liquid Raw Materials

Purpose : To provide the procedure for receiving liquid raw materials in road
tankers.

bjective

: To provide documented procedure for receiving liquid raw materials in road tankers.

Scope

: This procedure defines instructions for receiving liquid raw materials in road tankers in
the stores department.
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary : Officer Stores

Secondary: Stores In charge/ Manager Store.


5.0 Procedure

Receive and verify the delivery documents (DC, Performa Invoice, Central Excise
Invoice, COA) and check for the Purchase Order copy for the material. The documents
shall essentially consist of the following information.

Name of the material

Name of the supplier

Batch No. / Identification No.

Manufacturing date

Quantity of material including the units of measurement

Number & date of Purchase order

Contact the Purchase department, if PO copy for the material received is not available.

Check for the security inward stamp on the delivery documents and the signature of the
security personnel along with the Security inward number.

Inform QC Dept in writing about the arrival of tanker for tanking sample giving the
following details:

Date

Time of Reporting

Name of the Product

Name of the Supplier

Name of the manufacturer

Quantity

DC / Invoice No. & Date

If the sample from the tanker does not conform to the specification, inform the purchase
department regarding the REJECTION. Return back the tanker.

On receipt of approval of the tanker from the QC, assign a Stores Asst. to the tanker
and send it to approved public weighing bridge for taking the gross weight.

Instruct the tanker driver to position his vehicle near to the unloading point.

Inform the engineering personnel to make arrangements for connecting the delivery
lines to the tanker, connect the earthing cable from the tanker outlet to the earthing point
to ensure the discharge of static electricity.

Ensure all the safety precautions for unloading the material from the road tanker have
been taken.

After the unloading is completed verify the compartments of the tanker by checking the
individual compartments and opening the outlet valves completely.

Assign a store asst. and send the tanker for weighing to the weight bridge.

On receipt of the weight of the empty tanker compute the net weight of the material
transferred. Check against the delivery documents and compute the difference if any.

Enter in the raw material inward register including the actual content of the material
transferred.

Sign for received on the delivery documents and retain the original copy.

Return the duplicate copy to the driver and mention deviations observed for suppliers
reference.

Prepare the GRN and forward the same to the QC Dept for analysis of composite from
the storage tank.

On receipt of report from QC, forward copy of the GRN to Accounts and

Purchase

department.
You might also like:

Dispensing of raw materials

Raw material Weighing

nstructions for Engineering department as per safety and cGMP requirements

Purpose : To provide store management instructions for Engineering department as per safety and
cGMP requirements.

Objective

Scope

: To provide documented procedure of store management instructions for engineering


department as per safety and cGMP requirements.
: This procedure defines instructions for Engineering store management system. The SOP
specifies the responsibilities of staff for the various functions outlined here.
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary : Officer Stores

Secondary: Stores In charge/ Manager Store.


5.0 Procedure

Before raising the indents for material:


Prepare the Bill of Quantity (BOQ) for the each job. Discuss with the contractor /
superiors and finalize it.

Consider the physical stock of the quantities already exists / ordered.

Procedure for indenting the material:

If required, float the inquiry and invite the three quotations.


Prepare cost comparative statements.
Finalize the purchase order after negotiations.
Prepare purchase order and hand over to the party.

Procedure for Receiving the material:

After getting the intimation, receive the material at the gate house.
Check the material at gate house, as per delivery challan and quality of material i.e.
damage, scratches, finishing etc.
Take the required quantity and use for it was indented.

Procedure for releasing the intermediate payment of ordered material:

After getting the Receiving Report (RR) from store department, check with the original
purchase order (PO).
If okay, release the intermediate payment as per terms and condition mentioned in the
PO.

Procedure for releasing the final payment of ordered material:

If party has already completed all the terms and condition under his scope and supply,
then fill the certificate for Final Payment.
Release the final payment as per PO.
You might also like:

Types of filters in AHU as per safety and cGMP requirements

Guidelines for production activities as per safety & cGMP requirement

Guidelines for Engineering & Maintenance

Cleaning of Sampling Area

Cleaning of Sampling Area


1.0 Purpose

: To provide a documented guideline for cleaning of sampling area.

2.0 Objective : To provide a guide line how and when to clean the sampling area.
3.0 Scope

: Cleaning of sampling area in stores department.

4.0 Responsibility :

Cleaning

: Work man

Follow up

: Officer Stores

Over all responsibility : Store Incharge


5.0 Procedure

:
Floor

Clean the floor using detergent solution after using disinfectant solution use. And
Using lint free cloth.
If the sampling area is not in use then clean the floor once in a day using
detergent after using with lint free cloth.

Walls -If the dispensing area is not in use then clean the walls once in a day
using Detergent after using disinfectant solutions and with lint free cloth.

Door

Clean the door using detergent after using disinfectant solution and mop with
Using lint free cloth. If the Sampling area is not in use then clean the door once
In a day using same procedure.

Weighing balance

Clean the surface of balance with slightly wet lint free cloth.

Labeling

After completion of cleaning, affix the cleaned label on equipment / area.


Frequency: Once in a day and whenever before starting the Batch.
Detergent / Disinfectant
Detergent
Disinfectant
Disinfectant

Brand
Teepol
Dettol
Savlon

Quantity
0.6 % Detergent solution
0.5 % Disinfectant solution
0.5 % Disinfectant solution

You might also like:

Cleaning of sampling tools

Air sampling in Sterile area

Cleaning & Sanitisation of Sampling room

Monitoring Personnel of sterile area in Aseptic area

Storage & Handling of Inflammables

1.0 Purpose :To provide a documented guideline for Storage & Handling of Inflammables.
2.0 Objective : To use for Storage & Handling of Inflammables.
3.0 Scope
: Stores
4.0 Responsibility :
Follow up : Officer Stores
Over all responsibility : Q.A. Incharge, Store Incharge
5.0 Procedure
:
Storage area of such inflammable solvents should be away from main building
of Plant &Warehouse with lock & Key arrangement. There should be restricted
entry in this area.

Inflammable solvents store should be well ventilated. The area must be

equipped with Latest & approve ate fire extinguisher system.


Ensure that the earthing system provide in the inflammable solvents stores is

proper and each & every drum and pump is covered by earthing connection.
Unload the material by Deduction of drums & checking for weight take the

drums to Inflammable solvent storage area.


While unloading of inflammable solvent ensures that there is leakage &

damage in drums.
While unloading or during storage, if leakage of damage observed, shift the
solvent in other empty drum with help of pneunimetric pressure pump. Empty
drum must have been used previously for the same solvent. Ensure that

earthinh connecting has been attached to the leak drum.


While issue use FIFO system.
Use protective equipments i.e. rubber gloves, spectacle, Transparent

facemask etc.
While opening the lid, unscrew it slowly so as to let the air / vapors pass out.
Ensure earthing connection to the pump. Put SS Pneumetric pump inside of

the
drum. Switch on air pressure. Start pneumatric pump. Dispense the required

quantity of solvent in 25 liter GI Drums. Close the knob of pressurized air.


Put the lid on drum. Close it tightly. Mark the drum as LOOSE for

identification.
Switch off lights. Lock the Inflammable solvent storage room.
Put the filled 25 liter drums in a carrier trolley & carry to air lock of coating area

in properly closed condition.


You might also like:

Operation of Fire Extinguisher


1.0 Purpose

To

provide

documented

procedure

Extinguisher.
2.0 Objective : Operation of Fire Extinguisher

cope : This SOP is applicable for Operation of Fire Extinguisher.


4.0 Responsibility :

Primary: Technician Engineering

for

Operation

of

Fire

Secondary: Manager Engineering

5.0 Procedure :

Foam Type Fire Extinguisher:

It should be used for fires involving solvents, oils, greases, fats, charcoals etc.
As these articles being lighter than water, will float on water and are likely to splash
burning liquids on all sides.

CO2 Gas Type Fire Extinguisher:

This type of extinguisher can also be used for fires involving inflammable liquids such
as solvents, oils, greases etc.

The only difference between foam type and CO2 type fire extinguishers must always be
used in the event of an electrical fire.

Dry Chemical powder (DCP Type Extinguisher):


These are recommended mainly for tackling petroleum/solvents fires.
However they are suitable for gas fires
You might also like:

Cleaning of Sampling Area

Dispensing of raw materials

Storage & Handling of Inflammables

Coding of areas in Stores

Operation of Air Compressor

1.0 Purpose : To provide a documented procedure for Operation of Air

Compressor.
2.0 Objective : Operation of Air Compressor.
3.0 Scope : This SOP is applicable for Operation of Air Compressor.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary: Technician Engineering
Secondary: Manager Engineering
5.0 Procedure :
Before starting the compressor, check the water level of cooling tower tank, if

it is low, then add more water and make it full.


Switch ON the main switch on panel of the air compressor.
Start the cooling tower pump and fan by pushing the green button from

starter.
Remove the air bubble from the vent.

start in LOAD condition automatically.


During LOAD condition air pressure in receiver will rise, once 7 Kg/cm 2 air

Push the green color Push Button on panel to start the air compressor.
Air compressor will start in UNLOAD condition and after 30 second it will

pressure is achieved, compressor will cut off automatically and run in UNLOAD

condition.
Open the plant air supply valve of the receiver. Air pressure in receiver will
start to reduce and when air pressure is reduced to 6 kg/cm 2 the compressor will

start on LOAD condition.


This cycle of LOAD and UNLOAD will continue and it depends on air

pressure requirement in the plant.


If air pressure is not required in production then switches OFF the air

compressor as per method given below.


Close the plant air supply valve of air receiver, allow to run the compressor in

UNLOAD condition.
Switch OFF the main switch on panel of air compressor.
Drain the pressure in receiver from drain valve and close the drain valve

when air pressure becomes zero.


Switch OFF the cooling tower pump and fan by pushing the red colour push

button on starter.
Close the cooling water inlet valve of cooler and cylinder jacket.
Drain the water in cylinder head jacket.
You might also like:

1.0

effluent generated from production department.


2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure to be followed for the

treatment of effluent generated from production department.


3.0 Scope
: It is applicable to treatment of effluent in effluent treatment

plant.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary : Officer Safety and Environment
Secondary : Manager Safety and Environment
Overall responsibility: General Manager (PA)
5.0 Procedure :
Effluent/sewage generated should be drained into the drainage system.

Effluent Treatment Plant


Purpose: To provide the procedure to be followed for the treatment of

Flow of the effluent:


Source of Production Equalization Tank Neutralization Tank Flocculation
Tank Primary Settling Tank Aeration Tank-1 Aeration Tank-2 Secondary
Settling Tank Treated Effluent Collection Sump Carbon Filter-1 Carbon

Filter-2 GIDC Drainage.


Equalization Tank:
Initially effluent from different stream is being collected in under ground and

above the ground Equalization Tank.


Pump out the effluent from Equalization tank to Neutralization Tank by electric

pump.
Neutralization Tank:
The effluent pump from Equalization Tank is collected in Neutralization Tank.
In Neutralization Tank effluent is adjusted to proper pH .
Flocculation Tank:
Neutral effluent is send to the flocculation Tank from Neutralization Tank.

Primary Settling Tank.


Primary Settling Tank;
The effluent after pH adjustment & addition of flocculants is being feed in to

Primary Settling Tank.


Sludge is settled in Settling Tank due to flocculating agent.
This sludge is removed from the bottom of the primary settling tank and

sends in sludge bed.


The top supernatant is being sent in Aeration Tank.
Aeration Tank:
In Aeration Tank, the surface aerator maintains & keeps the effluent mix liquid

in suspension & supply dissolved oxygen to biomass.


The organic matter is decomposed in this tank by bacteria, which convert it

into CO2 and H2O.


The effluent from aeration tank is being transferred to Secondary Settling

Tank.
Secondary Settling Tank:
In Secondary Settling Tank Biomass is being settled down.
It is being recycled to aeration tank for maintaining MLSS & MLVSS of the

Aeration Tank.
Excess sludge is being transferred to the Sludge Drying Beds.
The treated effluent is being collected in Treated Water Sump.
Carbon Filter:
Finally, effluent is being given Tertiary Treatment in Carbon Filter.
The filter reduces the color of the treated effluent having almost colorless and

less COD.
Discharge into GIDC drain.

Flocculating agent are added here which emphasis fast settling in the

Accident Prevention Guidelines

urpose : To provide a documented procedure for preventing accident & Recording accident.
2.0 Objective : To maintain safety aspects
3.0 Scope

Preventing accident & Recording accident

4.0 Responsibility :
Follow up

: Concern department head

Over all responsibility: Personnel & Administration Manager.

5.0 Procedure :
Accident Prevention

Workman shall engage themselves in the duties which have been assigned to them.
The execution of their duties must be in the safe manner laid down in S.O.P. for the
operation, of the machine or duty concerned.

Removal of guards or safety devices, cleaning of machines which they are


Running, etc., are expressly forbidden.

Workmen working beyond the height of 10 feet shall wear the safety belt.

If any employee / work man working beyond the height of 10 feet on ladder shall work
with one additional work man / employee to hold ladder.

Safety instructions given or posted on Notice Boards are to be followed.

Workman shall not keep sharp edge tools into their pocket.

Any employee / workman working with electricity shall wear safety shoes &
Sock proof gloves.

Any workman working with hazardous chemicals / acid shall wear the safety
Wears like goggles, gloves etc.

Speed of vehicle inside the factory premises shall not exceed 20 km / hr.

When welding work is to be carried out in closed area, extra fire extinguisher
Shall be provided.

After working with oil, floor shall be cleaned thoroughly to wipe out the oil.
Solvents shall be stored in tight closed container.

Used drums of solvent / chemicals shall be discarded by skilled workman.

Sufficient emergency light shall be provided.

Entry into transformer yard / explosive storage yard shall be restricted to selected
Personnel.

Machine which is under maintenance shall be labeled as Under Maintenance.

Workman shall enter into water tank, drainage, septic tank only after permission Of
Personal & Administration department.

Workman shall carry out repairing work of high pressure line / high temperature Line /
or any explosive line only after permission of Engineering In charge.

Wear earplugs near high noise area.

ecording of Accident

Accident shall be recorded into Accident Register.

The accidents are categorized as critical major and minor depending on the

Seriousness of the incident.

Action taken upon Accidents:

The First aid, if required, after the accident shall be provided at the earlier marked
Locations and trained persons are available.

The telephone no. of fire station, doctor, ambulance shall be displayed in all the
Departments to call upon in an emergency.

The affected employee shall be immediately rushed to the hospital, if needed and is
provided the required medical help.
You might also like:

Personnel Hygiene

First Aid

Security Personnel

Uniform of Employees
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 12:57 PM

Appraisal of Employee
1.0 Purpose

: To provide a documented procedure for appraisal of employee.

2.0 Objective : To evaluate performance of employee.


3.0 Scope

: Employees

4.0 Responsibility
Follow up

:
: Personnel & Administration In charge

Over all responsibility : General Manager (Adm)


5.0 Procedure

Performance Appraisal is carried out to inform employees about his performance


To identify where he / she stands against the expectation of company.
First employees shall be called for Appraisal and Appraisal form to be given to

Employee for self appraisal and personal discussion.


Strength & Weakness of the employees shall be discussed with examples.
Employee shall be informed well in advance for Appraisal so that she / he can
Prepare for the discussion.
Employees shall be ask specifically for any hindrances, or any other problems
Related to his performance.
Rating System :

Poor

Normal

Good

Very Good

Out Standing

Note: In case of Poor: give the reason behind that.


In case of Out Standing: give the reason behind that.
Frequency : Once in year

Explanation of points covers in the performance appraisal form.

Appraisal panel

Department head
Personnel & Administration In charge
General Manager
Appraisal Form
Name of employee
Department
Designation
Job carried out
Best performance by employee
Best output
Sign
Commitment
By Department Head opinion

Sign

Commitment

You might also like:

Personnel Hygiene

Uniform of Employees

Medical check up of Employees

Security Personnel

Appraisal of Employee

1.0 Purpose

: To provide a documented procedure for appraisal of employee.

2.0 Objective : To evaluate performance of employee.


3.0 Scope

: Employees

4.0 Responsibility
Follow up

:
: Personnel & Administration In charge

Over all responsibility : General Manager (Adm)


5.0 Procedure

Performance Appraisal is carried out to inform employees about his performance


To identify where he / she stands against the expectation of company.
First employees shall be called for Appraisal and Appraisal form to be given to
Employee for self appraisal and personal discussion.
Strength & Weakness of the employees shall be discussed with examples.
Employee shall be informed well in advance for Appraisal so that she / he can

Prepare for the discussion.


Employees shall be ask specifically for any hindrances, or any other problems
Related to his performance.
Rating System :

Poor

Normal

Good

Very Good

Out Standing

Note: In case of Poor: give the reason behind that.


In case of Out Standing: give the reason behind that.
Frequency : Once in year

Explanation of points covers in the performance appraisal form.

Appraisal panel

Department head
Personnel & Administration In charge
General Manager
Appraisal Form
Name of employee
Department
Designation
Job carried out
Best performance by employee
Best output
Sign
Commitment
By Department Head opinion
Commitment
You might also like:

Personnel Hygiene

Sign

Uniform of Employees
Medical check up of Employees
Security Personnel

Good Laboratory Practices

1.0
2.0

practices.
3.0
Scope

follow.
4.0 Responsibility :

Primary: Chemist : Officer of respective department.

Overall Responsibility : Respective department Head.


5.0 Procedure :
Following types of laboratory facilities are necessary for assuring the quality of

Active pharmaceutical products:

Premises :

Control labs should be well designed, equipped, maintained and has

sufficient space to suit the operation to be performed in them.

There should be provisions for writing, recording, storage of control

samples, chemicals and documents.

A separate room is necessary to keep sensitive instruments free from

temperature humidity variations and dust particles.

Chemical, and Microbiological labs should be separate from each other.

Equipments :

Control lab should be fully equipped with appropriate instruments for the

testing procedures.

Equipments and instruments should be serviced and calibrated at suitable

Purpose : To provide instruction good laboratory practices.


Objective : To provide a documented procedure for good laboratory
:

This procedure is applicable for good laboratory practices

and calibrated at suitable specified intervals of time and readily available.


Records should be maintained of the same. The records should indicate the next

calibration date.

Defective equipment should be withdrawn from use until the fault has been
rectified.

should be available.

Personnel should wear clean, protective clothing appropriate to duties

being performed.

Sampling:

Samples should be taken in such a manner that they should be

Cleanliness :
Control lab should be kept clean in accordance with the written procedure.
A written procedure for cleaning the glass apparatus of chemical assay

representative samples in accordance with their written sampling procedure. For

this statistical control norms can be adopted.

The sampling procedure should include:

Method of sampling.

Equipment to be used.

Amount of sample taken.

Any special precautions or instructions to be followed.

Raw materials are to be collected as per the lot numbers or batch numbers

given by the manufacturer.

Each container should bear a label indicating:

Name of the material.

Date of collection / receipt.

Batch / Lot number.

Name of the manufacturer and supplier.

Date of manufacturing / expiry.

Status label: UNDER TEST, APPROVED, AND REJECTED.

Documentation:

It indicates the test procedure, specification, standards, limits and detailed

analytical reports.

Raw material analysis record indicating:

Name of the material with code number and reference number.

Date of receipt, date of sample collected, date of analysis, completion data

Number of containers received and number of samples collected.

Detailed analytical report indicating standards and specification, status of

sample, with approved signature.

Finished product record indicating:

Name of the material with code number and reference number.

Date of receipt, date of sample collected, date of analysis, completion data.

Number of containers received and number of samples collected.

sample, with approved signature.

Record of in-process materials / intermediates.

Record of standard / normal solution indicating periodically its validity, with

date and authorized signature.

Reference standard records determining the potency / purity periodically

with date and signature.

Records of water analysis used for analytical purpose.

Control sample record showing its location, date of receipt, quantity

Detailed analytical report indicating standards and specification, status of

received, date of removal indicating the reason and the product details with the

authorized signature should be maintained.

List of various chemicals used.

Stability data of all products.

Market complaint record indicating the details:

Nature of the product.

Manufacturing

Nature of complaint.

Region from which complaint received.

Quality Assurance Department investigation / remark / action.

Instrumentation and Calibration :

Analytical balance should be checked at least annually against weights

traceable to National Bureau of Standards Calibration.

The accuracy of the calibration of pH meter should be checked using

known buffers.

Spectrophotometers should be checked with regard to their photometric

accuracy, reproducibility, resolution, and wavelength.

Thermometers should be checked against Standard Thermometer of

National Bureau of Standards Calibration.

Water baths, refrigerators, incubators should be checked for their

distribution of uniform temperature by a calibrated thermometer.

Controls :

CHEMICAL: Specially prepared test solution should be used for checking

the accuracy of various tests.

Karl Fischer Moisture Test: Test one or more hydrated compound to

compare the theoretical water content obtained.

Infra- red and UV Identity: Maintain spectra of each active ingredient of


reference standard.

analytical data before the final release.

The transfer of entries from the note books to the final records is to be

cross checked by the authorized person.

Specifications:

Specifications approved by Quality Control should be available for:

Starting material

Finished products

Packing material

Intermediates.

Facilities:

Fuming chamber / exhaust fan

Vacuum line.

Cross ventilation / air conditioning facilities.

Lock room facility to store poisonous material.

Chemical and glass ware storage.

Fire extinguishers.

Returned Goods and Reprocessing Goods:

A finished product returned from the depot or market may be relabeled,

provided there is no risk to the product quality and therapeutic value.

Mix-up during relabeling should be avoided.

Additional tests of reprocessed product should be considered.

Training :

Chemists, analysts, lab assistants, should be trained to know the

importance and technical importance of all GMP norms.


You might also like:

Checking all the manufacturing and in-process data along with the

Good Documentation Practices


1.0 Purpose

: To provide instruction good documentation practices.

2.0

Objective : To provide a documented procedure for good documentation practices.

3.0

Scope

4.0

Responsibility :

This procedure is applicable for good documentation practices follow.

Primary: Chemist/ Officer of respective department.

Overall: Respective department Head.

5.0 Procedure:

All information related to activities should be recorded clearly and easy to read.

Abbreviated date should be recorded by Day/Month /Year.

All documents should be made in black ball pen / ink pen only.

Data should be specific and as far as possible numerical value.

Scrap paper should not be used for recording the data.

Document should be made online.

If any error is found immediately after recording the data, cross out incorrect information
with a single line and not by using erasable pens or Corrective fluids. Enter correct data,
sign and date near correction.

Information should be recorded on proper forms, laboratory notebooks, cleaning


records, immediately after actions are completed. Entries of signatures or initials and
dates must be made at the same time.
Overwrite should not acceptable in any documents
You might also like:

Good Laboratory Practices

Good Manufacturing Practices

Numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures and Index of Standard Operating
Procedure

Preparation and Maintenance of Standard Operating Procedure

Restart The Activities After Power Failure / Breakdown

1.0

The Activities After Power Failure / Breakdown.


2.0 Objective : Procedure For Restart The Activities After Power Failure /

Breakdown.
3.0 Scope : This SOP is applicable for. Restart The Activities After Power

Failure / Breakdown.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary: Technician Engineering
Secondary: Manager Engineering
5.0 Procedure :
Power failure:
Check the main power circuit panel for voltage and break down.
Start the D.G. Set and check the voltage and frequency, it should be 430 V

Purpose

and 50 HZ.

: To provide a documented procedure for Procedure For Restart

operation.
After resuming the power supply from G.E.B. check the voltage and

frequency.
Before changing over power supply from D.G. Set power supply inform the

critical
Processing areas personnel and switch. the power supply for normal

working.

BREAKDOWN :
In case of breakdown of power supply, confirm the nature of breakdown.
Start the D.G. Set
Check the voltage and frequency; it should be 430 V & 50 HZ.
Change over the power supply from G.E.B. to D.G. Set for normal working.
After attending the breakdown of power supply, restore the power supply and

check the voltage and frequency of mains.


Before change over the power supply from D.G. Set to G.E.B. power supply

inform to critical activities area personnel for normal working.


You might also like:

Then changeover the power supply from G.E.B. to D.G. Set for normal

Issuance of Labels and Reconciliation

1.0

reconciliation.
2.0 Objective : To provide a documented procedure for Issuance of labels

and reconciliation.
3.0
Scope
: This procedure is applicable for Issuance of labels and

reconciliation for QA.


4.0 Responsibility :
Primary: Officer QA / Officer Production
Secondary: Production In-change
5.0 Procedure:
On receipt of labels issuance request intimation / note from production

department, QA shall enter the entry in label issue register.


QA shall enter the information related to label, like Name of Product, Product

Purpose

To provide instructions for Issuance of labels and

Code, Product Stage, Batch Number, Manufacturing Date, Expiry Date, and

required labels quantity.


QA shall issue required quantity of labels with one extra label for BMR.
QA shall take a receiver signature in labeling issuance register.
Maintain the issuance record with updating labels quantity.

and destroyed the incorrect label


Maintain record of destroyed labels in label issue register.
You might also like:

1.0
2.0

analysis.
3.0 Scope

department.
4.0 Responsibility :
Primary: Officer QA / Officer-Store
Secondary: Officer QA Manager.
5.0 Procedure:
Spot-check once a week all registers, reagents and volumetric standard

solutions.
Frequently observe the actual testing done by the chemist.
Review analytical reports and before signing check and confirm for:
Complete entries in to the logbooks, test data sheets etc.
Reagents should be stored in bottles.
Reference / working standards stored in desiccators should be checked for

details like name, date of preparation, date of expiry, purity.


Whether analysis has been done as per the specified pharmacopoeia or in-

house specifications (if specified).


If not found to comply, necessary action to rectify / modify the procedure can

be taken.
You might also like:

If any mistake occur during filling the data on label, issue another new label

Instructions for Supervision of Analysis


Purpose : To provide instructions for supervision of analysis.
Objective : To provide a documented procedure for supervision of
: This procedure is applicable for supervision of analysis in QC

HANDLING OF SAMPLE FOR ANALYSIS


1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down a procedure for Handling of Samples for Analysis of Raw Materials./ Formulations.
2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

Quality Control Officer.


3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Quality Control Manager.


4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

RAW MATERIALS

4.1.1
samplers

The Quality Control Officer shall receive the samples along with the GRN and
check list.

4.1.2

The samples shall be kept in the tray labeled Under Test Raw Material, till those are
allocated for analysis.

4.1.3

The samples shall be handled carefully to avoid cross contamination.

4.1.4

The samples shall be allocated for analysis by Quality Control Manager and relevant

details
shall be mentioned in the register.
4.1.5
4.1.6
destruction

The excess samples shall be destroyed after completion of analysis.


The samples for destruction shall be kept in a container labeled as samples for
and shall be destroyed as mentioned below,

4.1.8

Raw material shall be removed from their container.

4.19.

The container shall be destroyed by breaking (in case of glass), by cutting (in case of

plastic).
4.1.10 Collected material shall be destroyed by putting the material in water , but the cephalosporin
materials shall be destroyed by putting the material in 2% w/v solution of sodium
hydroxide.
Then all the collected material closed properly and send to the burning pit.
4.2

FORMULATIONS

4.2.1
form and he

The Quality Control Officer shall receive the samples along with the sample request
shall ensure intactness of the samples by visual checking.

4.2.2

The entries of the samples shall be made in the respective register by the Quality Control Officer.

4.2.3

Sample shall be kept in the tray labeled as Under Test formulation till those are allocated for analysis.

4.2.4

The samples shall be handled carefully to avoid cross contamination.

4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8

The samples shall be allocated for the analysis by the Quality Control Manager. The relevant details of
allocation and green sheet number shall be mentioned in the respective registers.
The excess samples shall be destroyed after completion of analysis .
The samples for destruction shall be kept in a container labeled as Samples for destruction and shall be
destroyed as mentioned below.
Tablets, capsules, dry syrups and powder of vials shall be removed from their respective pack.
4.2.8

4.3

Packaging material shall be destroyed by burning at burning pit and product shall be
destroyed by burning at burning pit after breaking.

All Formulations / Raw Material Samples of Cephalosporin group of products shall be disposed off after
treating with 2% w/v Sodium Hydroxide solution.
4.4

No samples shall Under Test for more than 60 days. Any sample found pending for analysis
for more than 60 days shall be investigated for delay in analysis & documented.

4.5 ABBREVIATIONS
SOP = Standard Operating Procedure
GRN = Goods Receipt Note
W/v = Weight by Volume
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

--

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Original Copy
8.0

Nil

ANNEXURES:

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

9.0

REFERENCES:
In house.

You might also like:

CONTROL OF ISSUANCE OF RECORD OF ANALYSIS

Sending sample to contract lab

Sampling of Raw Material

PROCEDURE FOR OPERATING OF SONICATOR

ANALYTICAL REFERENCE NUMBERING SYSTEM

1.0

OBJECTIVE :

The objective of this SOP is to lay down the procedure for giving Analytical Reference Number
(A.R. No.) for Raw Material, Packaging Material, Finished Product, Blend and Validation
samples.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

Executive Quality Control

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Head Quality Control

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

RAW MATERIAL

The A.R. No. is a unique code having 10 digits.


For example: 5RA0028001
First digit stands for the Year. specified Raw material
Second to Seventh Digit stands for code of the specified Raw material.
The eighth to tenth digit is serial number of consignment starting with 001

4.2

PACKING MATERIAL

The A.R. No. is a unique code having 10 digits.


For example: 5PA0028001
First digit stands for the Year. Specified Packing material
Second to Seventh Digit stands for code of the specified Packing material.
The eighth to tenth digit is serial number of consignment starting with 001

4.3
FINISHED PRODUCT:
The A.R. No. is a unique code having 12 digits.
For example
: 02C-5A/30156
First two digits stands for the month of manufacturing.
Third digit stands for the dosage forms i.e. C for Capsules, S for Dry Syrups, T for Tablets, I for
Injection,
The fourth digit is -
Fifth digit 5 stands for Year 2005.
Sixth digit A stands for ALKEM LAB LTD,
G stands for GALPHA LAB LTD,
I stands for INDICHEMI HEALTH SPECILIETIES .
Seventh digit is /.
Then the advice sheet No.(Who is having five digits) shall be followed.

4.4
BLEND /INPROCESS:
The A.R. No. is a unique code having 12 digits.
For example
: 2BC-5A/30156 / 2IC-5A/30156
First digits stands for months for manufacture.
Second digit stand for Blend /Inprocess.
Third digit stands for the dosage forms i.e. C for Capsules, S for Dry Syrups, T for
Tablets, I for
Injection
The fourth digit is -
Fifth digit 5 stands for Year 2005.
Sixth digit A stands for ALKEM LAB LTD.
G stands for GALPHA LAB LTD ,
I stands for INDICHEMI HEALTH SPECILIETIES
Seventh digit is /.
Then the advice sheet No.(Who is having five digits) shall be followed.

4.5

VALIDATION SAMPLES:

After location code there is / followed by V, which stands for validation sample followed by

/ and batch No.

4.6

LOCATION CODE :-

INJ- Injection
TAB- Tablet
BET- Betalactum
CAP- Capsules

DRY- Dry syrup


5.0
REASON FOR REVISION
Harmonization of format.

6.0
TRAINING:
Trainer -Head Quality Control

Trainees--

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

Period -One day


7.0
DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Original Copy
8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

Nil
9.0

REFERENCES:

In house.

You might also like:

SAMPLING OF STERILE RAW MATERIAL


1.0.

OBJECTIVE

To lay down a procedure for aseptic sampling of sterile Raw


Material so as to get a
representative sample of the whole lot for analysis.

2.0.

RESPONSIBILITY

Micobiologist .

3.0.

ACCOUNTABILITY

Quality Control Manager.

4.0

4.1

PROCEDURE

Generate Samplers checklist-RM as per the Batch Number mentioned in the


Under Test list and decide the number of containers to be sampled as per sampling
plan (Annexure I).

4.2
Check and reconcile number of containers and the total quantity as
shown in Under Test.
Compare the details like manufacturing date, expiry date and
pharmacopoeial status
mentioned on Samplers checklist-RM with that mentioned on
manufacturers label. Ensure
that each container is affixed with UNDER TEST label. In case of
any discrepancies
inform to Quality Control Manager / Ware-House Manager.

4.3
Check the packing condition of the containers for any damages.
Physically damaged
containers shall not be considered for sampling and the same shall
be Rejected..

4.4
In case of material received in triple laminated bags, the sample
container received alongwith
the material shall be used for microbiological and chemical testing.

4.5
In case of sterile material received in aluminium containers, follow
the procedure given
below,

4.5.1.
Select the containers to be sampled and inform Ware-House Officer to
transfer these containers to the raw material storage area of production block.

4.5.2

Sterilize and dehydrogenate all sampling accessories as mentioned in point no.


5.0.

4.5.3

Prepare label for individual container sample, with details of name of the
material, Batch no., and container number.

4.5.4.

Total number of labels to be prepared shall be equal to the number of containers


to be sampled.

4.5.5.

Prepare labels (annexure-II ) for Sample for Analysis, microbiology test and
control sample.

4.5.6.

Transfer the containers to the buffer zone. Follow the SOP on Raw material
receipt, storage, and transfer to sterile area.

4.5.7.

Enter into the sterile area following gowning and degowning procedure for sterile
area.

4.5.8.

Transfer the container to be sampled to the Quality Control Microbiology Lab


( Sterile Area.)

4.5.9.

Ensure that temperature inside the room is less than 25 deg.C. & RH is less than
40% or as specified on Manufacturers label.

4.5.10. Place one container under LAF. Peel off the outer tape/seal from the mouth of the
container and open the lid of the container aseptically.

4.5.11. Withdraw an appropriate quantity of sample aseptically into a piece of


depyrogenated aluminium foil.

4.5.12. Observe carefully the physical appearance of the material for any abnormalities
like discolouration, lumps, foreign matter and physical heterogenicity.

4.5.13. If any abnormalities are observed, collect the sample in two separate vial, for
separate evaluation.

4.5.14. Plug all vials with sterilised rubber plugs.

4.5.15. Close the lid of the container tightly, wrap the mouth with adhesive tape and
remove the container from LAF booth.

4.5.16. Mark the sample containers using glass marker with batch number and container
number in case of individual sample and only batch number in case of pool, control
sample & micro sample.

4.5.17. Mark containers / packs which are selected for sampling with marker as N/1/n,
N/2/n.N/S/n (N stands for total number of packs / containers, S for serial number
of container selected for sampling and n for total number of containers taken for
sampling).

4.5.18. Similarly sample the rest of the containers aseptically. Refer annexure-II for total
quantity to be sampled.

4.5.19. Seal all the vials with aluminium tear off seals.

4.5.20. Transfer all the containers to Air lock-1.

4.5.21. Transfer all the samples & sampling aids in the Air lock-1.

4.5.22. Clean the LAF bench and room and leave the sterile area alongwith the samples.

4.5.23. Label all the collected sample vials.

4.5.24. Affix SAMPLED labels (Annexure III) duly signed with date of sampling on the
container.

4.5.25. Record all observations in the Samplers checklist-RM (Annexure-IV).

4.5.26. Give the samples along with the Samplers checklist-RM, Suppliers COA (if
available) to Quality Control Laboratory for Chemical Analysis.

4.5.27. Inform the Ware-House Officer to shift all the containers back to Stores UNDER
TEST STORAGE area after performing decontamination of external surfaces.

4.6

Preparation of sampling accessories

4.6.1.

Vials : Follow washing, drying, sterilizing and depyrogenation procedure as


followed in normal production.

4.6.2.

Rubber Stopper : Follow washing steam sterilization and drying procedure as


followed in normal production run.

4.6.3.

Spoons : Wash the spoon dry and wrap in 3 layers of aluminium foil,
depyrogenate in Dry Heat Sterilizer at 250 degree Celsius for one hour.

4.6.4.

Aluminium Foil : Cut pieces of aluminium foil of approximately 10cm.sq.area,


wrap them in triple layer of aluminium foil and depyrogenate in Dry Heat Sterilizer
at 250 degree Celsius for one hour.

4.6.5. After depyrogenation of sampling accessories, transfer them to


production block hatch.
Remove outer layer of wrap here, from this hatch transfer the
accessories to aseptic area
hatch. Remove the second layer of the wrap and transfer them to
buffer zone LAF.

4.7

ABBREVIATIONS :
SOP = Standard Operating Procedure
COA = Certificate of Analysis.

5.0

REAVISION FOR REVISION:

Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-- Manager Quality Control

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants

Period

-- One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION

Certified Copy No. 1

Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

For Display in microbiology Dept.

Original Copy

Head QUALITY ASSURANCE

8.0

REFERENCES
USP 25 Page no.:- 1878 , E.P: - Page no. 125 , 2.6.1

9.0

ANNEXURES:

Annexurer-1

Attached

ANNEXURE I

SAMPLING PLAN

REF. SOP NO.: K/QC/008

Revision No.: 00
Effective from: 10.01.2005

Page No. : 1
of 1

MINIMUM NUMBER OF CONTAINERS RECOMMENDED TO BE TESTED (AS PER E.P)


Number of items in the batch

Minimum no. of containers to be sampled

Not more than100 containers

10% or 4 containers, whichever is greater

More than 100 but not more than


500 containers

10 containers

More than 500 containers

2% or 20 containers, whichever is least

ANNEXURE II
QUANTITY TO BE SAMPLED

Tests

Sample Quantity (Approx.)

Chemical

40g (in two vials)

Microbiology (sterility & endotoxin)

20g

Control sample

20g

Total quantity

80g

ANNEXURE- III

SAMPLED
SING. /DATE

CLEANING OF LABORATORY GLASSWARE


1.0 OBJECTIVE

To define the cleaning procedure for glassware used during analysis.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITY

Quality Control Chemist

3.0 ACCOUNTABILITY

Quality Control Manager

4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Cleaning of General Glassware
4.1.1 Dip the used glassware in a basin of water containing detergent.
4.1.2 Brush each item thoroughly, to remove stains and or grease.

4.1.3 Rinse thoroughly with RO water.

4.1.4 Final rinsing given with purified water.

4.1.5 Dry in an oven and store in designated areas.

4.2 Microbiological Glassware


4.2.1 Follow step No. 4.1.1 to 4.1.3

4.2.2 Final rinsing given with water for Injection.

4.2.3 Glass ware used for Sterility / Endotoxin purposes must be sterilized /
depyroginated for 30 minutes at 250 C .

4.2.4Glass ware used for microbiological analysis etc. must be sterilized by heating
for 30 minutes at 120 C .

4.3 New Glassware

4.3.1 After routine cleaning treat for 24 hours with 5 % solution of sodium carbonate
followed by soaking in hydrochloric acid for 24 hours. Wash thoroughly with R.O
water & final rinsing is given with purified water.

4.4 Greasy Glassware

4.4.1Treat with 5% sodium carbonate solution or few ml of acetone or


chromic acid solution.

4.5 CAUTION

4.5.1 While preparation of chromic acid solution ensure that must wear
gloves and goggles.

4.5.2 Chromic acid solution is extremely corrosive and hygroscopic and


should be Stored in a glass stoppered bottle in a safe place.

4.5.3When the mixture acquires a green colour , discard under continuously


flowing water.

* Preparation Of Chromic Acid Solution

Dissolved 100 gm of sodium dichromate in 50 ml water, add slowly with constant


stirring 750 ml of sulphuric acid . Allow to cool.

4.6 Glassware With Adhering Precipitate

4.6.1Use nitric acid, aquaregia or fuming sulphuric acid .

4.7CAUTION

4.7.1
when using.

These materials are extremely corrosive. Wear gloves and goggles

4.8 ABBREVIATIONS

RO- Reverse Osmosis

5.0 REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-- Manager Quality Control

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants

Period

-- One day

7.0 DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2 : Display in Glassware Washing Room.

Original Copy

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

8.0. ANNEXURES:

Nil
9.0. REFERENCES:
IP/BP/USP
CLEANING OF QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down the procedure for cleaning of quality control laboratory.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

Hygiene supervisor

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Quality Control Chemist

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1
Broom the floor of all the sections including the staircase, daily and then
mope with wet mope.

4.2

Clean all the tables and reagent racks with dry mopping.

4.3

Empty the dust bins, clean them and keep them at place.

4.4

Clean all the instruments with a cotton duster.

4.5

Once in a week clean all the fixtures with dry mopping.

4.6

Clean all the racks in chemical stores once every week .

4.7

Clean all the walls and ceiling once every week .

4.8
After cleaning the area by workmen, check the cleanliness of the area and
put the Yes in
the cleaning record as per the ANNEXURE I

4.1.

Frequency :

S.No
.

Activity

Frequency

Brooming and general cleaning

Two times a day

Mopping

Two times a day

Dustbin Cleaning

Two times a day

Instrument cleaning

Once a day

Walls and Ceiling

Once a week.

Reagent racks in chemical stores

Once a week

Note: - trained workmen should do Instrument cleaning.

5.0.

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-- Manager Quality Control

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants

Period

-- One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1: Head of Department Quality Control


Original Copy

8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

ANNEXURE I, For QC Cleaning Record.


9.0

REFERENCES:
In house

ANNEXURE I
Q.C. CLEANING RECORD

Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.: K/QC/026

Effective from:

Page No. : 1
of 1

CLEANING RECORD

QC Lab : Wet chemistry lab / Instrument rooms / chemical stores / Control sample room.

Frequency
Date

Brooming
and
general
cleaning

Mopping

Dustbin
Cleaning

Instrument
cleaning

Walls
and
Ceiling

Reagent
racks in
chemical
stores

Two times
a day

Two
times a
day

Two
times a
day

Once a day

Once a
week.

Once a
week.

Checked
by.

You might also like:

1.0.

CLEANING OF LABORATORY GLASSWARE


LABORATORY DISCIPLINE IN QC LAB
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF HPLC SYSTEM (SIMADZU)
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of this SOP is to ensure that the instrument performs satisfactorily
and gives accurate and reproducible data.

2.0.

RESPONSIBILITY:

2.1

The Chemist/ Executive - Quality Control shall be:

2.1.1.

Responsible for operating the HPLC as per the SOP.

2.1.2.

Responsible for timely calibration of HPLC System as per the SOP.


2.1.3

3.0.

Responsible for ensuring the adherence of SOP.

ACCOUNTABILITY:
Head - Quality Control

4.0.

PROCEDURE:

4.1

PROCEDURE FOR GENERAL CLEANING:

4.1.1

Ensure that the power supply to the instrument is switched off and main cord is
removed from supply.

4.1.2

Clean the instrument with a clean dry cloth everyday. A wet cloth dipped in dilute
soap solution may be used occasionally.

4.1.3
4.2

Precaution must be taken to clean the instrument immediately with dry cloth.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

4.2.1

Ensure that the instrument is properly connected to the power supply.

4.2.2

Fix the column and prepare the mobile phase.

4.3

PREPARATION OF MOBILE PHASE

4.3.1

Use HPLC grade solvent / water & AR/Excel/ HPLC grade reagent only.

4.3.2

Filter the mobile phase through 0.45 membrane filter after mixing it in required
proportion and de-gas on ultrasonic bath for about 5 minutes.

4.4

PROCEDURE TO GET STARTED

4.4.1

Switch on pump, auto injector, detector and then system controller.

4.4.2

Turn the drain valve knob to 180 in anti- clockwise to open the drain valve to run
the purge system.

4.4.3

After the purge is over close the drain valve.

4.4.4

Set desired flow rate by pressing function key.

4.4.5

Press pump key. The pump will run and indicator will glow.

4.4.6

Purge the auto injector by pressing purge key on auto sampler display.

4.4.7

Enter the desired wavelength on detector using function key

4.5

PROCEDURE TO OPERATE CLOSE UP

4.5.1

Switch on the computer monitor and printer.

4.5.2

Double click on the main Menu of SHIMADZU Icon.

4.5.3

It will show Confrigration, Real Time, and Sample Shedule & Post Run Analysis.

4.5.4

Open Real Time.

4.5.5

From the file menu create a new method or load the existing method.

4.5.6

Create a new sample shedule and feel sample name, batch number,,sample
volume , method name and file name ,after then save the shedule .

4.5.7

Run Sample Shedule .

4.5.8

For system suitability test, inject six continuous injections of same standard and
RSD should not be more than 2.0 %, otherwise it is specified in standard test
procedure.

4.5.9

After every ten injection of sample (5 samples in duplicate), the standard solution
shall be injected 3 times and the RSD shall be calculated and ensure that it is within
the limit.

4.6

SHUT DOWN PROCEDURE

4.6.1

Close Sample Shedule, Real Time and then CLASS LC 10 to Software.

4.6.2

From Start button select Shut down and click yes.

4.6.3

Switch-off the computer.

4.6.4

Switch-off CBM.

4.6.5

Switch-off Detector then, auto sampler.

4.6.6

Stop pump by pressing, Pump key and switch off the pump module.

4.7

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE.

4.7.1

FOR PUMP:

4.7.1.1 Disconnect the column and connect the inlet and outlet tubings with a union.
4.7.1.2 Prime all the lines at 5 ml/min flow rate with water and ensure that flow line is
free from air bubbles.
4.7.1.3

Set the flow rate at 1ml / min and collect the mobile phase (water) in a dry

preweighed beaker and collect the mobile phase for 10 min. weigh the beaker to get
the weight of mobile phase.
4.7.1.4 Calculate the flow rate by dividing the weight obtained with weight per ml and 10
(run time).
4.7.1.5

Calculate the corresponding flow rate. Carry out the experiment in duplicate.

4.7.1.6 Repeat the same procedure for Pump- B

4.7.1.7 Record the observation in Annexure -1


4.7.1.8 Acceptance criteria: Flow rate should be in between 0.99 to 1.01 ml / min..
4.7.2

FOR GRADIENT VALVE:

4.7.2.1 Install union in place of column & flush solvent lines (A&B) at flow rate of 2ml/min
with water.
4.7.2.2 Prepare the mobile phase.
4.7.2.3 Prepare 0.3% acetone with HPLC grade water.
4.7.2.4 Fill reservoir A with 100% HPLC grade water & reservoir B with 0.3% acetone in
HPLC grade water as mobile phase.
4.7.3
4.7.3.1

INSTRUMENT SET UP:


Enter the following time program:
TIME

FUNCTION

VALUE

0.01

B CONC

10

10.00

B CONC

10

10.01

B CONC

50

20.00

B CONC

50

20.01

B CONC

90

30.00

B CONC

90

30.01

B CONC

100

40.00

B CONC

100

40.01

B CONC

50.00

B CONC

4.7.3.2

Use detector at wavelength of 254 nm.

4.7.3.3

Record the printout of gradient valve test as per Annexure - 2.

4.7.3.4

The gradient valve test shall be accepted if actual concentration with 1% of set
concentration.

4.7.4

CALIBRATION OF INJECTOR:
CHECK FOR PRECISION: Purge the injector system with 100% water to ensure the
complete washing of injector.

4.7.5
4.7.5.1

STANDARD PREPARATION:
Transfer about 50 mg of Uracil to a 250ml volumetric flask. Add 100ml of
Methanol, sonicate to dissolve and make up the volume with Methanol to obtain a
solution containing about 0.02 mg/ml of Uracil.

4.7.5.2

Filter the solution through 0.45m membrance filter.

4.7.5.3

Use HPLC grade Methanol as the mobile phase.

4.7.5.4

Instrumental Set Up
Column

4.7.5.5

: Hypersil ODS or equivalent 150 x 4.6 mm, 5.0m

Flow rate

: 1.0 ml/min

Injector Volume

: 20m litre

Detector

: 254 nm

Inject the standard preparation six times in the system. The peak areas observed
shall be consistent.

4.7.5.6

The relative standard deviation for area counts calculated shall not be more than
1.0%.

4.7.5.7
4.7.6

Record the observation in the format as mentioned in Annexure 3.


CHECK FOR LINEARITY:

4.7.6.1 Inject 10, 20, 30, 40 & 50m litre of standard preparation in duplicate. Calculate
the average area counts corresponding to each set of injection.

4.7.6.2 Tabulate the average area against each injection. Plot a graph for area counts vs
mlitre the resulting graph shall be linear.
4.7.6.3 The correlation co- efficient calculated shall be not less than 0.99.
4.7.6.4 Record the observation as per the Annexure - 3.
4.7.7
4.7.7.1

CALIBRATION OF DETECTOR:
Standard preparation. Mobile phase, Instrument set- up same as mentioned in
calibration of Injector.

4.7.7.2

Run the chromatograph at different wavelength (252 nm 262 nm with 2 nm


increment)

4.7.7.3

The largest peak response shall be at 258 nm 2nm.

4.7.7.4

Record the results in the detection calibration record as per the Annexure - 4.

4.7.7.5

Affix a calibration status label on the instrument containing Calibrated On,


Due On and Signature.

4.7.7.6

Report to Head QC, if any discrepancy observed during calibration or operating


the instrument and affix Under Maintenance label on the instrument.
UNDER MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT

SINCE

:
SIGNATURE:

4.7.8 FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION:

4.7.8.1

Detector :

Once in three months and after each maintenance job.

4.7.8.2

Pump

Once in three months and after each maintenance job.

4.7.8.3

Injector :

Once in six months and after each maintenance job.

4.7.8.4

Gradient :

Once in six months and after each maintenance job in the pump.

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-Trainees

Period
7.0

--

Head Quality Control


--

Quality Control Chemists and Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:
Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control
Certified Copy No. 2 : File copy in HPLC Calibration Data
Reference Copy No. 3 : Display copy Near HPLC System
Original Copy

8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:
Annexure 1

9.0

: Format For Calibration Record Of Pump (Flow Rate)

Annexure 2

: Format For Calibration Record Of Gradient Proportionate Valve

Annexure 3

: Format For Calibration Record Of Injector

Annexure 4

: Format For Calibration Record Of Detector

REFERENCES:
In house.

ANNEXURE 1
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION RECORD OF HPLC
Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Calibration Record

Instrument No.

Make And Model

Page No.: 1 of 1

Effective from:

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph

Calibration Date

Calibration Due On

:
Calibration Of Pump (Flow Rate):

Observed weight in gm.


Flow rate adjusted to 1.0 ml / min.

1 2

Mean wt. /

Mean

min

Vol. / min

Limit in ml
/ min.

Pump-A
Weight of beaker + water after 10
min. (W2)
Weight of beaker (W1)

0.99 to
1.01

(W2 W1) / 10
Pump-B
Weight of beaker + water after 10
min. (W2)
Weight of beaker (W1)
(W2 W1) / 10

0.99 to
1.01

Weight per ml of water =

________ gm.

Calibrated By:

Checked By:

Date

Date :

ANNEXURE 2
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION RECORD OF HPLC
Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Page No.: 1 of 1

Effective from:

Calibration Record

Instrument No.

Make And Model

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph

Calibration Date

Calibration Due On

Calibration Of Gradient Proportionate Valve


Parameters :
Mobile Phase

: Reservoir A 100% Water with HPLC


Reservoir B 0.3% Acetone HPLC

Wavelength

: 254 nm.

Flow rate

: 2 ml / min.

Tine
Range

Height From Base Line


To B Concentration
Peak.

Value

Actual Value Set In

Obtained

The Program

0.01 To

(Lt: 9.9 To

10.0

10.1)

10.01 To

(Lt: 49.5 To

20.0

50.5)

20.01 To

(Lt: 89.1 To

30.0

90.9)

Value :

Height of B Concentration
-------------------------------------Height of a 100 % Concentration

Remarks:

Satisfactory / Not Satisfactory

Calibrated By:

Checked By:

Date

Date :

ANNEXURE 3
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION RECORD OF HPLC
Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Effective from:

Calibration Record

Instrument No.

Make And Model


Calibration Date

:
:

Page No.: 1 of 1

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph

Calibration Due On

Calibration Of Injector : 1. Check for Precision:


Standard Preparation:
Take ______ mg of Uracil (about 50 mg) 250 ml. 5ml 50ml with Methanol.
Parameters:
Mobile Phase : Methanol HPLC grade.

Column : ODS (150 mm x 4.6 mm. 5

micron)
Wavelength : 254 nm.

Flow rate : 1 ml / min.

Injection volume : 20 l.

Inject six replicate injection of standard solution and calculate RSD for area of main
peak.
Injection no.

Area

% of RSD

Limit

1
2
3

Not More Than 1.0 %

4
5
6

2.Check for Linearity :

Sr.

Injection

No.

volume

10 l.

Correlation coefficient
Area Mean

Observed

Limit

results
i)
ii)

Not less than


0.99

i)
20 l.

ii)
i)
30 l.

ii)
i)
40 l.

ii)
i)
50 l.

ii)
Remarks: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory.

Calibrated By:

Checked By:

Date

Date :

ANNEXURE 4
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION RECORD OF HPLC
Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Effective from:

Calibration Record

Instrument Sr. No.

Make And Model

Calibration Date

Calibration Due On

Page No.: 1 of 1

High Performance Liquid Chromatograph

Calibration Of Detector
Standard Preparation:

Take _____ mg of Uracil ( about 50 mg.) 250 ml. 5ml 50ml with Methanol.

Parameters:
Mobile Phase: Methanol HPLC grade

Column: ODS (150 mm x 4.6 mm. 5

micron)
Wavelength: 252- 264 nm with 2 nm increment.

Flow Rate: 1 ml / min.

Injection Volume: 20 l.

Sr.No.

Wavelength (nm)

Area
1)

252
2)
1)

254
2)
1)

256
2)
1)

258
2)
1)

260
2)
1)

262
2)

Mean

1)
7

264
2)

Largest peak response is observed at __________ nm. (Limit: 258 nm 2


nm)
Remarks: Satisfactory / Not Satisfactory
Calibrated By:

Checked By:

Date

Date :

You might also like:

OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION

AND
AND
AND
AND

CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION

OF
OF
OF
OF

REFRACTOMETR
POLARIMETER
MICROPIPETTE
ANALYTICAL BALANCE
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:18 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment
DESTRUCTION OF ANALYTICAL SAMPLES AFTER TESTING
1.0.

OBJECTIVE:
The objective of this SOP is to describe a procedure for the destruction of balance
analytical samples after analysis and control samples.

2.0.

RESPONSIBILITY:

2.1

Chemist Quality Control shall be responsible for Destruction of the remaining


unwanted Analytical samples after analysis.

2.2

Head - Quality Assurance shall be responsible for ensuring the destruction of


samples as per the procedure.

3.0.

ACCOUNTABILITY:
Head Quality Control

4.0.

PROCEDURE:
NOTE: 2% w/v solution of sodium hydroxide shall be used to inactivate
samples before Disposal.

4.1

Tablets and Capsules:


Blend Analysis
After analysis, discard the balance sample of the tablets and capsules into a wet bin
containing 2 % w/v solution of sodium hydroxide. Deface the label of poly bag and
discard the bag into waste bin after treating it with 2 % w/v solution of sodium
hydroxide

4.2

Bulk Analysis
After analysis, discard each and every capsule or tablet into the wet bin containing
2 % w/v solution of sodium hydroxide. Deface the label of poly bag and discard the
bag into waste bin.after treating it with 2 % w/v solution of sodium hydroxide.

4.3

Finished product control samples:


Cut the blisters / strip packs and take out the tablets / capsules and discard them
into the wet bin containing 2 % w/v solution of sodium hydroxide. Discard the empty
blisters / strip packs into waste bin. after treating it with 2 % w/v solution of sodium
hydroxide.

4.4

Dry syrups / powders and oral liquids.


Discard the powders / liquids in wet bin containing 2% w/v solution of sodium
hydroxide. Deface the label on the bottle. Glass bottle shall be treated with 2 % w/v
solution of sodium hydroxide before disposal to the vial / bottle crusher.

4.5

Raw Materials
After analysis, discard balanced sample of raw material into the wet bin containing
2 % solution of sodium hydroxide. Deface the label of polybag and discard into the
waste bin.

4.6

Packaging Materials

4.6.1

After analysis, cut the material into pieces and it to scrap yard.

4.6.2

At the end of the day remove the wet bin from the laboratory premises and send
it to the ETP to discard the waste.

5.0.

TRAINING:

6.0.

Trainer

--

Head Quality Control

Trainee

--

All departmental heads / Quality Control Personnel

Period

--

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

7.0.

Certified Copy No. 1

Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

Excutive Micro

Certified Copy No. 3

For Display In IPQA

Original Copy

Head QUALITY ASSURANCE

ANNEXURE:
Nil.

8.0.

REFERENCE:
In-House
You might also like:

STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS & DESTRUCTION AFTER ANALYSIS


ANALYTICAL REFERENCE NUMBERING SYSTEM

REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ANALYTICAL RAW DATA


Analytical report numbering

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:03 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment
Links to this post

Create a Link
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF MICROPIPETTE
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down a procedure for operation and calibration of micropipetter.


2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist / Q.C Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Head - Quality Control

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1 For 0-200l micropipetter. (carry out all the activities at Temperature 25C )
4.1.1

Adjust micropipetter to 50l by rotating the adjusting scale at clockwise or


anticlockwise direction.
4.1.2

4.1.3

Insert the micro-tip tightly to the micropipetter.

Pipette out in previously tared beaker on weighing balance and note the reading.

4.1.4

Carry out the procedure twice and note the weight displayed on the balance,
calculate the mean and standard deviation of three readings and record it in the
format as given in annexure-I.

4.1.5

The weight per ml of water at 25C when weight in air is 0.99602 g .Divide the
mean with weight per ml to get the volume dispensed.

4.1.6

Carry out similar procedure by setting micropipetter to 100l and 200l .


4.2

For 200l to 1000l micropipetter

4.2.1

Repeat the same procedure as above by setting 200, 500 & 1000l

quantity.
4.2.2
4.3

Note the observations in the format given in Annexure-I

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA :
4.3.1 Standard deviation between three readings should not be more than

1%.
4.3.2

The volume dispensed should not vary by more than 1% of the set

volume.
4.4

FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION
Quarterly

5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer -

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2 : For Display Near The Micropipetter
Original Copy
8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

Annexure 1. Format for Clibration of Micropipetter


9.0

REFERENCES:

In house.
ANNEXURE I
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION OF MICROPIPETTER
Revision No.

REF. SOP NO.:

: 00

Effective Date:

Page No.: 1 of 1

CALIBRATION DATE:MAKE / MODEL:CALIBRATION DUE:Weight per ml of water : ____________


VOLUME

DISPENSED

WEIGHT RECORDED

Temperature of water =
STANDARd

OBSERVE

DEVIATION

MEAN
( NMT- 1% )

(l )

VOLUME

LIMITS
(l )

(l )

II

III

0 200 l
50

49.550.5

100

99.0-101

200

198-202

200 1000 l
200

198-202

500

495-505

1000

990-1010

CONCLUSION: The Micropipetters are working within / out of specified limit.


Frequency of calibration Quarterly once

Done by:
Checked
by:
Sign.& Date
Sign.& DatE
You might also like:

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALYTICAL BALANCE


OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF REFRACTOMETR
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF POLARIMETER
Operation and Calibration of Heating-Blocks
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:05 PM


CULTURE MEDIA PREPARATION FOR MICROBIAL TEST
1.0

OBJECTIVE
To lay down a procedure for preparing of media for microbiological tests.

2.0

RESPONSIBILTY

Microbiologist./ Q.C Executive.


3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Head - Quality Control

4.1.1

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

INTRODUCTION

Before employing any dehydrated media for analysis ensure that the growth
promotion test has been performed for that particular batch or lot or any new media
procured.
4.1.2

Media for Microbiological testing should be prepared as per

requirements.
4.1.3

For preparing any culture media (Solid or Liquid) take properly cleaned glass
container of different volumes as per requirement.

4.1.5

Select the glass container such that the medium volume be prepared, is half of its
capacity.

4.1.6

Follow the instructions given by the manufacturer for preparing the culture media
(Name of the Mfr.).

4.1.7

Weigh the media powder as mentioned on the label of the container and Annexure
II . Reconstitute with distilled water and mix the powder stirring with glass rod.
4.1.8

Warm the powder mixed distilled water, if required, to dissolve the

powder
Completely & check the pH of the solution with the help of pH
indicator strips.
4.1.9

Plug the mouth of the container by non-absorbent cotton and wrap butter paper
/Alue. Foil to prevent any Contamination and label.

4.1.10

Boil or sterilize the media at 121C for 20 min, as per manufacturer

instruction and
check the pH after aterilization.
4.1.11

After completion of all the above procedures label each media containers with
media name, media lot no. date of preparation, and Use before date on the
container . Pre-incubation must be done at 30-35C
for at least 48 hrs before taken for use. In case if the medium is
required to be use
immediately, keep appropriate negative and positive control to
ensure the proper
sterilization and fertility of the medium.
4.1.12

Record the media preparation and pre-incubation details in Media

preparation record
as mentioned in Annexure I.
4.1.13 Prepared media can be used within 1month period if properly sealed and stored at
temperature < 25C.
4.1.14

Whenever new bottle is opened write the date of opening , Date of growth
promotion test and signature on the bottle.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer --

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2 : For microbiology Department.
Certified Copy No. 3 : For Display in Media preparation Room
Original Copy
8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:
Annexure I

9.0

REFERENCES:
Himedia Manual
ANNEXURE I
LIST OF MEDIA

REF. SOP NO.:

Sl.n

Revision No.

: 00

Effective Date

Media

Gms. /L

Page No.: 1 of 1

pH

o.
1.

Soyabean

Caesin

Digest 30.00

Fluid

Thioglycollate

Media 29.75

Soyabean Caesin Digest Agar

40.00

Brilliant Green Agar (BGA),

58.00

5.

Bismuth Sulphite Agar(BSA)

52.33

for 20 min

7.7 Boiling
0.2

6.

Deoxycollate

Citrate

Agar 70.52

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

for 20 min

6.9 Sterilization
0.2

1210C

for 20 min

7.3 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

7.1 Sterilization
0.2

(SCDA)
4.

7.3 Sterilization
0.2

(FTGM),
3.

for

preparation

Media (SCDM),
2.

Procedure

7.5 Boiling

(DCA)
7.

0.2

Selinite Broth (SCB),

23.00

7.0 Boiling
0.2

8.

Tetra thionate Broth (TTB),

77.4

/ --

Boiling

980ml
9.

Mac

Conkey

Broth

Purple 35.0

(MB),
10.

Xylose

0.2
Lysine

Deoxycholate 56.68

Agar (XLDA),
11.

7.3 Sterilization

Mac ConkeyAgar (MA),

48.5

12.

Sabaurud

Dexterose

Agar 65.0

(SDA),
13.

Azide Dextrose Broth (AZB),

34.7

14.

Vogel Jhonson Agar (VJA)

61.0

15.

16.

Urea Broth (UB),

Manitol Salt Agar (MSA),

17.

Baired Parker Agar (BPA),

6.8 Sterilization

ml DW

0.2

111.0

7.4 Sterilization

63.0

19.

Nutrient Broth (NB),

13.0

20.

Cetrimide Agar (CA)

45.3

21.

Antibiotic assay medium no.-3

17.5

22.

B12 assay agar

51.5

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

at

1210C

for 20 min

for 20 min

7.0 Sterilization
0.2

1210C

for 20 min

7.2 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

7.4 Sterilization
0.2

1210C

for 20 min

7.0 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

18.7/50

0.2

1210C

for 20 min

7.2 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

7.2 Sterilization
0.2

1210C

for 20 min

5.6 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

7.1 Sterilization
0.2

1210C

for 20 min

7.4 Sterilization
0.2

at

for 20 min

7.2 Sterilization

0.2
23.

B12 culture agar

37.85

7.0 Sterilization
0.2

24.

Triple sugar iron agar

65.0

for 20 min

for 20 min

You might also like:

FERTILITY ( GROWTH PROMOTION ) TEST FOR MEDIA.


Disposing of microbiological culture media
Preparation of Microbial Plates
Preparation and Maintenance of Standard Operating Procedure
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF BULK DENSITY APPARATUS
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down procedure for operating of bulk density apparatus.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

Q.C. Chemist / Q.C Executive.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Manager Q.C.

4.0

4.1.

PROCEDURE

OPERATION

1210C

at

1210C

for 20 min

7.4 Sterilization
0.2

at

4.1.1.

The apparatus consist of following switches.

MAIN
STRT

SET

4.1.2.

Connect the instrument to a 230 V supply.

4.1.3.

Switch ON the instrument.

4.1.4.

NXT

CHK

Weigh atleast 10 g of sample and transfer it to 50 ml (or 25ml which is


suitable) measuring cylinder. Put stopper on it .

4.1.5.

Fix the measuring cylinder on the Bulk density stand.

4.1.6.

Set the apparatus to the required strokes by adjusting switches.

4.1.7.

Put on STRT switch.

4.1.8.
screen.

4.1.9.

The apparatus starts working and stroke rate displayed on the

After the completion of the specified stroke .The apparatus will go OFF
automatically with a buzzer.

4.1.10. For repeating the analysis. Press STRT .

4.1.11. Switch off the MAIN after the analysis.

4.1.12 Calculate the bulk density of the sample by measuring the volume of the
sample on
measuring cylinder , occupied after setting it specified strokes.

Wt. of sample
B.D =

---------------- X gm / c.c
Volume

4.2.

CALIBRATION PROCDURE

4.2.1.

Put ON the mains.

4.2.2.

Set the apparatus for 50 strokes by adjusting the push button.

4.2.3.

Put STRT the switch.

4.2.4.

Counter the number of strokes.

4.2.5.
check actual strokes.

Change the setting to the following number of strokes and

50

75
100
4.2.6.

49-51

:
:

73-77
98-102

Report the results in the format given in Annexure I.

4.2.7. If the calibration is not proper then report to the department


head for an appropriate action.

4.3.

FREQUENCY
Monthly.

5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

Head Quality Control

Trainees-Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2. : For Display near the Bulk Density Test Apparatus
Original Copy

8.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

Annexure 1., formats for calibration of Bulk Density Apparatus

9.0

REFERENCES:

In house.

ANNEXURE I

CALIBRATION OF BULK DENSITY APPARATUS

REF. SOP NO.: K/QC/034

Name of
Instrument

Revision No.: 00
Effective from:

Bulk Density Apparatus

Make

Calibration
date

SET STROKE

Page No. : 1
of 1

Instrument Id

Model

Next Calibration Due


on

OBSERVED STROKES

LIMITS ( STROKES )

50

50 1

75

75 2

100

100 2

REMARKS : Satisfactory / Not satisfactory.

CALIBRATED BY

CHECKED BY

You might also like:

Bulk Density Apparatus


OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF DISSOLUTION TEST APPARATUS
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF KARL FISCHER APPARATUS
Calibration of Disintegration test apparatus
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:11 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF POLARIMETER


1.0

OBJECTIVE
To lay down a procedure for operation & calibration of polarimeter.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Q.C. Chemist / Q.C Executive.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Manager Q.C.

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1

OPERATION
4.1.1.Following are the keys present on the instrument:
STOP

4.1.2.

Print

FILE

HELP

Zero

START

Switch on the instrument power supply, and wait for few minutes.

4.1.3.

As soon as the power is switched on ,the monitor shows the companys name and go on
initializing For 5.13 minutes.

4.1.4

After that the Instrument is in the "READY" mode for automatic operation indicated by
READY. Display :

4.1.5.

Lift the door of the sample compartment and place the sample cell filled with media in which
sample is prepared (ensure that no air bubbles are there ). Push ZERO keys for zero clearing.

4.1.6.
4.1.7.

Push EDIT key and enter identification and concentration of sample .


Place the sample cell filled with sample solution ( ensure that no air bubbles are there ) and
press START key. Take the reading displayed on the digital screen .
4.2. CALIBRATION :
4.2.1. Prepare the standard solutions of sucrose in distilled water of different concentrations
from 10 %
To 50 % and sonicate if necessary . Use distilled water as a blank and operate the
instrument as
Per SOP.
4.2.2. Clean the sample cell with distilled water and check the reading . Press ZERO to get
the
zero of the distilled water blank. Place the sucrose solution one after
another from 10 % to 50 % and measure the optical rotation for each solution which should be
comparable with values given below:CONCENTRATION
10 %
20 %
30 %
40 %
50 %

ANGLE OF ROTATION
13.33
26.61
39.86
53.06
66.23

Check that instrument is clean and free from dust.

4.3. FREQUENCY : Three months


4.4. If the Calibration is not proper then report the results to the Department Head for an
appropriate
Action.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
STERILITY TESTING
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down a procedure for STERILITY TESTING


2.0

RESPONSIBILTY
Microbiologist/ Q.C Executive

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Quality Control Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1

MEMBRANE FILTERATION METHOD


4.1.1

4.1.2
4.1.3

Enter the area as per SOP

Carry out environmental monitoring test as per SOP

Follow S.O.P for transferring materials inside the sterile area.


4.1.4

Disinfect LAF station wth 70% filtered IPA solution & check the

manometer reading (i.e


between 1015 mm of water) then rinse hands with 70% filtered IPA solution
followed by drying hands
under the LAF before proceeding for testing.

For dry powder injections-Inject 5-10ml of sterile peptone water


into each vial of
injection(powder) by a sterile syringe after opening the flip-off seal
of the vial and dissolve
powder of the vial to be tested under RLAF & suck out the sample.
For liquid injections-Suck out the sample with a sterile syringe after opening the
flip-off seal of the vials to be tested under LAF.
4.3 Collect the sample in a empty sterile flask.
4.4 Place the sterilized filtration units on the filtration assembly under the RLAF which
is connected to a a collecting flask and with a vacuum pump by a tubing tightly
fitted with it.
4.5 Open the filtration units (A suitable unit consist of closed reservoir and receptacle
between which a properly supported membrane of Pore size of 0.22 and a
diameter of approx. 47 mm. At flow rate of 55 to 75ml of water per minute at a
pressure of 70 cm of mercury) carefully and pour the collected sample in the sterile
filtration assembly and filter the sample.
4.9 Start the vacuum pump as per SOP No. K/QC/092

4.10 Rinse the membrane filter with 3 x 100ml of peptone water.


4.11For sterility testing for STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION or any
liquid injections, rinse thoroughly
the outer portion of 20 nos. of ampoules/ vials and suck out water with the
help of sterile syringe.
4.12 Collect the sample in a sterile conical flask and filter it through 0..45
membrane filter and rinse the

membrane filter with 100ml of 0.1%sterile peptone water and in case of


liquid injections ,rinse the
membrane filter with 3 x 100ml of 0.1%sterile peptone water.
4.13 After completion of filtration ,cut the membrane filter into two with the help
of sterile scissor and
forceps and inoculate each half portion of it into sterile 100ml SCDM and
FTGM
4.14 After inoculation, close the mouth of the container tightly and incubate
SCDM tubes at 20-25C and
FTGM at 30-35C.
4.15 Hold the incubated tubes at the above mentioned temperature in incubator
for duration as mentioned in
pharmacopoeia .
4.16 Note the observations in the format as in annexure-I. For any adverse
result inform Manager QC &
follow SOP no.- K/QC/087.
5.0

ABBREVIATIONS :

SOP = Standard Operating Procedure


6.0

REFERENCES
USP 25 Page no.:- 1878 , E.P: - Page no. 125 , 2.6.1

7.0

ANNEXURES : Annexure I & II

ANNEXURE- I
QUANTITIES OF THE PRODUCT TO BE EXAMINED IN THE TEST OF STERILITY (AS PER
E.P)

Type of

Quantity per

Minimum qty to be used for each

preparation

container

medium ,unless otherwise justified &


authorized

Parenteral
preparations

Liquids
Less than 1 ml

The whole content of each container

1 ml or more

Half the content of each container but not more


than 20ml

Solids
Less than 50

The whole content of each container

mg
50 mg or more

Half the content of each container

but less than


300 mg
300 mg or

150 mg

more
MINIMUM NUMBER OF ITEMS RECOMMENDED TO BE TESTED(AS PER E.P)
Number of items in the batch

Minimum no. of items to be tested


for each medium

Not more than100 containers

10% or 4 containers, whichever is greater

More than 100 but not more than 500

10 containers

containers
More than 500 containers

2% or 20 containers, whichever is least

ANNEXURE -II
STERILITY TEST REPORT
(MEMBRANE FILTRATION METHOD)
Page 01 of 02

AR. NO./GR. NO.

TEST REPORT NO.

SAMPLE QTY.

BATCH NO.

MFG. DATE

EXP. DATE

QTY./BATCH SIZE

DATE OF

SAMPLED BY

SAMPLE

SAMPLING
DATE OF TEST

DATE OF REPORT

ANALYZED BY

MEDIA PREPARATIONS

SOYABEAN CASEIN DIGEST MEDIUM

FLUID THIOGLYCOLLATE MEDIUM

.DATE OF PREPARATION

.DATE OF PREPARATION

MEDIA BATCH NO.

MEDIA BATCH NO

MEDIA LOT NO.

MEDIA LOT NO.

TEST RESULT
NAME OF

SOYABEAN CASEIN DIGEST MEDIUM

MEDIA

INCUBATION TEMP. 20-25C

NO. OF DAYS

10

11

12

13

14

GROWTH
OBSERVED

NAME OF

FLUID THIOGLYCOLLATE MEDIUM

MEDIA

INCUBATION TEMP. 30-35C

NO. OF DAYS

10

11

12

13

14

10

11

12

13

14

10

11

12

13

14

GROWTH
OBSERVED

NEGATIVE CONTROLS
NAME OF

SOYABEAN CASEIN DIGEST MEDIUM

MEDIA

INCUBATION TEMP. 20-25C

NO. OF DAYS

GROWTH
OBSERVED

NAME OF

FLUID THIOGLYCOLLATE MEDIUM

MEDIA

INCUBATION TEMP. 30-35C

NO. OF DAYS

GROWTH
OBSERVED

POSITIVE CONTROLS

MEDIA

SOYABEAN CASEIN DIGEST

FLUID THIOGLYCOLLATE

MEDIUM

MEDIUM

DAYS

S. aureus

NA

C albicans/A

+v

+v

+v

+v

+v

niger

ve

ve

C. sporogenes

NA

INFERENCE:

+v

+v

+v

+v

+v

+v

ve

+v

+v

+v

+v

+v

+v

ve

NA

SAMPLE PASSES / DOES NOT PASSES IN STERILITY TEST AS PER


IP/BP/USP/IH

-ve : - No growth

and

+ve : - Growth

MICROBIOLOGIST

SIGN / DATE

MANAGER QA/QC

SIGN / DATE

You might also like:

Swab sampling and testing for clean rooms


Sampling, testing and release of raw materials
DESTRUCTION OF ANALYTICAL SAMPLES AFTER TESTING
Re-testing of raw materials and intermediates
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:33 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz

Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment
Links to this post

Create a Link
Newer Post Older Post Ho

PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF COMPUTERISED


FORMULATION ORDER ISSUE SYSTEM
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down the procedure for checking correctness of the computerized formulation order issue
system.
2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Production Planning Supervisor / Quality Control Chemist

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Production Planning Manager / Quality Assurance Manager

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1.
4.2.

Print computerized Formulation Order.


Check the Formulation Order for

4.2.1. Manufacturing Date


4.2.2. Expiry Date
4.2.3. Master Formula
4.2.4.
First in First out system
4.3.

Manufacturing Date
4.3.1.

Check the formulation order for the manufacturing date.


For example:-

The formulation order printed in the month of Jun2005 shall have the manufacturing
date
as Jun 2005.
4.3.2.
Expiry Date
Check the expiry date of active Ingredient(s), against Analytical Report Number (AR. No.)
Mentioned in the formulation order. Check the correctness by comparing with expiry date
mentioned in COA. Following guideline shall be followed while assigning Expiry for the
product.
4.4.

Domestic Products

The expiry date of the Finished Product shall be as per the expiry date of the product or expiry
date of its active Ingredient (s), whichever is earlier. Products having multiple active
ingredient(s) shall have expiry of Raw Material having the least expiry.
4.5.

Export Products

The expiry date of the Finished Product shall be as per the Shelf life assigned in Master
Formula.
4.6.
4.6.1.

MASTER FORMULA
Check the Formulation Order against the master formula issued by Product Development
Laboratory for following.
4.6.1.1. Code No.
4.6.1.2.Ingredient(s)
4.6.1.3.Batch Quantity

4.6.1.4. Actual Quantity Issued


4.6.2.

Calculation of active Ingredient(s) and Filler

4.6.2.1. Collect potency and moisture data of the active ingredients issued in the formulation order by
referring to the Certificate of Analysis from Quality Control and check the same with the
formulation order.
4.6.2.2. Calculate the actual quantity of active ingredients to be issued by referring to the
formula
specified in the Master Formula given by Product Development Laboratory and
the quantity of
the Filler.

4.6.2.3. Check the correctness of the quantity by comparing with quantity mentioned in Formulation
order.
4.7.

First in-First out system

4.7.1. Check the First in First out System for any two ingredients issued in Formulation
order.
4.7.2. In case of active ingredients, Check for the material in stock having less expiry
than that of the
issued material. If there is no stock of material having less
expiry, the First out system shall be
followed.
4.7.3.

After taking out the Formulation Order, check Analytical Report Number wise stock on
computer screen. In case of other ingredients, If there is no stock of previous Analytical Report
Number in the system, the First in-First out principle shall be considered to be followed.
4.8.

4.8.1.
4.8.2.
4.8.3.
4.8.4.

In case of any discrepancy, a team comprising of

Production Planning Manager


Quality Assurance Manager
Manager InfoTech
VP (Operation)
Shall investigate the matter and take corrective action. The investigation report shall be
documented.
Details of the investigation shall be documented as per Annexure-1.
4.9.

FREQUENCY OF VALIDATION

Five Formulation Orders of different products shall be checked during each Calendar Month
4.10. ABBREVIATIONS:
AR No. = Analytical Reference Number
COA = Certificate of analysis
5.0.

REASON FOR REVISION


Harmonization of format

6.0.

TRAINING:
Trainer

-Head Quality Control


Trainees--

Production Planning Supervisor / Quality Control Chemist

Period -7.0.

One day

DISTRIBUTION:
Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control
Original Copy
: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

8.0.

ANNEXURES :
Annexure I Investigation report.
Annexure II General Check List.

9.0.

REFERANCE
In-house

ANNEXURE-1
Investigation report
Revision No.: 00
Effective from:

REF. SOP NO.:

Page No. : 1 of 1

Date
Product

Batch Number

Market

Batch Size

F.O. Serial No.

Date

Sl.
No.

Ingredients

AR.
No

Data
from
Potency

Manual
Calculation
Moisture

Expiry
Date

As per
formulation
Actual
Quantity

Sign

Remarks

Quantity

POTENCY MOISTURE CORRECTION AND FILLER ADJUSTMENT


ANNEXURE - II
2. GENERAL CHECKLIST
REF. SOP NO.:

ITEM
A. Manufacturing Date

Revision No.: 00
Effective from:

Page No. : 1 of 1

CHECKED

SIGN

B. Expiry Date
C. Master Formula
DONE BY

CHECKED BY

You might also like:

Numbering system for Standard Operating Procedures and Index of Standard Operating
Procedure

ANALYTICAL REFERENCE NUMBERING SYSTEM

PROCEDURE FOR OPERATING OF SONICATOR

Issue and entry of Batch Manufacturing Records


LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 3:33 PM

OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF pH METER

1.0

OBJECTIVE :
To lay down a procedure for operating of pH meter.

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY
Chemist / Executive.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY
Manager Q.C

4.0

PROCEDURE
4.1. OPERATION

4.1.1.

Ensure the cleanliness of the instrument.

4.1.2.

Clean the electrodes with purified water and wipe with tissue paper.

4.1.3.

Switch ON the main power.

4.1.4.

To check the pH of the sample by dipp electrode in the sample solution taken in a suitable
container.
4.1.5. .Push READ bottom ,it beep .When reading be stable by showing [A]
record the results.

4.1.6.

Remove the electrode from the sample solution, wash with purified water and place in a
beaker of fresh purified water.
NOTE : ENSURE THAT THE TEMPERATURE OF THE SOLUTION IS
WITHIN 23C - 27
4.2.

PREPARATION OF STANDARD BUFFER SOLUTION


4.2.1.

In three, dry separate beakers take 1 buffer tablet of pH 4.0, 7.0 and 9.2

respectively.
4.2.2. Add 70 ml of Distilled Water to dissolve the tablets.
4.2.3. Transfer the preparation from beakers to clean 100 ml volumetric flasks
separately.
4.2.3. Rinse the beakers with distilled water and transfer to the volumetric
flasks.
4.2.4. Make the volume accurately to 100 ml with Distilled Water in each case.
4.2.5. Transfer the prepared buffer solutions of pH 4.0, pH 7.0, pH 9.2, in three
different
bottles, appropriately labeled.
4.2.6. Affix the labels on the bottles indicating the USE BEFORE---- Date of solution.
4.2.7.
4.3.

Prepared buffer solution is valid up to 7 days from the date of preparation.


CALIBRATION OF PH METER
4.3.1.

Clean the electrode with purified water and wipe excess water with tissue

paper.
4.3.2.

Deep electrode in pH 4.0 buffer and push CAL bottom, after stabule ,record the result
.Repeat the process with pH 7.0 and pH 9.2 buffers .

4.3.3.
4.4.4.
4.4.6.
4.5.

While checking the pH of buffer 4.0, 7.0 and 9.2 clean the electrode with purified water
every time.
After use keep the electrode dipped in the purified water .
4.4.5. Record the results in the format attached Annexure-1.
If the results of calibration are not conforming to the specified limits report to eh department
head for an appropriate action.
FREQUENCY
Daily

4.6.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
0.05 pH
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format.
6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

Head Quality Control


Trainees--

Period -7.0

Quality Control Chemists & Assistants

One day

DISTRIBUTION:
Certified Copy No. 1 :
Certified Copy No. 2:

Original Copy
8.0

Head of Department Quality Control


or Display near the pH Meter.

Head QUALITY ASSURANCE

ANNEXURES:
Annexure I. Format for calibration of pH meter.

9.0

REFERENCES:

Manufacturers Manual. / IP.

ANNEXURE I
FORMAT FOR pH METER CALIBRATION
Revision No.

REF. SOP NO.:

MAKE

: 00

Effective Date:

SERIAL No :

MODEL :

DATE

Page No.: 1 of 1

Ref. SOP :

CLEANLINESS

Limits

You might also like:

STANDARD BUFFERS

DONE BY

4.0

7.0

9.2

4.0
0.05

7.0
0.05

9.2
0.05

CHECK
BY

pH Meter
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF POLARIMETER
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF REFRACTOMETR
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALYTICAL BALANCE

LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:08 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALYTICAL BALANCE
1.0

OBJECTIVE

To lay down the procedure for operation and calibration of Analytical


balance .

2.0

RESPONSIBILITY

Quality Control Officer / Quality Assurance Officer.

3.0

ACCOUNTABILITY

Quality Assurance Manager / Quality Control Manager.

4.0

PROCEDURE

4.1.0

Clean the pan thoroughly prior to calibration.

4.1.1

Check that the air bubble is in the center of the level & if necessary adjust the
level by turning the leveling screws.

4.1.2

4.2.1

Switch ON the balance & allow it to stabilise for 15 mins.

4.2

Calibration Procedure :

4.2.0

Internal calibration

Ensure that the balance pan is not loaded & the doors of the weighing chamber is
closed properly.

4.2.2

Press the Set up button ,the balance will display CAL

4.2.3

Press Enter button the balance will displays CAL TYPE '

4.2.4

Then press Enter button the balance will display CAL TYPE ' InCAL

4.2.5

Then again press Enter button the balance will display INCAL

After a few seconds the balance will display CAL SET & then return to WEIGH
mode & displays as WEIGH 00000.

4.3

4.3.1

DAILY VERIFICATION OF BALANCE PERFORMANCE:

After internal calibration is completed verify the performance of the balance by


weighing 50 mg,
100 mg , 1g , 10 g and 50 g . Record the results in the format given in
Annexure I

4.4

CALIBRATION FOR MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY

4.4.1

Place 500mg standard calibrated weight on the pan.

4.4.2

Record the display of the weight.

4.4.3
Remove the weight & again place the weight on the pan & record the
display once again.

4.4.4
Repeat the above operation to get ten readings Calculate the standard
deviation of ten readings.

4.4.5

The measurement uncertainty shall be considered satisfactory if three times of


standard deviation of not less than 10 replicate weighing divided by amount weight
does not exceed 0.001.
Record the observations in the calibration record as per Annexure-II.

4.4.6

Affix a Calibration label on the instrument.

4.4.7
Report any discrepancy noted at the time of calibration to Q.C Manager &
notify the defect to rectify the instrument. & affix an UNDER MAINTENANCE label
on the instrument.

4.5

FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION:

4.5.1.The frequency of calibration shall be mentioned as below :


Internal Calibration

Daily

4.5.2.Verification of Balance Performance


maintenance job.

- Daily and after every

4.5.3.Calibration of measurement uncertainty - Monthly and after every


maintenance job.

5.0.

REASON FOR REVISION

Harmonization of format

6.0

TRAINING:

Trainer

-- Manager Quality Control

Trainees

-- Chemist / Assistants

Period

-- One day

7.0

DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1 : Head of Department Quality Control


Certified Copy No. 2 : For Display Near Analytical Ballance
Original Copy

9.0

: Head QUALITY ASSURANCE.

ANNEXURES:

ANNEXURE -I Attached.
ANNEXURE -II Attached.

9.0

REFERENCES:
In house/Manufacturer Manual

ANNEXURE -I
FORMAT FOR BALANCE CHECKING
Revision No.

REF. SOP NO.:

MAKE

MODEL

SERIAL No

DAT
E

CLEANLIN
ESS

: 00

Effective Date:

STANDARD WEIGHTS
50 mg

100 mg

1 gm

Page No.: 1 of 1

DONE
BY
10 gm

50 gm

CHECKE
D BY

Limits

50mg
0.1

100mg
0.1

1g
1mg

10g
10 mg

50g
50 mg

ANNEXURE -II
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION FOR MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY
Revision No.

REF. SOP NO.:

Effective Date:

Name of
Instrument
Instrument Ser.
No.

: Analytical Balance

Make & Model

Calibration date

Calibration due on

MEASURED UNCERTAINTY :

S.No.
1
2
3

Weight = 500 mg.

Displayed weight
(X)

: 00

Page No.: 1 of 1

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Standard deviation ( ) =

3 x

Measured Uncertainty = ---------------Wt measured


Acceptance Criteria: Measured uncertainty should not more 0.001.
REMARKS: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory.

CALIBRATED BY

APPROVED BY

You might also like:

Analytical balance-Libror
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF REFRACTOMETR
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF POLARIMETER
Analytical balance- Mettler Toledo
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 2:28 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:

0 comments:
Post a Comment
OPERATION AND CALIBRATION OF BURSTING STRENGTH TESTER

1.0.

OBJECTIVE:

The objective of this SOP is:


1.1

To describe the operation procedure of Bursting Strength Tester.

1.2

To describe the calibration procedure of Bursting Strength Tester.

2.0.

RESPONSIBILITY:

2.1

The Chemist - Quality Control shall be:

2.1.1.

Responsible for carrying out the analysis as per the procedure.

2.1.2.

Responsible for interpretation of the results obtained

2.1.3.

Responsible for timely calibration of the equipment.

2.1.4.

3.0.

Responsible for intimating any abnormal observation to Manager Quality


Control for necessary corrective actions.

ACCOUNTABILITY:

Manager Quality Control .

4.0.

PROCEDURE:

4.1.

CLEANING PROCEDURE:

4.1.1.

Switch OFF Power Supply of the equipment before cleaning. Clean the
equipment with a dry cloth every day.

4.1.2.

If necessary wet cloth shall be used for effective cleaning it shall be dried
immediately using a dry cloth.

4.2.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4.2.1.

Switch On the mains. This will bring the plunger to its starting positions. If the
plunger is already at its starting position, motor will not start on switching ON main.

4.2.2.

A representative sample of the material to be tested shall be placed over the


diaphragm. The sample size shall be cut to 10 X10 cm.

4.2.3.

Place the sample specimen on the Platform.

4.2.4.

The tripod plate shall tightened to apply sufficient clamping pressure in such a
way that sample does not slip.

4.2.5.

Select the gauge [II] for 3 ply shippers and partitions and gauge [I] for 5 ply and
7 ply shippers.

4.2.6.

Set the maximum hand of the gauge at zero or a point on the scale below the
point at which bursting will occur.

4.2.7.

Push the RED push button and keep it pressed so that plunger will start rotating
in clockwise direction till sample bursts. The push button is released as soon as the
sample bursts. Note down the gauge reading in Analytical Test Reports.

4.2.8.

Release the pressure on the test piece by rotating the clamp wheel in anti-cock
wise direction and remove the sample specimen.

4.3.

4.3.1.
4.3.2.

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

Clean the equipment using a clean cloth.


Check the glycerin level [this bursting strength tester is a hydraulic unit and its
accuracy depends on a completely filled hydraulic system. Inadequate glycerin
quantity affects the accuracy of the gauge readings]

4.3.3.

Take the standard Aluminium foil of 5.4 Kg / cm 2 for Gauge II and 9.5 kg / cm 2
for Gauge I provided by the manufacturer.

4.3.4.
4.3.5.

Operate the instrument as per operating procedure mentioned above.


Record the observations in the calibration record as per the Annexure - 1, in
case of any discrepancy observed, affix an Under Maintenance label on the
instrument and report to Executive - Quality Assurance to take necessary corrective
actions.

4.3.6.

After calibration affix the calibration status label.

4.3.7.

Acceptance Criteria

4.3.7.1. For Gauge I

9.0 to 10.0 Kg / cm2

4.3.7.2. For Gauge II

5.2 to 5.6 Kg / cm2

4.4.

Frequency of calibration:

4.4.1.

Quarterly.
5.0

REASON FOR REVISION


Harmonization of format.

6.0.

TRAINING:

Trainer

Manager Quality Control

Trainee

--

Quality Control Packaging Personnel

Period

--

One day

7.0.DISTRIBUTION:

Certified Copy No. 1

Head of Department Quality Control

Certified Copy No. 2

File copy in Packaging Laboratory

Certified Copy No. 3

For Display near the Bursting Strength Tester.

Original Copy

Head QUALITY ASSURANCE

8.0.ANNEXURE:

Annexure 1
Tester

9.0.REFERENCE:

Manufacturers Manual.

Format for Calibration Record of Bursting Strength

ANNEXURE 1
FORMAT FOR CALIBRATION RECORD OF BURSTING STRENGTH TESTER

Revision No.: 00

REF. SOP NO.:

Effective from:

Instrument no.
Name of instrument

Frequency

Page No.: 1
of 1

:
:

Bursting Strength Tester

Quarterly

Observed bursting Strength of standard


foils
Da
te

Gauge I
(Lt. 9.0 to 10.0
kg /cm2)

Gauge II
(Lt. 5.2 to 5.6
kg /cm2)

Calibrate
d by

Checke
d by

Rema
rks

You might also like:

OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION

AND
AND
AND
AND

CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION

OF
OF
OF
OF

SHORE HARDNESS TESTER


ANALYTICAL BALANCE
POLARIMETER
REFRACTOMETR
LinkWithin

Posted by Quality Assurance and GMP and ICH at 12:47 PM


Email This BlogThis! Share to Twitter Share to Facebook Share to Google Buzz
Reaction
s:
0 comments:
Post a Comment

También podría gustarte